
Photograph By Rick Daugherty
Recently, in every course I have had at least one or two students who have been interested in the concept of mobile ovens. Here are a number of pros and cons to keep in mind if you are thinking about investing in a mobile oven:
Pros:
• It is a minimal original investment as compared to a freestanding restaurant.
• Labor costs are low.
• These operate predominately on cash, meaning less cost to the business.
• Food trucks, right now, are extremely popular.
• Mobile ovens are great additions to a brick and mortar.
• They are a great way to follow your clientele.
• Having a mobile oven opens you up to more business opportunities such as off-site events.
Cons:
• Bad weather conditions can have a dramatic effect on business and daily sales.
• If using a wood burning oven, it will not cook aswell and function as well as one used every day.
• Space for refrigeration, workspace and storage space is extremely limited and not adequate for large volume.
• If serving predominately during lunch there is a small window of opportunity for business.
• The market is becoming over saturated with mobile trucks.
• Some cities have strict rules and regulations in regard to food trucks, such as health codes and permits, and some areas don’t allow them.
• Some distributors require a minimum amount for purchasing product so costs can become high if not using or going through a fair amount.
• It is sometimes hard to get specialized ingredients and/or imported ingredients when distributors are limited or have minimum price requirements that are high.
• Pricing can become a factor. You may have to price under $10 for some pizzas since lots of fairs, events and festivals tend to price food between $6 and $8
RESPECTING THE CRAFT features World Pizza Champion Tony Gemignani, owner of Tony’s Pizza Napoletana in San Francisco and Pizza Rock in Sacramento. Tony compiles the column with the help of his trusty assistants, Laura Meyer and Thiago Vasconcelos. If you have questions on any kitchen topic ranging from prep to finish, Tony’s your guy. Send questions via Twitter @PizzaToday, Facebook (search: Pizza Today) or e-mail jwhite@pizzatoday.com and we’ll pass the best ones on to Tony.

Photography By Rick Daughery
Q: How and where are expenses shown on a financial statement? – Kenny Reid, Boston, Massachusetts
A: Your financial statement really is your periodic snapshot and should be treated as your business’s report card. The function of business is to make a profit. If you do not make profit you are acting as a social worker, without a license.
It seems that every accountant has his or her favorite format for financial statements. If you are happy with the reports you’re getting (or not getting), stop reading and turn the page. If you can’t explain every deduction, what they represent and how they were arrived at you are exactly the kind of pizzeria the IRS is itching to audit. I’ve been audited three times in my career. After all the dust settled and several tense meetings it was up to me, not my accountant, to pay all of the unpaid back taxes as well as a huge penalty. Ignorance of the tax code is no defense. You lose and they win, period. Lose or forget a receipt or two or misclassify an expense and get ready to pay up. Just remember: if you can’t prove an expense, with absolute documentation, it doesn’t count and never happened.
There is an industry standard on how restaurant financials should look. It’s called The Uniform System of Accounts for Restaurants. It is recommended by the National Restaurant Association. One of the authors is a familiar name to our industry: CPA Jim Laube. I can’t count how many times I’ve relied on his expertise on money issues for clients.
I’ve also been asked “What makes up the expense category we call ‘labor.’ ” Labor cost is computed by adding up the following expenses:
- Management: generally full-time supervisors who are typically paid salary as well as the working owner/operator’s salary. Management bonuses and educational trips fall here as well.
- Staff: Hourly employees, cooks, drivers, prep, counter and all other staff.
- Taxes and benefits: These hidden soft labor costs are a direct cost of employees. Add the sum of all taxes, which includes federal payroll taxes, federal unemployment tax, state unemployment tax and state health insurance tax.
- Insurance and other related costs include: worker’s compensation insurance premiums as well as any disability, medical, group insurance, pension or retirement costs.
- Employee meals, parties, awards, prizes and bonuses also fall under the labor category. Essentially, any expense that is a cost to the business that is employee incurred is a cost of labor and should be included when reported.
If your detailed P&L statement doesn’t show labor expenses (or any other categories) in the proper line, you may be underestimating your true labor cost. My rule of thumb is this: a $10 an hour employee really costs the business around $13 an hour after all of the soft costs are added in.
Big Dave Ostrander owned a highly successful independent pizzeria before becoming a consultant, speaker and internationally sought-after trainer. He is a monthly contributor to Pizza Today.

Photo by Rick Daugherty
According to the National Restaurant Association, the most profitable menu items are soft drinks, followed closely by alcoholic drinks and then pastas and pizza.
The largest pizzeria chains in the world do not sell alcohol, and until just a few years ago they did not even sell pastas. Yet, they still make a lot of money on a limited menu. You might ask yourself: “How does a small operator like me, with one or two stores, maximize my profits?” Well, it is right in front of you. Just open your menu!
Your menu is a main ingredient in the overall recipe of your restaurant’s success. If it is too big, your food cost soars. Too small and your volume may suffer due to lack of variety. So the key to creating “moneymaking menu musts” is using the ingredients that you already have and offering your guest choices that are the most profitable for you.
We all know stale food is not good. Neither are stale menus. Today’s restaurant guests like consistency, but they also crave new options. National brand restaurants make seasonal menu changes that are reflected in their appetizer menu, salads, main courses and desserts … and so can you. It’s easy, fun and can increase your profits every day.
I love making fresh appetizers like onion rings or house-made mozzarella sticks. Take a look at the ingredients necessary to make either of these appetizers and you probably have both in your walk in — mozzarella cheese, onions, flour, baking soda, a few seasonings and beer! Remember, you have no new food ingredients to buy and you are making fresh apps that your guests are going to love. They will increase your profits and set you apart from your competition (which is probably buying items like this pre-made from their distributor). Consider this food cost breakdown:
Onion Rings
- A serving of onion rings is 10 rings.
- Onions are about 24 cents per serving.
- Beer batter costs 25 cents.
- 2 ounces of ranch dressing costs about 20 cents.
- The total food cost is 69 cents.
- Price these house-made beer battered onion rings at $5.95, and you’ll have a gross profit of $5.26.
Mozzarella Sticks
- A six-piece serving of mozzarella sticks is ideal.
- Mozzarella costs about $1.80. u Beer batter equals 25 cents.
- 2 ounces of ranch dressing costs 20 cents.
- The total food cost is $2.25.
- A six-piece order of homemade mozzarella sticks is priced at $6.95. Gross profit? $4.70. And always remember to increase your price point for homemade specials. Your guests will notice the flavor and pay for the quality!
Most pizzerias have pasta on the menu, but does your menu say “house-made pasta special”? It should if you want to make a moneymaking menu! Fresh pasta is easy to make, cooks much faster than dried pastas and tastes much better as well. Once you start making fresh pasta, your menu will explode with exciting new “specials.” And, remember, every time you make a “special” you can increase your profit margins. Here is my easy pasta dough recipe, which yields about six servings of pasta:
4 cups of 00 Flour
4 large eggs
2 tablespoon of water (as needed)
Mix ingredients in a small mixer or by hand until it is the consistency of “Play Dough,” wrap with plastic and let stand about an hour.
Bring salted water to boil and place your pasta in the pot to cook. At the same time, start your sauté of a ½ cup of fresh veggies, 2 ounces of bacon and a pinch of fresh garlic in EVOO. Then add a pinch of salt and pepper. Your fresh pasta will cook in about 3 minutes. Add your pasta to your sauce, toss in a pinch of Parmesan or Pecorino cheese and top with a fresh basil leaf.
The total food cost is just $1.25 with a special menu price of $9.95 — making you a gross profit of $8.70. One of the secrets to creating a menu that consistently delivers high profits is change. Remember to use fresh local vegetables, dairy products and proteins to create specials for your guests. By utilizing the ingredients you already have in your kitchen, this will keep food cost low and make experimenting with new recipes easy.
Now that you have an idea of what your new menu items will be, it’s time to make sure your guests order them. Don’t worry about having to rewrite your menu and spend a bunch of money recreating it. Here are a few ideas to use no matter your restaurant situation:
- Counter service, carryout and delivery. Printing up a quick specials menu is easy and inexpensive. Just list your specials — from apps to desserts — and price accordingly. Whether your guest orders a special right on the spot or takes home the menu, you still have sparked the idea for them to try something new. Get excited about your new menu items and your guests will be excited too.
Send home new special menus with walk-in guests and delivery orders as well and you will see the orders start Wiscon Corp coming with every new call. Run your specials for at least two weeks so your regular guests get a chance to order them. You will be able to track your sales to see what is being ordered the most.
- Dine-in. If you are in the full-service business, then you already know how important it is to train your staff to sell the specials! Make it fun for them and make sure they taste the specials so they can honestly and accurately tell the guest what they are. Wait staff should know your menu inside and out and they should be trained to point out the most profitable menu items, so training is critical.
Glenn Cybulski is executive chef at Persona Neapolitan Pizzeria and a member of the World Pizza Champions. He will present a seminar on this topic at International Pizza Expo this month.

Photo by Josh Keown
My brother and I own a pizzeria and deli. We have been open almost two years and business has been OK, but not terrible. We are paying bills, payroll is covered and my brother and I are making money. I don’t think we are making profit; I feel we are making salary for the amount of work we are putting in (which is still good considering we are still open). The concern I have is we should be making more! We have a proven product that is far beyond the competition. I know there is always room for improvement (i.e. our delivery times, consistency with product and overall atmosphere of our location).

This is where I need some help. I’m torn between expanding my current location or opening a second location. We are a small location and not very appealing for a sit down location. So, should I stick to what we have or put my focus into another location, or possibly move and expand our current location?
Christopher L.
Florida
via e-mail
Whenever I get a question like yours, I feel I need to read between the lines and make some assumptions. My first assumption is that detailed financial statements are not being done every month. If you were doing your own or having them prepared by an accountant, you would know for sure if you were running in the black or red. In addition to the bottom line amount, good financials would show you your exact amounts as well as percentages for each and every expense category. If you don’t understand, or haven’t been mentored in basic profit & loss statement, balance sheet, cash flows, current ratios and what EBITDA means, you are not ready to open a second location. You have bought you and your brother a job. Unfortunately you two are the last ones getting paid.
One of my must read business books is titled The E Myth Revisited. The author, Michael E. Gerber, states a truism I absolutely agree with. He says: “The problem with most failing businesses I’ve encountered is not that their owners don’t know enough about finance, marketing, management and operations — they don’t, but those things are easy enough to learn — but they spend their time and energy defending what they think they know. The greatest business people I’ve met are determined to get it right no matter the cost.”
Start by getting yourself more up to speed on accounting. When you have a handle on that you are ready to take your next step. u
Big Dave Ostrander owned a highly successful independent pizzeria before becoming a consultant, speaker and internationally sought-after trainer. He is a monthly contributor to Pizza Today.

Photos by Josh Keown
So much of what happens in a restaurant is creative. All cooks like to think of themselves as artistes. It is, after all, called the culinary arts. But when it comes to the menu, that’s where science kicks in. In fact, too much creativity on a menu can have negative consequences.
That isn’t to say the menu shouldn’t be creatively produced. Indeed, the right colors, typeface and even photos in some cases are key elements. But knowing which colors, what typeface and font size and whether or not pictures should be incorporated are important considerations. They’re components in the science of menu engineering, and learning how to put the knowledge to work with your own menu can increase your profits significantly — without raising menu prices.
There are more than 30 menu-merchandizing techniques that have been proven to influence what guests buy. That’s more than can be itemized here — and more than you need to employ to effectively reengineer your menu. The best menus utilize no more than two of the strategies on one page and no more than five for the entire menu. But one of the most important elements to understand before considering any of the others has to do with what can best be described as your menu’s real estate. And just as with conventional real estate, the three most important things in menu engineering are location, location, location.
Think of your menu as a property development. And just as with, say, a condominium development, some pieces of the property are more attractive than others. If you were a developer, you’d want to put your high-rent properties in those areas that are going to attract the best buyers. It’s the same with your menu, but instead of relying on water features to get the attention of well-heeled condo buyers, or relegating the lower rent condos to the lots next to the railroad tracks, you need to understand how your buyers, the restaurant guests, make their selections. That’s where the science comes in. It is part behavioral and part sensorial.
Studies have determined that people read a menu in a particular pattern. Take for instance the typical three-panel menu. When guests open the menu, their eyes immediately go to the middle of the middle panel. Then they move to the top right of the right-side panel. And from there their eyes move across to the top of the left panel. That’s sort of the Golden Triangle –– the high rent district, if you will –– of your menu. And that’s where you want to put your high-margin signature items. (How to determine what those items are is a topic for another discussion.) That’s perhaps an oversimplification of a rather complex study in human behavior. But it isn’t necessary to know how it works, only why it works, and then take advantage of it. But important as it is to know where to place which items within the real estate of your menu, there are many more considerations as well. Some of these include:
- Item names. A simple cheese pizza becomes more alluring if named the Handmade Mozzarella Pizza.
- Item descriptions. Short descriptions are, as a rule, preferred. But if there is one item on the menu with a longer description than the others, your guests will take note. People are conditioned to notice something that’s different. u
- Negative space. Along the same line, by setting a signature item apart, with empty space around it, your guests’ attention will be drawn to it.
- Nested pricing. Instead of right-justification of the prices, which encourages the guest to shop by price, place the item’s cost at the end of the description, in the same font size. That encourages the guest to choose an item by its description, not by how much it costs.
- Don’t use dollar signs. Psychologically (more science!), dollar signs have been proven to actually create a negative physiological response of pain; much like a small pinch.
And in the “neatness counts” category, be sure to hire a professional copywriter to write and proofread your menu. Misspelled words and poor grammar and punctuation get noticed, and they reflect negatively on you. But beyond mere style, concise and compelling copy sells. Your niece may have gotten an A on her English composition essay, but that does not necessarily mean she can write irresistible menu descriptions that will make your guests want to buy your product.
Also, engage the services of a professional layout designer who can advise on font style and type size. Layout design is truly a combination of art and science. Flowery script and a tiny typeface can make a menu difficult to read. Hint: if your menu looks like a wedding invitation, you and your guests are headed for a break-up.
But none of this will matter and no amount of menu engineering can help if you haven’t first developed your brand’s personality, its story and its promise (three areas that will be more thoroughly explored at International Pizza Expo this month). Too many business owners equate their brand with their name and their product, but true branding goes much deeper than that.
Essentially, a brand’s personality is very much like the personality of a human. If your brand were a person how would it walk, talk and behave in public? Would it be whimsical or serious? What’s its favorite color? How does it dress — in a button-down shirt or cut-off jeans?
People love storytelling, so after you determine your brand’s personality, consider its story. It could very well be your story, too. But a focus of the story should be not what you sell but why you sell it, because, ultimately, that’s why people buy it.
And the brand promise communicates your pledge to the customer. It may be in the integrity of your ingredients, your dedication to sourcing local products, or a higher level of quality. Once you’ve developed them, your brand’s personality, story and promise will drive all aspects of your business, from the marketing you do, the sign you hang out front and the color you paint your walls. And yes, even the way you design your menu.
Aaron Allen is a global restaurant consultant representing foodservice clients spanning more than 100 countries worldwide and who collectively post more than $100 billion in annual revenue. He will speak on the topics of trends, menu engineering and restaurant makeovers at the upcoming 2013 Pizza Expo.

In the restaurant industry, I truly believe the difference between owning a job and owning a business is catering. The difference between eking out a living and living a great life is catering.
Before I sold my interest in my restaurant at the end of 2006, I had built my sales to over three million dollars a year out of a hundred and four seat restaurant. Over a million dollars of those sales were in catering. Roughly two thirds from drop-off/self-service catering and a third from full service events.
Not only did catering contribute the lion’s share to our profits, but each and every catering job was a free advertising opportunity for us. There’s no other way to get paid to market your restaurant. I learned this lesson the hard way. In the beginning, I trusted every . . . ad rep. I bought tons of television, radio, magazine and newspaper ads. Unfortunately, they knew less than I did.
If my sales did not improve they’d advise, “You need to advertise longer. It takes time to build a brand.” I didn’t have the time or the bankroll of Coca-Cola or Nike to wait that long or to waste dollars reaching prospects across town that were never going to buy from me.
I learned to cater not die! Catering is proactive, not reactive. You do not have to wait for a customer to walk in your front door. You can go to them. I catered many five figure events an hour or two outside of Nashville.
Say what you want about his hair, but Donald Trump’s “Apprentice” is one of the best shows on television today for the entire family. If you are in any type of business, each season offers up a mini-MBA on a silver platter with valuable lessons showcased each episode.
My two sons have no problem catching the moral and lesson each week. I remember an episode where two competing teams set up Outback Steakhouse concession stands at opposite ends of the Rutgers’ campus before a football game. They were each given space on a parking lot and turned loose to get the word out about their stand.
The all male team was off to a fast start. They went about creating an “Event” to draw in visitors. They were able to land an exclusive to have the cheerleading and dance team perform at their venue. They were always a step ahead of the all female team when it came to promotions: getting flyers out, hitting fraternity row and the school’s pep rally.
The women appeared doomed from the outset. Once the concession stands opened, the line was long at the men’s tent. The women’s was short and they started to get concerned. Well if necessity is the mother of invention, then spiraling sales is the mother of out-of-the-box marketing.
One of the women decided that if the customers weren’t coming to the concession stand, they’d bring the concession stand to the customers. They loaded up aluminum pans and went to each tailgate party and sold nose to nose and toes to toes. Wasn’t pretty, booth was dead, but they sold 50 percent more than the guys. They humiliated them.
Sort of reminds me of the first summer my barbecue restaurant was open. We had a concession stand in downtown Nashville, for the Fourth of July celebration.
We sucked wind. Jack Cawthon, a friend now, but not then, owned a little BBQ joint 50 feet away from us in the middle of all the action. He had an unfair advantage. Because of his beer permit, he was the only one selling beer on that sweltering July day. Made no difference how good my “Q” was, he had what people wanted, beer.
As a result, they bought their food at his place and sat outside on picnic benches polishing off cans of Bud and Miller Lite. He raked it in.
To salvage the event, we took trays, loaded them up with large Cokes and went into the crowd selling drinks like the hawkers at a baseball stadium. We never got rich, but it prevented the day from being a total massacre.
What’s this have to do with you and your restaurant? You can’t always easily change your circumstances, like location or competition, but you can change how you look at your challenges. There are multiple profit and sales centers you can add to your restaurant (like catering, my specialty).
I have helped hundreds of restaurants keep their doors open. Layla Gambs comes to mind. A major road construction project was obstructing access to her restaurant. With sales down 28%, she was close to locking the doors for good. After hearing me speak in Phoenix, she rolled up her sleeves and started catering. Catering gave her the sales she desperately needed to stay in business and ultimately thrive when construction was completed.
She chose to cater, not die!
I believe we are at a time in the life cycle of restaurants where most operators are forced to add or expand their catering profit centers or risk going out of business. At minimum, failing to cater hampers your ability to make more than just a living.
I see franchises, chains and independents embracing the catering profit center. They all realize the potential to double profits without doubling overhead. Realistically, most concepts from ice cream to Italian restaurants can easily add ten percent to their top line sales. It is not uncommon to see twenty to thirty percent of a restaurant’s sales in catering, but they must develop the systems to make it a reality.
My presentation at Pizza Expo is dedicated to helping you cater, not die. You’ll learn the same system responsible for me building a seven figure catering profit center. You’ll see actual examples and learn real techniques from my archives; promotions responsible for building my catering sales.
You will see a very detailed marketing flow chart of growing, servicing and retaining your catering business. As opposed to a book full of disconnected ideas, you will walk away with a plan you can use, step-by-step to build and better manage your catering profit center.
Lack of knowledge may be a reason for failing, but lack of trying is no excuse. After reading this book, you’ll be armed with knowledge and asked to leave your excuses at the door.
Listen. Can you hear it? It’s getting closer, ever louder. It’s the sound of your competitors jumping on the catering bandwagon. Failing to lay your claim can be costly.
Now is the time to cater or die!
Michael Attias will be presenting his seminar at Pizza Expo, “Seven Steps to Maximize Your Catering Sales,” on Wed., March 20, once in a morning session and again at 2:30 p.m. You can obtain an advance, free copy of his book “Cater or Die!” at the website RestaurantCateringSoftware.com.
For more details on International Pizza Expo 2013, visit www.pizzaexpo.com.
Related
If you've ever wished you could sit down with a super-successful operator and quiz him about the keys to pizza profits, you'll want to sit in on Pizza Expo 2013's Wednesday morning keynote one-on-one session with $6-Million-Man Bill Jacobs and Pizza Today editor Jeremy White.
Jeremy will be your surrogate at this kick-off to the second day of Expo, March 20. He'll guide the discussion with Jacobs, whose Piece Brewery & Pizzeria in Chicago grosses more than $6 million in sales per year from one unit. You'll learn through this candid insider's exchange why Jacobs sold his successful bagel company and turned to pizza in 2001; how he found the perfect location in a mature pizza market and built revenues; why he's resisted opening a second unit; and much more.
Piece was named Pizza Today's Independent Pizzeria of the Year in 2011 and Jacobs, a Connecticut native who brought New Haven-style pies to the Windy City, has an engaging story to tell. There will be time for questions from the crowd as well during this wide-ranging and insightful keynote session.
Visit PizzaExpo.com to learn more about next year's show. .
Related

At Pizza Expo® you’ll find 5½ football fields of pizza-related products, services and equipment, as well as leading industry experts, consultants and analysts who are all willing to share new ideas and insights on everything you need to adapt, react and prosper in today’s economy. At next year’s show, we’ve added several new speakers to the lineup of experts keeping you abreast of trends and best practices in pizzeria management.
Here are just a few of the new speakers and topics we have planned for our 29th annual show, March 19–21, 2013:
“Famous Joe” Carlucci, owner of Joe’s Pizzeria, will tell you how to expand your catering business and boost your bottom line.
Roberta Matuson, president of Human Resource Solutions, is the author of the highly acclaimed book, Suddenly in Charge: Managing Up, Managing Down, Succeeding All Around, a Washington Post Top Five Business Book for Leaders. Roberta will show you how to “Make Dollars and Sense Out of Gen Y”, as well as present a second session on strategies for business growth.
Jeff Mease, founder & CEO of One World Enterprises, which includes Pizza X, Lennie’s, The Bloomington Brewing Co. and One World Catering & Events, will take you through the process of deciding whether or not to open a second unit.
Mike Bausch, owner of Andolini’s Pizzeria and 2011 Tulsa Restaurateur of the Year, will tell you how to manage, motivate and empower Gen Y to take your pizzeria to the next level.
T. J. Schier, president and founder of Incentivize Solutions and S.M.A.R.T. Restaurant Group, is one of the foremost authorities on restaurant training tactics. He’ll teach you the “Training Tactics of Pizza Pros” that really work and give a second seminar on 10 tactics to make your front line improve your bottom line.
Beckee Moreland, director of gluten-free industry initiatives for the National Foundation for Celiac Awareness, will disclose how gluten-free products are impacting foodservice and creating new menu opportunities. She’ll discuss the potential of gluten-free pizza in the working pizzeria kitchen.
The bottom line is there’s always something new at Pizza Expo that can improve your pizzeria… a new marketing idea, technological innovation or menu item. As always, our commitment to you, our partners, is to continue to grow and improve every facet of Pizza Expo… from the trade show floor to our networking events and contests. In fact, if you don’t come away from International Pizza Expo 2013 with new cost-saving or profit-boosting ideas, I’ll refund your registration fee. All you have to do is put it in writing to me and I’ll send you a prompt refund. What other show gives you a money-back guarantee? I’ll tell you, none!
Remember International Pizza Expo® is a tax-deductible working vacation.
For more information on our contests or to register, please call (800) 489-8324 or visit our Website at www.PizzaExpo.com.
It’s all pizza and it’s all for YOU!
Best regards,
Bill Oakley
Executive Vice President
Bill OAKLEY
More Articles

If you’re a student of the pizza industry, chances are you’ve probably heard of a little show called International Pizza Expo. If you were one of the nearly 7,000 people who attended, you experienced first-hand the knowledge, expertise and excitement the annual show brought to the Las Vegas Convention Center last March.
“This year we had attendees from all 50 states, Puerto Rico, Canada and 23 other countries,” says Bill Oakley, executive vice president of Macfadden Protech, parent company of International Pizza Expo. “We even had a group from the largest pizza company in Mongolia, Mr. Pizza, make the long trip to Las Vegas to experience everything Pizza Expo has to offer. As a result of their experience, they’ve already implemented some of the ideas they picked up at Expo.” Show organizers say that 25 percent of show-goers were first-time attendees, and the show designated a day devoted entirely to those looking to start pizzerias. “Based on the comments to date, it was a huge success with 684 attendees taking part in this day-long educational program,” Oakley says. “This stimulating day of educational sessions and workshops was followed by a reception where attendees could network with fellow ‘newbies,’ industry experts and event sponsors.” Keynote speakers for the three-day show included Nick Sarillo, owner of Nick’s Pizza & Pub in Illinois, and Marla Topliff, president of Rosati’s Pizza. Bruce Allar, vice president of meetings and conferences for Macfadden Protech, says the 2012 line-up of Pizza Expo speakers placed more emphasis on successful pizzeria owners, making International Pizza Expo a true peer-to-peer experience. “The buzz of activity never abated among buyers and sellers on the show floor, or among pizza professionals networking and learning at other Expo gatherings,” says Allar. “Pizza Expo maintained a powerful momentum from the opening bell on Tuesday morning all the way to its conclusion on Thursday afternoon.”
Contestants vied for supremacy in the International Pizza Challenge, a series of culinary competitions designed to highlight the best of the best.
In the traditional division, regional prelimary winners included:
Reál Varela, Brooklyn Pizza & Pasta, Los Angeles, CA – Southwest Region
Tim Silva, Pizza My Heart, Los Gatos, CA – Northwest Region
Mark Briand, Bondi’s Pizza, London, Ont. – Mid-America Region
Giovanni Gagliardi, Pizzeria La Leggenda, San Felice, Italy – International Region
Marlene Smith, Pizza Palace Plus, Emporium, PA – Northeast Region
Keith Coffman, Lost River Pizza Co., Bowling Green, KY – Southeast Region
Frank Baird, Franco’s Pizza, Chardon, OH – Wild Card
Silva took home the title of World’s Best Traditional Pizza Winner.
In the Non-Traditional Division, preliminary winners were:
Joleen Pisner, AJ Barile’s Chicago Pizza, Yucaipa, CA – Southwest Region
John Cammack, Lefty’s Grill, Nevada City, CA – Northwest Region
Rick Mines, Nima’s Pizza & More, Gassville, AR – Southeast Region
John Gutekanst, Avalanche Pizza, Athens, OH – Mid-America Region
Andrew Scudera, Goodfella’s Brick Oven Pizza, Staten Island, NY – Northeast Region
Tsutomu Inayoshi, Home Delivered Pizza, Aichi, Japan – International Region
Scudera took home the title of World’s Best Non-Traditional Pizza.
In the new American-Pan division, finalists included:
Shawn Randazzo, Cloverleaf Pizza of St. Clair, St. Clair Shores, MI – 1st Place
Matthew Heard, Humble Pie, Edmond, OK – 2nd Place
Alex Abellan, Pizza Zone, Victoria, BC – 3rd Place
The Italian-Style Division Finals Winners were:
Umberto Fornito, Italy – 1st Place
Saverio Ciampi, Italy – 2nd Place
Alessandra DeBellis, Italy – 3rd Place
Finalists from each division competed in a blind-box challenge in the Pizza Maker of the Year Bake-Off. The competition’s mystery ingredient, Cattlemen’s Carolina Tangy Gold Barbeque Sauce, proved to be a challenge for the four finalists, who presented the judges with unique pizzas created from a table of provided ingredients. Shawn Randazzo of Cloverleaf Pizza of St. Clair in St. Clair Shores, Michigan, walked away with the title of World Champion Pizza Maker and a cash prize. The International Pizza Challenge also pitted four former winners –– all industry experts in their own right. Tony Gemignani of San Francisco-based Tony’s Pizza Napoletana was named the “Best of the Best” Master Pizza Maker of the Year.
The popular World Pizza Games trials culminated at an event on Wednesday, March 13. Winners were:
1st Division Freestyle Acrobatics: Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan
Masters Division Freestyle Acrobatics: Jay Schuurman, Pizza Rock, Sacramento, CA
Fastest Dough Stretch: Ingrosso Simone, Pizzeria Del Mille, Italy
Fastest Box Folding: Jimmy Xang, Pizza Guys, Rancho Cordova, CA
Largest Dough Stretch: Mario Sigmorile, Pizzeria Del Centro, Italy
Longest Spin: Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan
Throughout the three-day event, show attendees visited sponsoring booths and turned in gamepieces for the $20,000 MEGA BUCKS Giveaway. Frank Sastano of Tulsa, Oklahoma-based Savastano’s Pizzeria took home the cash prize.
“This year’s Pizza Expo was the biggest and best show ever, breaking records for attendance with 6,901 pizza professionals, 940 booths and tons of excitement,” says Oakley. “Words just don’t do it justice; you really have to experience Pizza Expo to understand the interaction that takes place between our attendees and exhibitors. Everyone is truly anxious and motivated to get into discussions about new products, new technology, the latest industry trends and hot-button issues facing the industry today.”
More Articles
Exciting new seminars, workshops and competitions are in store for you at International Pizza Expo 2013, at the Las Vegas Convention Center, March 19-21 in Las Vegas, Nevada.
BREAKING NEWS: Pizza Expo will kick off with a special appearance by Chef Robert Irvine, host of Food Network’s prime-time series Restaurant Impossible.
A Craft Beer powerhouse panel discussion will make its debut at the 2013 Pizza Expo. Want to build a profitable craft beer program? Don’t miss this seminar.
The World Pizza Game return with the addition of a new “triathlon” category, comprised of box folding, dough tossing for a 16-inch screen and dough tossing for a 24-inch screen.
Find out more about the new additions to the 2013 Pizza Expo by clicking here.
To view a full schedule at a glance, click here.
International Pizza Expo® 2013, scheduled for March 19-21 at the Las Vegas Convention Center, is the oldest and largest annual gathering of pizza professionals—and will draw approximately 7,000 attendees and 450 exhibitors to a show floor covering an area equal to 5½ football fields. In its 29th year, Pizza Expo attracts top independent and chain operators to do business in the exhibit hall, attend education sessions and take part in pizza-making competitions.
Related

Pizza Expo® has something for everyone –– whether you’re looking for new ways to create revenue or just want to find out about the latest industry trends and products. The one thing that really separates Pizza Expo from all of the other general foodservice shows is the fact that there’s only one tradeshow where you’ll find over 80 industry specific seminars, workshops and demonstrations, 450 exhibiting companies and 1,000 booths all devoted to pizza … and that’s Pizza Expo. Throw in the best networking event in the industry –– the Beer and Bull Idea Exchange –– along with all of our other great contests and competitions, such as the World Pizza Games, International Pizza Challenge, and the Great $20,000 Mega Bucks Giveaway, and you can see why industry veterans call Pizza Expo the “Show of Shows.”
This year’s Expo shattered all of our previous attendance records with nearly 7,000 attendees and 4,000 exhibitor personnel. And the international presence was astounding, with attendees from Australia, Brazil, Canada, China, Finland, Germany, Italy, Japan, Mexico, Mongolia, Norway and Spain –– just to name a few –– making it a truly worldly experience for everyone! Pizza is indeed a universal food, and there was plenty of it to be found on our show floor that measured over 5½ football fields.
If you didn’t get the chance to attend this year’s show, you still have the opportunity to listen and learn by ordering recordings of some or all of the 50-plus educational sessions that were offered. You can order a Multimedia DVD-ROM or download directly to your iPod by going to the InteliQuest Media website at www. intelliquestmedia.com. It’s also a good way to revisit a seminar to hear what you missed or listen to one you couldn’t attend –– and we know there were several you probably wish you could have made it to during the show.
In addition, I want to thank everyone who attended this year’s Expo. Without the continued support of pizzeria operators, suppliers, manufacturers and industry experts, we could not have achieved the measure of success that makes International Pizza Expo the must- attend event of the year.
It’s never too early to start making plans for next year’s show, slated for March 19 – 21, 2013, at the Las Vegas Convention Center, so save the date! We’re already making plans for next year’s Expo, and we think you’ll be pleased with the changes we’re making. If you have any ideas or suggestions on how we can improve the show, please give me a call at (800) 489-8324 or drop me a note at BOakley@PizzaToday.com.
Last but not least, please remember International Pizza Expo is a tax- deductible working vacation.
It’s all Pizza and it’s all for YOU!
Sincerely,
Bill Oakley
Executive Vice President
More Articles
If you were in Las Vegas, then you know that International Pizza Expo® was the THE place to be. You could feel the energy and pizza enthusiasm from the moment you walked into the Las Vegas Convention Center.
There was something for everyone at International Pizza Expo® 2012, whether you’re a veteran or just opening your first store. When the show closed on Thursday afternoon, nearly 7,000 buyers had visited more than 930 exhibits and attended more than 80 educational sessions. Rounding out the experience were numerous culinary competitions, contests, demonstrations and other special events.
The Traditional Division of the International Pizza Challenge™ had the following regional winners and wild cards that advanced to the finals:
Real Varela, Brooklyn Pizza & Pasta, Los Angeles, CA - Southwest Region
Tim Silva, Nima’s Pizza My Heart, Los Gatos, CA - Northwest Region
Mark Briand, Bondi’s Pizza, London, Ontario - Mid-America Region
Frank Baird, Franco’s Pizza Plus, Chardon, OH - Wild Card
Giovanni Gagliardi, Pizzeria La Leggenda, San Felice, Italy - International Region
Marlene Smith, Pizza Palace Plus, Emporium, PA - Northeast Region
Keith Coffman, Lost River Pizza Co., Bowling Green, KY, - Southeast Region
The Non-Traditional Division of the International Pizza Challenge™ had the following regional winners and wild cards that advanced to the finals:
Joleen Pisner, AJ Barile’s Chicago Pizza, Yucaipa, CA - Southwest Region
John Cammack, Lefty’s Grill, Nevada City, CA - Northwest Region
Rick Mines, Nima’s Pizza & More, Gassville, AR - Southeast Region
John Gutekanst, Avalanche Pizza, Athens, OH - Mid-America Region
Andrew Scudera, Goodfella’s Brick Oven Pizza, Staten Island, NY -
Northeast Region
Tsutomu Inayoshi, Japanese Home Delivered Pizza, Aichi, Japan -
International Region
Alexandre Brunet, Pizza Stromboli, Montreal, Quebec - Wild Card
Tim Silva, won the Traditional Division and $7,500, Andrew Scudera, won Non-Traditional Division and $7,500, Shawn Randazzo, Cloverleaf Pizza, St. Clair, MI, won the American-Pan Division, and Umberto Fornito won the Italian-Style Division and $4,000.
Following the International Pizza Challenge finals, the winners in each division squared off in the Pizza Maker of the Year competition. Contestants were presented with a table of ingredients from which to choose. There were no restrictions for toppings, but all contestants had to use the secret ingredient – Cattlemen’s® Carolina Tangy Gold™ Barbeque Sauce. Shawn Randazzo walked away with the title of World Champion Pizza Maker of the Year and an additional $5,000. We also introduced a new competition this year called the Best of the Best, where four past World Champions squared off to see who would be named the Master Pizza Maker of the Year. The inaugural winner was Tony Gemignani, of Tony’s Pizza Napoletana in San Francisco, California, who walked away with $2,500.
The Winners in the World Pizza Games® were as follows:
Freestyle Acrobatics –– Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan,
Masters Division Freestyle Acrobatics –– Jay Schuurman, Pizza Rock, Sacramento, CA
Fastest Dough Stretch –– Ingrosso Simone, Pizzeria Del Mille, Italy
Fastest Box Folding –– Jimmy Xang, Pizza Guys, Rancho Cordova, CA
Largest Dough Stretch –– Mario Sigmorile, Pizzeria Del Centro, Italy
Longest Spin –– Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan
Start making plans now to attend International Pizza Expo® 2013, which will again be held at the Las Vegas Convention Center March 19 – 21.
Sincerely,
Bill Oakley
More Articles

If you’re a student of the pizza industry, chances are you’ve probably heard of a little show called International Pizza Expo. If you were one of the nearly 7,000 people who attended, you experienced first-hand the knowledge, expertise and excitement the annual show brought to the Las Vegas Convention Center last March.
“This year we had attendees from all 50 states, Puerto Rico, Canada and 23 other countries,” says Bill Oakley, executive vice president of Macfadden Protech, parent company of International Pizza Expo. “We even had a group from the largest pizza company in Mongolia, Mr. Pizza, make the long trip to Las Vegas to experience everything Pizza Expo has to offer. As a result of their experience, they’ve already implemented some of the ideas they picked up at Expo.” Show organizers say that 25 percent of show-goers were first-time attendees, and the show designated a day devoted entirely to those looking to start pizzerias. “Based on the comments to date, it was a huge success with 684 attendees taking part in this day-long educational program,” Oakley says. “This stimulating day of educational sessions and workshops was followed by a reception where attendees could network with fellow ‘newbies,’ industry experts and event sponsors.” Keynote speakers for the three-day show included Nick Sarillo, owner of Nick’s Pizza & Pub in Illinois, and Marla Topliff, president of Rosati’s Pizza. Bruce Allar, vice president of meetings and conferences for Macfadden Protech, says the 2012 line-up of Pizza Expo speakers placed more emphasis on successful pizzeria owners, making International Pizza Expo a true peer-to-peer experience. “The buzz of activity never abated among buyers and sellers on the show floor, or among pizza professionals networking and learning at other Expo gatherings,” says Allar. “Pizza Expo maintained a powerful momentum from the opening bell on Tuesday morning all the way to its conclusion on Thursday afternoon.”
Contestants vied for supremacy in the International Pizza Challenge, a series of culinary competitions designed to highlight the best of the best.
In the traditional division, regional prelimary winners included:
Reál Varela, Brooklyn Pizza & Pasta, Los Angeles, CA – Southwest Region
Tim Silva, Pizza My Heart, Los Gatos, CA – Northwest Region
Mark Briand, Bondi’s Pizza, London, Ont. – Mid-America Region
Giovanni Gagliardi, Pizzeria La Leggenda, San Felice, Italy – International Region
Marlene Smith, Pizza Palace Plus, Emporium, PA – Northeast Region
Keith Coffman, Lost River Pizza Co., Bowling Green, KY – Southeast Region
Frank Baird, Franco’s Pizza, Chardon, OH – Wild Card
Silva took home the title of World’s Best Traditional Pizza Winner.
In the Non-Traditional Division, preliminary winners were:
Joleen Pisner, AJ Barile’s Chicago Pizza, Yucaipa, CA – Southwest Region
John Cammack, Lefty’s Grill, Nevada City, CA – Northwest Region
Rick Mines, Nima’s Pizza & More, Gassville, AR – Southeast Region
John Gutekanst, Avalanche Pizza, Athens, OH – Mid-America Region
Andrew Scudera, Goodfella’s Brick Oven Pizza, Staten Island, NY – Northeast Region
Tsutomu Inayoshi, Home Delivered Pizza, Aichi, Japan – International Region
Scudera took home the title of World’s Best Non-Traditional Pizza.
In the new American-Pan division, finalists included:
Shawn Randazzo, Cloverleaf Pizza of St. Clair, St. Clair Shores, MI – 1st Place
Matthew Heard, Humble Pie, Edmond, OK – 2nd Place
Alex Abellan, Pizza Zone, Victoria, BC – 3rd Place
The Italian-Style Division Finals Winners were:
Umberto Fornito, Italy – 1st Place
Saverio Ciampi, Italy – 2nd Place
Alessandra DeBellis, Italy – 3rd Place
Finalists from each division competed in a blind-box challenge in the Pizza Maker of the Year Bake-Off. The competition’s mystery ingredient, Cattlemen’s Carolina Tangy Gold Barbeque Sauce, proved to be a challenge for the four finalists, who presented the judges with unique pizzas created from a table of provided ingredients. Shawn Randazzo of Cloverleaf Pizza of St. Clair in St. Clair Shores, Michigan, walked away with the title of World Champion Pizza Maker and a cash prize. The International Pizza Challenge also pitted four former winners –– all industry experts in their own right. Tony Gemignani of San Francisco-based Tony’s Pizza Napoletana was named the “Best of the Best” Master Pizza Maker of the Year.
The popular World Pizza Games trials culminated at an event on Wednesday, March 13. Winners were:
1st Division Freestyle Acrobatics: Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan
Masters Division Freestyle Acrobatics: Jay Schuurman, Pizza Rock, Sacramento, CA
Fastest Dough Stretch: Ingrosso Simone, Pizzeria Del Mille, Italy
Fastest Box Folding: Jimmy Xang, Pizza Guys, Rancho Cordova, CA
Largest Dough Stretch: Mario Sigmorile, Pizzeria Del Centro, Italy
Longest Spin: Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan
Throughout the three-day event, show attendees visited sponsoring booths and turned in gamepieces for the $20,000 MEGA BUCKS Giveaway. Frank Sastano of Tulsa, Oklahoma-based Savastano’s Pizzeria took home the cash prize.
“This year’s Pizza Expo was the biggest and best show ever, breaking records for attendance with 6,901 pizza professionals, 940 booths and tons of excitement,” says Oakley. “Words just don’t do it justice; you really have to experience Pizza Expo to understand the interaction that takes place between our attendees and exhibitors. Everyone is truly anxious and motivated to get into discussions about new products, new technology, the latest industry trends and hot-button issues facing the industry today.”

Few businesses become successful without a solid plan. Many businesses plan for things like start-up expenses, overhead, retirement plans, equipment, construction, payroll, accounts receivable … the list goes on. Unfortunately, many business owners neglect to factor asset protection into their business plans.
The Problems:
• America is a litigious society. There are over 100 million lawsuits pending in the United States. In 2011, the average premise liability award was $1.94 million, and the average wrongful death award was $7.9 million (Verdict Search). Many judgments far exceed insurance coverage, leaving owners liable for large judgments not covered by their plans.
• Trial attorneys are one of the largest lobbyist groups in the country, and they have worked hard to advocate laws to increase the level of “vicarious liability” to business owners. This means that if there is an accident involving business property, an attorney will attempt to hold the business owner liable, even if he or she did nothing wrong. For example, in Clohesy v. Food Circus Supermarket, Inc., a grocery store owner faced a wrongful-death lawsuit because of insufficient security when a 79-year-old woman was abducted from the store parking lot and killed. The State Supreme Court held the owner liable, stating that the owner had a duty to provide security for its patrons.
• In light of these two factors, business owners are improperly structuring their businesses and needlessly putting their wealth at risk. Here are some examples:
1) Operating a business as a sole proprietorship may result in an owner being held personally responsible for a judgment against the business. This means that both personal and professional assets (buildings, equipment, homes, IRAs and other cash assets) may be vulnerable to seizure to satisfy a judgment creditor’s claims.
2) Some businesses operate in partnership, with one or more partners. This means that a mistake by one partner can result in the other partner being held liable for the action(s) or inaction(s) of that other principal. Being in business with others without legal protection is like riding an ATV without a helmet—it is, to say the least, unwise.
3) Some operate their businesses under one “all-inclusive” legal entity such as an LLC or a corporation. Placing the entire business operation under the umbrella of a single legal entity is comparable to placing all 401(k) retirement assets into a single company’s common stock. One failure and all could be lost.
State and Federal Law
Imagine the owner of a pizzeria is involved in a $5 million personal injury lawsuit resulting from a fatal automobile accident by one of the delivery drivers. Federal ERISA law protects most tax-deferred retirement accounts, but IRAs (Roth/Traditional) are dependent on state law. Ohio, for example, protects 100 percent of tax-deferred retirement plans from a judgment creditor, but other states offer limited protections (Arkansas, for instance, protects only $20,000).
Similarly, in Ohio any equity over $22,200 in a primary residence is unprotected by state “homestead exemption” laws. This means the primary residence may be seized and sold to satisfy a judgment. The point here is that every state has different statutory limits and protections. It is crucial that every business owner understands, and plans, for those limitations.
The Solution: Asset Protection
Asset protection is a specialized area of law where legal entities are put in place to protect personal and business assets from lawsuits. Most attorneys understand neither the principles nor the implementation of these strategies. The best way to protect assets is through containment and deterrence, and this is accomplished by separating them into multiple legal entities. This separation will help shield certain assets when others might be in jeopardy.
In fact, a fully implemented asset-protection plan is a serious deterrent to a lawsuit ever being filed. Since many lawsuits today are taken on a contingency basis, an asset search is one of the first things an attorney does before accepting a case. If there are few assets available to be seized, the attorneys will likely not pursue the case. However, the time to act is now. An asset-protection plan must be in place before a lawsuit occurs, as any steps to rearrange assets after a potential lawsuit occurs can be ruled fraudulent.
Please remember, there is no single structure or entity that provides 100 percent protection. A layered approach, using a variety of tools, is the only way to protect the wealth it has taken so long to create. That’s why careful planning and advice are encouraged. Consult an asset-protection attorney and/or tax advisor before beginning the process.
Larry Oxenham, an expert with the American Society for Asset Protection, will give a seminar, “A Pizza Operator’s Guide to Lawsuit Protection, Labor Laws and Taxes,” on Wednesday, March 20, at Pizza Expo 2013.
For more details on International Pizza Expo 2013, visit www.pizzaexpo.com.
Related

Who and what is Gen Y? The sheer variety in this young workforce makes it difficult to define Generation Y. This group is so ambiguous that it doesn’t even have its own generational name. The popular expression merely morphed from Gen X to Y.
This how I define Gen-Y: They’re a group of people who have been given everything—a defined path, a defined sense of worth, a laser pinpoint focus on how and what success is. All they know is to follow the path. This is both a positive and a negative. Never before has a group of kids been so highly talented while completely lacking any self-drive.
Trying to teach them the way you were taught—or expecting things of them in exactly the same way they were expected of you—will most likely lead to re-instruction and certain frustration. I’m generalizing here, but if you were trained with a 1,000-page manual on what to do and when to do it, then you might be great at giving the micro-managed direction that this group feeds off of. If, in contrast, you give minimal direction, don’t be surprised if one out of every 50 new hires “gets it” and gives top job performance.
I can say with absolute certainty to every single person reading this that there is a better way. There is a better way to train, a better way to manage, and a better way to thrive with this up-and-coming work force.
My father is a Retired Marine lieutenant colonel and every male in my family has served in the Marines at one point or another, including myself. I was diagnosed with Type 1 diabetes at 20 years old and changed my life to become a restaurant owner instead of a career Judge Advocate General lawyer. What I witnessed in the Marines is that young people when presented with a path—a path that leads to respect, self worth and a sense of accomplishment—can carry out any responsibility your pizzeria can set before them and then some.
Think about the power of the path to self-worth. What does your pizza place do for your employee’s mentality? Does your workplace create a consistent mindset fore the employee of, “We crank out a semi-decent product while I wait for the next thing in my life to flop into my lap while old man pizza-owner wastes his life inside these four walls”? Or is yours a place where it might instead be said that, “I the employee am learning how to conduct myself in a business, pushing my own boundaries and abilities to be a valued commodity when I one day leave this job or, fingers crossed, learn to manage and run my own store with this boss I respect and value?
All employees worth a damn want this. They are out there. The Marines transform kids smarter and dumber than your staff into focused, driven young people—who are motivated, ready and willing to deliver on their tasks.
However, you are not the Marine Corps; you are not dealing with life and death. You deal in pizza. The good thing is that you don’t have to be a drill sergeant and yell to get your point across. If you conduct yourself appropriately, the fear of having you be disappointed in their results will be fear enough. Look at what high school and college sports teams accomplish with young people. They achieve focused efforts from kids not through monetary gain but through a feeling of self-worth.
So how does that translate to Gen Y more than any other generation? Gen Y is used to the quick course. Go to this place; get this Facebook page. Text instead of talk; use GPS instead of mapping it out. They have always had a path. SO GIVE THEM ONE.
Create a rank structure. Not just manager and assistant manager, but different hats, shirts, or jackets for each level of skill and knowledge. Create programs and classes with direct expectations, arduous prerequisites, and pay raises and social incentives delivered upon completion.
Money alone is not motivation enough. I know that sounds crazy. You might have been willing to clean toilets all night if it meant extra cash, but that is not the norm for this group. There is an exception for servers getting tips, but for staff that needs to complete a prep list or get food out fast and perfect while maintaining high morale, a direct motivator like status in the restaurant works best. This is where ranking status and differences in the uniform parts they wear can work to your advantage.
Create a sense of positive competition, and reward results over effort. Appreciate those who try, but reward and openly compliment those who perform. As for staff that can’t get on board, create defined, emotionless structure of what will happen when they don’t meet expectations—and then act. Never give a lot of attention to negative actions, because Gen Y is attention-starved, only feed good attention to those who deserve it and punish negative behavior swiftly and directly.
Gen Y has several advantages. Show them how, watch them do it, and then tell them that is the standard and they can perform consistently. If your staff is proud to work at your restaurant and glad that they work for someone like you, than turnover, labor costs, food quality and quality of life can and will fall in line.
For more details on International Pizza Expo 2013, visit www.pizzaexpo.com.
Mike Bausch operates two Andolini’s Pizzeria stores in Tulsa, Okla., with a total of 140 employees. He will give a seminar at Pizza Expo 2013 on Thursday, March 21, titled “Managing and Motivating Gen Y Employees.”
Related
If you've ever wished you could sit down with a super-successful operator and quiz him about the keys to pizza profits, you'll want to sit in on Pizza Expo 2013's Wednesday morning keynote one-on-one session with $6-Million-Man Bill Jacobs and Pizza Today editor Jeremy White.
Jeremy will be your surrogate at this kick-off to the second day of Expo, March 20. He'll guide the discussion with Jacobs, whose Piece Brewery & Pizzeria in Chicago grosses more than $6 million in sales per year from one unit. You'll learn through this candid insider's exchange why Jacobs sold his successful bagel company and turned to pizza in 2001; how he found the perfect location in a mature pizza market and built revenues; why he's resisted opening a second unit; and much more.
Piece was named Pizza Today's Independent Pizzeria of the Year in 2011 and Jacobs, a Connecticut native who brought New Haven-style pies to the Windy City, has an engaging story to tell. There will be time for questions from the crowd as well during this wide-ranging and insightful keynote session.
Visit PizzaExpo.com to learn more about next year's show. .
Related

At Pizza Expo® you’ll find 5½ football fields of pizza-related products, services and equipment, as well as leading industry experts, consultants and analysts who are all willing to share new ideas and insights on everything you need to adapt, react and prosper in today’s economy. At next year’s show, we’ve added several new speakers to the lineup of experts keeping you abreast of trends and best practices in pizzeria management.
Here are just a few of the new speakers and topics we have planned for our 29th annual show, March 19–21, 2013:
“Famous Joe” Carlucci, owner of Joe’s Pizzeria, will tell you how to expand your catering business and boost your bottom line.
Roberta Matuson, president of Human Resource Solutions, is the author of the highly acclaimed book, Suddenly in Charge: Managing Up, Managing Down, Succeeding All Around, a Washington Post Top Five Business Book for Leaders. Roberta will show you how to “Make Dollars and Sense Out of Gen Y”, as well as present a second session on strategies for business growth.
Jeff Mease, founder & CEO of One World Enterprises, which includes Pizza X, Lennie’s, The Bloomington Brewing Co. and One World Catering & Events, will take you through the process of deciding whether or not to open a second unit.
Mike Bausch, owner of Andolini’s Pizzeria and 2011 Tulsa Restaurateur of the Year, will tell you how to manage, motivate and empower Gen Y to take your pizzeria to the next level.
T. J. Schier, president and founder of Incentivize Solutions and S.M.A.R.T. Restaurant Group, is one of the foremost authorities on restaurant training tactics. He’ll teach you the “Training Tactics of Pizza Pros” that really work and give a second seminar on 10 tactics to make your front line improve your bottom line.
Beckee Moreland, director of gluten-free industry initiatives for the National Foundation for Celiac Awareness, will disclose how gluten-free products are impacting foodservice and creating new menu opportunities. She’ll discuss the potential of gluten-free pizza in the working pizzeria kitchen.
The bottom line is there’s always something new at Pizza Expo that can improve your pizzeria… a new marketing idea, technological innovation or menu item. As always, our commitment to you, our partners, is to continue to grow and improve every facet of Pizza Expo… from the trade show floor to our networking events and contests. In fact, if you don’t come away from International Pizza Expo 2013 with new cost-saving or profit-boosting ideas, I’ll refund your registration fee. All you have to do is put it in writing to me and I’ll send you a prompt refund. What other show gives you a money-back guarantee? I’ll tell you, none!
Remember International Pizza Expo® is a tax-deductible working vacation.
For more information on our contests or to register, please call (800) 489-8324 or visit our Website at www.PizzaExpo.com.
It’s all pizza and it’s all for YOU!
Best regards,
Bill Oakley
Executive Vice President
Bill OAKLEY
More Articles

If you’re a student of the pizza industry, chances are you’ve probably heard of a little show called International Pizza Expo. If you were one of the nearly 7,000 people who attended, you experienced first-hand the knowledge, expertise and excitement the annual show brought to the Las Vegas Convention Center last March.
“This year we had attendees from all 50 states, Puerto Rico, Canada and 23 other countries,” says Bill Oakley, executive vice president of Macfadden Protech, parent company of International Pizza Expo. “We even had a group from the largest pizza company in Mongolia, Mr. Pizza, make the long trip to Las Vegas to experience everything Pizza Expo has to offer. As a result of their experience, they’ve already implemented some of the ideas they picked up at Expo.” Show organizers say that 25 percent of show-goers were first-time attendees, and the show designated a day devoted entirely to those looking to start pizzerias. “Based on the comments to date, it was a huge success with 684 attendees taking part in this day-long educational program,” Oakley says. “This stimulating day of educational sessions and workshops was followed by a reception where attendees could network with fellow ‘newbies,’ industry experts and event sponsors.” Keynote speakers for the three-day show included Nick Sarillo, owner of Nick’s Pizza & Pub in Illinois, and Marla Topliff, president of Rosati’s Pizza. Bruce Allar, vice president of meetings and conferences for Macfadden Protech, says the 2012 line-up of Pizza Expo speakers placed more emphasis on successful pizzeria owners, making International Pizza Expo a true peer-to-peer experience. “The buzz of activity never abated among buyers and sellers on the show floor, or among pizza professionals networking and learning at other Expo gatherings,” says Allar. “Pizza Expo maintained a powerful momentum from the opening bell on Tuesday morning all the way to its conclusion on Thursday afternoon.”
Contestants vied for supremacy in the International Pizza Challenge, a series of culinary competitions designed to highlight the best of the best.
In the traditional division, regional prelimary winners included:
Reál Varela, Brooklyn Pizza & Pasta, Los Angeles, CA – Southwest Region
Tim Silva, Pizza My Heart, Los Gatos, CA – Northwest Region
Mark Briand, Bondi’s Pizza, London, Ont. – Mid-America Region
Giovanni Gagliardi, Pizzeria La Leggenda, San Felice, Italy – International Region
Marlene Smith, Pizza Palace Plus, Emporium, PA – Northeast Region
Keith Coffman, Lost River Pizza Co., Bowling Green, KY – Southeast Region
Frank Baird, Franco’s Pizza, Chardon, OH – Wild Card
Silva took home the title of World’s Best Traditional Pizza Winner.
In the Non-Traditional Division, preliminary winners were:
Joleen Pisner, AJ Barile’s Chicago Pizza, Yucaipa, CA – Southwest Region
John Cammack, Lefty’s Grill, Nevada City, CA – Northwest Region
Rick Mines, Nima’s Pizza & More, Gassville, AR – Southeast Region
John Gutekanst, Avalanche Pizza, Athens, OH – Mid-America Region
Andrew Scudera, Goodfella’s Brick Oven Pizza, Staten Island, NY – Northeast Region
Tsutomu Inayoshi, Home Delivered Pizza, Aichi, Japan – International Region
Scudera took home the title of World’s Best Non-Traditional Pizza.
In the new American-Pan division, finalists included:
Shawn Randazzo, Cloverleaf Pizza of St. Clair, St. Clair Shores, MI – 1st Place
Matthew Heard, Humble Pie, Edmond, OK – 2nd Place
Alex Abellan, Pizza Zone, Victoria, BC – 3rd Place
The Italian-Style Division Finals Winners were:
Umberto Fornito, Italy – 1st Place
Saverio Ciampi, Italy – 2nd Place
Alessandra DeBellis, Italy – 3rd Place
Finalists from each division competed in a blind-box challenge in the Pizza Maker of the Year Bake-Off. The competition’s mystery ingredient, Cattlemen’s Carolina Tangy Gold Barbeque Sauce, proved to be a challenge for the four finalists, who presented the judges with unique pizzas created from a table of provided ingredients. Shawn Randazzo of Cloverleaf Pizza of St. Clair in St. Clair Shores, Michigan, walked away with the title of World Champion Pizza Maker and a cash prize. The International Pizza Challenge also pitted four former winners –– all industry experts in their own right. Tony Gemignani of San Francisco-based Tony’s Pizza Napoletana was named the “Best of the Best” Master Pizza Maker of the Year.
The popular World Pizza Games trials culminated at an event on Wednesday, March 13. Winners were:
1st Division Freestyle Acrobatics: Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan
Masters Division Freestyle Acrobatics: Jay Schuurman, Pizza Rock, Sacramento, CA
Fastest Dough Stretch: Ingrosso Simone, Pizzeria Del Mille, Italy
Fastest Box Folding: Jimmy Xang, Pizza Guys, Rancho Cordova, CA
Largest Dough Stretch: Mario Sigmorile, Pizzeria Del Centro, Italy
Longest Spin: Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan
Throughout the three-day event, show attendees visited sponsoring booths and turned in gamepieces for the $20,000 MEGA BUCKS Giveaway. Frank Sastano of Tulsa, Oklahoma-based Savastano’s Pizzeria took home the cash prize.
“This year’s Pizza Expo was the biggest and best show ever, breaking records for attendance with 6,901 pizza professionals, 940 booths and tons of excitement,” says Oakley. “Words just don’t do it justice; you really have to experience Pizza Expo to understand the interaction that takes place between our attendees and exhibitors. Everyone is truly anxious and motivated to get into discussions about new products, new technology, the latest industry trends and hot-button issues facing the industry today.”
More Articles
Exciting new seminars, workshops and competitions are in store for you at International Pizza Expo 2013, at the Las Vegas Convention Center, March 19-21 in Las Vegas, Nevada.
BREAKING NEWS: Pizza Expo will kick off with a special appearance by Chef Robert Irvine, host of Food Network’s prime-time series Restaurant Impossible.
A Craft Beer powerhouse panel discussion will make its debut at the 2013 Pizza Expo. Want to build a profitable craft beer program? Don’t miss this seminar.
The World Pizza Game return with the addition of a new “triathlon” category, comprised of box folding, dough tossing for a 16-inch screen and dough tossing for a 24-inch screen.
Find out more about the new additions to the 2013 Pizza Expo by clicking here.
To view a full schedule at a glance, click here.
International Pizza Expo® 2013, scheduled for March 19-21 at the Las Vegas Convention Center, is the oldest and largest annual gathering of pizza professionals—and will draw approximately 7,000 attendees and 450 exhibitors to a show floor covering an area equal to 5½ football fields. In its 29th year, Pizza Expo attracts top independent and chain operators to do business in the exhibit hall, attend education sessions and take part in pizza-making competitions.
Related

Pizza Expo® has something for everyone –– whether you’re looking for new ways to create revenue or just want to find out about the latest industry trends and products. The one thing that really separates Pizza Expo from all of the other general foodservice shows is the fact that there’s only one tradeshow where you’ll find over 80 industry specific seminars, workshops and demonstrations, 450 exhibiting companies and 1,000 booths all devoted to pizza … and that’s Pizza Expo. Throw in the best networking event in the industry –– the Beer and Bull Idea Exchange –– along with all of our other great contests and competitions, such as the World Pizza Games, International Pizza Challenge, and the Great $20,000 Mega Bucks Giveaway, and you can see why industry veterans call Pizza Expo the “Show of Shows.”
This year’s Expo shattered all of our previous attendance records with nearly 7,000 attendees and 4,000 exhibitor personnel. And the international presence was astounding, with attendees from Australia, Brazil, Canada, China, Finland, Germany, Italy, Japan, Mexico, Mongolia, Norway and Spain –– just to name a few –– making it a truly worldly experience for everyone! Pizza is indeed a universal food, and there was plenty of it to be found on our show floor that measured over 5½ football fields.
If you didn’t get the chance to attend this year’s show, you still have the opportunity to listen and learn by ordering recordings of some or all of the 50-plus educational sessions that were offered. You can order a Multimedia DVD-ROM or download directly to your iPod by going to the InteliQuest Media website at www. intelliquestmedia.com. It’s also a good way to revisit a seminar to hear what you missed or listen to one you couldn’t attend –– and we know there were several you probably wish you could have made it to during the show.
In addition, I want to thank everyone who attended this year’s Expo. Without the continued support of pizzeria operators, suppliers, manufacturers and industry experts, we could not have achieved the measure of success that makes International Pizza Expo the must- attend event of the year.
It’s never too early to start making plans for next year’s show, slated for March 19 – 21, 2013, at the Las Vegas Convention Center, so save the date! We’re already making plans for next year’s Expo, and we think you’ll be pleased with the changes we’re making. If you have any ideas or suggestions on how we can improve the show, please give me a call at (800) 489-8324 or drop me a note at BOakley@PizzaToday.com.
Last but not least, please remember International Pizza Expo is a tax- deductible working vacation.
It’s all Pizza and it’s all for YOU!
Sincerely,
Bill Oakley
Executive Vice President
More Articles
{module_webapps,24627,i,5374934}More Articles

If you’re a student of the pizza industry, chances are you’ve probably heard of a little show called International Pizza Expo. If you were one of the nearly 7,000 people who attended, you experienced first-hand the knowledge, expertise and excitement the annual show brought to the Las Vegas Convention Center last March.
“This year we had attendees from all 50 states, Puerto Rico, Canada and 23 other countries,” says Bill Oakley, executive vice president of Macfadden Protech, parent company of International Pizza Expo. “We even had a group from the largest pizza company in Mongolia, Mr. Pizza, make the long trip to Las Vegas to experience everything Pizza Expo has to offer. As a result of their experience, they’ve already implemented some of the ideas they picked up at Expo.” Show organizers say that 25 percent of show-goers were first-time attendees, and the show designated a day devoted entirely to those looking to start pizzerias. “Based on the comments to date, it was a huge success with 684 attendees taking part in this day-long educational program,” Oakley says. “This stimulating day of educational sessions and workshops was followed by a reception where attendees could network with fellow ‘newbies,’ industry experts and event sponsors.” Keynote speakers for the three-day show included Nick Sarillo, owner of Nick’s Pizza & Pub in Illinois, and Marla Topliff, president of Rosati’s Pizza. Bruce Allar, vice president of meetings and conferences for Macfadden Protech, says the 2012 line-up of Pizza Expo speakers placed more emphasis on successful pizzeria owners, making International Pizza Expo a true peer-to-peer experience. “The buzz of activity never abated among buyers and sellers on the show floor, or among pizza professionals networking and learning at other Expo gatherings,” says Allar. “Pizza Expo maintained a powerful momentum from the opening bell on Tuesday morning all the way to its conclusion on Thursday afternoon.”
Contestants vied for supremacy in the International Pizza Challenge, a series of culinary competitions designed to highlight the best of the best.
In the traditional division, regional prelimary winners included:
Reál Varela, Brooklyn Pizza & Pasta, Los Angeles, CA – Southwest Region
Tim Silva, Pizza My Heart, Los Gatos, CA – Northwest Region
Mark Briand, Bondi’s Pizza, London, Ont. – Mid-America Region
Giovanni Gagliardi, Pizzeria La Leggenda, San Felice, Italy – International Region
Marlene Smith, Pizza Palace Plus, Emporium, PA – Northeast Region
Keith Coffman, Lost River Pizza Co., Bowling Green, KY – Southeast Region
Frank Baird, Franco’s Pizza, Chardon, OH – Wild Card
Silva took home the title of World’s Best Traditional Pizza Winner.
In the Non-Traditional Division, preliminary winners were:
Joleen Pisner, AJ Barile’s Chicago Pizza, Yucaipa, CA – Southwest Region
John Cammack, Lefty’s Grill, Nevada City, CA – Northwest Region
Rick Mines, Nima’s Pizza & More, Gassville, AR – Southeast Region
John Gutekanst, Avalanche Pizza, Athens, OH – Mid-America Region
Andrew Scudera, Goodfella’s Brick Oven Pizza, Staten Island, NY – Northeast Region
Tsutomu Inayoshi, Home Delivered Pizza, Aichi, Japan – International Region
Scudera took home the title of World’s Best Non-Traditional Pizza.
In the new American-Pan division, finalists included:
Shawn Randazzo, Cloverleaf Pizza of St. Clair, St. Clair Shores, MI – 1st Place
Matthew Heard, Humble Pie, Edmond, OK – 2nd Place
Alex Abellan, Pizza Zone, Victoria, BC – 3rd Place
The Italian-Style Division Finals Winners were:
Umberto Fornito, Italy – 1st Place
Saverio Ciampi, Italy – 2nd Place
Alessandra DeBellis, Italy – 3rd Place
Finalists from each division competed in a blind-box challenge in the Pizza Maker of the Year Bake-Off. The competition’s mystery ingredient, Cattlemen’s Carolina Tangy Gold Barbeque Sauce, proved to be a challenge for the four finalists, who presented the judges with unique pizzas created from a table of provided ingredients. Shawn Randazzo of Cloverleaf Pizza of St. Clair in St. Clair Shores, Michigan, walked away with the title of World Champion Pizza Maker and a cash prize. The International Pizza Challenge also pitted four former winners –– all industry experts in their own right. Tony Gemignani of San Francisco-based Tony’s Pizza Napoletana was named the “Best of the Best” Master Pizza Maker of the Year.
The popular World Pizza Games trials culminated at an event on Wednesday, March 13. Winners were:
1st Division Freestyle Acrobatics: Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan
Masters Division Freestyle Acrobatics: Jay Schuurman, Pizza Rock, Sacramento, CA
Fastest Dough Stretch: Ingrosso Simone, Pizzeria Del Mille, Italy
Fastest Box Folding: Jimmy Xang, Pizza Guys, Rancho Cordova, CA
Largest Dough Stretch: Mario Sigmorile, Pizzeria Del Centro, Italy
Longest Spin: Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan
Throughout the three-day event, show attendees visited sponsoring booths and turned in gamepieces for the $20,000 MEGA BUCKS Giveaway. Frank Sastano of Tulsa, Oklahoma-based Savastano’s Pizzeria took home the cash prize.
“This year’s Pizza Expo was the biggest and best show ever, breaking records for attendance with 6,901 pizza professionals, 940 booths and tons of excitement,” says Oakley. “Words just don’t do it justice; you really have to experience Pizza Expo to understand the interaction that takes place between our attendees and exhibitors. Everyone is truly anxious and motivated to get into discussions about new products, new technology, the latest industry trends and hot-button issues facing the industry today.”
More Articles

As someone with celiac disease, I have certain red flags that I always look for when I dine out. And it all begins with the front of the house.
Restaurants across the U.S. are introducing gluten-free options at a rapid pace. This new menu trend is especially strong among pizza parlors, which are ordering gluten-free crusts or developing their own dough to accommodate gluten-free requests. Managers are putting time, money and effort into building dedicated gluten-free areas, verifying gluten-free ingredients and establishing gluten-free protocols for the chef and kitchen staff. But that’s all for nothing if the hostess and server aren’t properly prepped.
Your front-of-house staff is the first source of contact with customers, and therefore, the first impression of your establishment. Your kitchen staff could be well versed in gluten-free safety, but if a server responds to a question about gluten with a quizzical look or a heavy sigh, chances are that gluten-sensitive customer will lose faith—and may even opt to dine elsewhere.
Consider this: Last summer, the National Foundation for Celiac Awareness, for which I am the director of gluten-free industry initiatives, asked those who choose this option to share their concerns about dining out. Among the top four themes we identified in the responses was this: Many gluten-free diners base their comfort (or lack of comfort) on the attitude and knowledge of the front-of-house staff.
Celiac disease and non-celiac gluten sensitivity are serious health conditions that can cause debilitating symptoms when gluten is ingested. It is estimated that 1 percent of our population—that’s more than 3 million in the U.S.—exhibit gluten intolerance. A tiny amount is enough to trigger a reaction, so gluten-free meals must be prepared with extreme vigilance for members of this group.
Confusing the issue is the rising popularity of the gluten-free diet. A recent report by Packaged Facts estimates that 18 percent of the population has adopted a gluten-free diet. (That’s up from 15 percent in 2010.) More consumers are making this a lifestyle even though it is not a medical necessity—and there’s a big difference between dietary requests they might make and the requirement of zero gluten among those with health conditions.
The trend can affect a pizzeria this way: A diner who requests a gluten-free meal because it’s a choice rather than a necessity may steal a bite of pasta from a friend’s plate or decide to order a gluten-containing dessert. Your staff sees that and may not realize that another diner, one with a gluten-related disorder, is unable move back and forth like this. For hosts and servers, repeated exposure to these crossover gluten-free diners can cause confusion about the seriousness of special dietary requests, which puts true gluten-sensitive diners at risk and builds an air of distrust between customers and servers.
In the celiac and gluten-sensitive community, we are advised to call ahead before dining out so we can alert the staff to our gluten-free needs or pick another restaurant if gluten-free options are unavailable. We request a gluten-free menu when we are seated. We ask a variety of questions to ensure that the food we order will be prepared safely. It’s essential for front-of-house staff to be prepared to meet these requests and answer each question with confidence. The last thing a gluten-sensitive diner wants to hear is, “Um, yeah, I think that’s gluten-free.”
For some industry perspective, I asked Adam Goldberg, CEO and co-founder of Fresh Brothers (Pizza Today’s Independent Pizzeria of the Year for 2012), for his thoughts on front-of-house training. Fresh Brothers was one of the early adopters of GREAT Kitchens, an NFCA training program, and his locations now serve more than 1,000 gluten-free pizzas per week.
“Our gluten-free customers ask a lot of questions, as they should. It’s vital that our cashiers can answer those questions,” he said. “Even more important for our cashiers is knowing when they should bring a manager into the loop. If our cashier can’t answer a question with authority, then we ask that they bring the manager into the discussion to make sure the customer feels comfortable about our procedures.”
This may sound like more effort than it’s worth. I assure you, the rewards far outweigh the investment.
Gluten-free diners are known for their loyalty. Restaurants that offer a safe gluten-free meal and provide a superior dining experience are few and far between; they quickly become hot spots for the gluten-free community. What’s more, special dietary needs often dictate where an entire group may dine, so one customer with celiac disease could be responsible for bringing in a troop of 10 or 15, none of whom have gluten-related disorders but all of whom support their friend who does. Finally, gluten-free diners are active word-of-mouth marketers. They post restaurant reviews on forums, listservs and social media; they talk about where they ate at support-group meetings; and they take feedback from one another seriously.
Fresh Brothers has become one of those go-to spots for celiac and gluten-sensitive diners. Goldberg attributes the chain’s success to his staff’s “ability to feed the entire family.” That claim isn’t just a reflection of the kitchen; it’s a sign of a cohesive staff. And it’s a sign of a well-run and profitable business.
Beckee Moreland is director of gluten-free industry initiatives at the National Foundation for Celiac Awareness. She will be leading a discussion on gluten-free pizzas during two sessions at Pizza Expo in March. Beckee will be joined by Adam Goldberg of Fresh Brothers, Willy Olund of Willy O’s Pizza & Grille and Michael Rutledge of Farrelli’s Wood Fire Pizza—all of whom are now serving gluten-free pizza.
For more details on International Pizza Expo 2013, visit www.pizzaexpo.com.
Related

Who and what is Gen Y? The sheer variety in this young workforce makes it difficult to define Generation Y. This group is so ambiguous that it doesn’t even have its own generational name. The popular expression merely morphed from Gen X to Y.
This how I define Gen-Y: They’re a group of people who have been given everything—a defined path, a defined sense of worth, a laser pinpoint focus on how and what success is. All they know is to follow the path. This is both a positive and a negative. Never before has a group of kids been so highly talented while completely lacking any self-drive.
Trying to teach them the way you were taught—or expecting things of them in exactly the same way they were expected of you—will most likely lead to re-instruction and certain frustration. I’m generalizing here, but if you were trained with a 1,000-page manual on what to do and when to do it, then you might be great at giving the micro-managed direction that this group feeds off of. If, in contrast, you give minimal direction, don’t be surprised if one out of every 50 new hires “gets it” and gives top job performance.
I can say with absolute certainty to every single person reading this that there is a better way. There is a better way to train, a better way to manage, and a better way to thrive with this up-and-coming work force.
My father is a Retired Marine lieutenant colonel and every male in my family has served in the Marines at one point or another, including myself. I was diagnosed with Type 1 diabetes at 20 years old and changed my life to become a restaurant owner instead of a career Judge Advocate General lawyer. What I witnessed in the Marines is that young people when presented with a path—a path that leads to respect, self worth and a sense of accomplishment—can carry out any responsibility your pizzeria can set before them and then some.
Think about the power of the path to self-worth. What does your pizza place do for your employee’s mentality? Does your workplace create a consistent mindset fore the employee of, “We crank out a semi-decent product while I wait for the next thing in my life to flop into my lap while old man pizza-owner wastes his life inside these four walls”? Or is yours a place where it might instead be said that, “I the employee am learning how to conduct myself in a business, pushing my own boundaries and abilities to be a valued commodity when I one day leave this job or, fingers crossed, learn to manage and run my own store with this boss I respect and value?
All employees worth a damn want this. They are out there. The Marines transform kids smarter and dumber than your staff into focused, driven young people—who are motivated, ready and willing to deliver on their tasks.
However, you are not the Marine Corps; you are not dealing with life and death. You deal in pizza. The good thing is that you don’t have to be a drill sergeant and yell to get your point across. If you conduct yourself appropriately, the fear of having you be disappointed in their results will be fear enough. Look at what high school and college sports teams accomplish with young people. They achieve focused efforts from kids not through monetary gain but through a feeling of self-worth.
So how does that translate to Gen Y more than any other generation? Gen Y is used to the quick course. Go to this place; get this Facebook page. Text instead of talk; use GPS instead of mapping it out. They have always had a path. SO GIVE THEM ONE.
Create a rank structure. Not just manager and assistant manager, but different hats, shirts, or jackets for each level of skill and knowledge. Create programs and classes with direct expectations, arduous prerequisites, and pay raises and social incentives delivered upon completion.
Money alone is not motivation enough. I know that sounds crazy. You might have been willing to clean toilets all night if it meant extra cash, but that is not the norm for this group. There is an exception for servers getting tips, but for staff that needs to complete a prep list or get food out fast and perfect while maintaining high morale, a direct motivator like status in the restaurant works best. This is where ranking status and differences in the uniform parts they wear can work to your advantage.
Create a sense of positive competition, and reward results over effort. Appreciate those who try, but reward and openly compliment those who perform. As for staff that can’t get on board, create defined, emotionless structure of what will happen when they don’t meet expectations—and then act. Never give a lot of attention to negative actions, because Gen Y is attention-starved, only feed good attention to those who deserve it and punish negative behavior swiftly and directly.
Gen Y has several advantages. Show them how, watch them do it, and then tell them that is the standard and they can perform consistently. If your staff is proud to work at your restaurant and glad that they work for someone like you, than turnover, labor costs, food quality and quality of life can and will fall in line.
For more details on International Pizza Expo 2013, visit www.pizzaexpo.com.
Mike Bausch operates two Andolini’s Pizzeria stores in Tulsa, Okla., with a total of 140 employees. He will give a seminar at Pizza Expo 2013 on Thursday, March 21, titled “Managing and Motivating Gen Y Employees.”
Related
If you've ever wished you could sit down with a super-successful operator and quiz him about the keys to pizza profits, you'll want to sit in on Pizza Expo 2013's Wednesday morning keynote one-on-one session with $6-Million-Man Bill Jacobs and Pizza Today editor Jeremy White.
Jeremy will be your surrogate at this kick-off to the second day of Expo, March 20. He'll guide the discussion with Jacobs, whose Piece Brewery & Pizzeria in Chicago grosses more than $6 million in sales per year from one unit. You'll learn through this candid insider's exchange why Jacobs sold his successful bagel company and turned to pizza in 2001; how he found the perfect location in a mature pizza market and built revenues; why he's resisted opening a second unit; and much more.
Piece was named Pizza Today's Independent Pizzeria of the Year in 2011 and Jacobs, a Connecticut native who brought New Haven-style pies to the Windy City, has an engaging story to tell. There will be time for questions from the crowd as well during this wide-ranging and insightful keynote session.
Visit PizzaExpo.com to learn more about next year's show. .
Related
{module_webapps,24627,i,5572411}More Articles
{module_webapps,24627,i,5351954}More Articles
Exciting new seminars, workshops and competitions are in store for you at International Pizza Expo 2013, at the Las Vegas Convention Center, March 19-21 in Las Vegas, Nevada.
BREAKING NEWS: Pizza Expo will kick off with a special appearance by Chef Robert Irvine, host of Food Network’s prime-time series Restaurant Impossible.
A Craft Beer powerhouse panel discussion will make its debut at the 2013 Pizza Expo. Want to build a profitable craft beer program? Don’t miss this seminar.
The World Pizza Game return with the addition of a new “triathlon” category, comprised of box folding, dough tossing for a 16-inch screen and dough tossing for a 24-inch screen.
Find out more about the new additions to the 2013 Pizza Expo by clicking here.
To view a full schedule at a glance, click here.
International Pizza Expo® 2013, scheduled for March 19-21 at the Las Vegas Convention Center, is the oldest and largest annual gathering of pizza professionals—and will draw approximately 7,000 attendees and 450 exhibitors to a show floor covering an area equal to 5½ football fields. In its 29th year, Pizza Expo attracts top independent and chain operators to do business in the exhibit hall, attend education sessions and take part in pizza-making competitions.
Related
{module_webapps,24627,i,5449441}More Articles
{module_webapps,24627,i,5351954}More Articles
Exciting new seminars, workshops and competitions are in store for you at International Pizza Expo 2013, at the Las Vegas Convention Center, March 19-21 in Las Vegas, Nevada.
BREAKING NEWS: Pizza Expo will kick off with a special appearance by Chef Robert Irvine, host of Food Network’s prime-time series Restaurant Impossible.
A Craft Beer powerhouse panel discussion will make its debut at the 2013 Pizza Expo. Want to build a profitable craft beer program? Don’t miss this seminar.
The World Pizza Game return with the addition of a new “triathlon” category, comprised of box folding, dough tossing for a 16-inch screen and dough tossing for a 24-inch screen.
Find out more about the new additions to the 2013 Pizza Expo by clicking here.
To view a full schedule at a glance, click here.
International Pizza Expo® 2013, scheduled for March 19-21 at the Las Vegas Convention Center, is the oldest and largest annual gathering of pizza professionals—and will draw approximately 7,000 attendees and 450 exhibitors to a show floor covering an area equal to 5½ football fields. In its 29th year, Pizza Expo attracts top independent and chain operators to do business in the exhibit hall, attend education sessions and take part in pizza-making competitions.
Related

Pizza Expo® has something for everyone –– whether you’re looking for new ways to create revenue or just want to find out about the latest industry trends and products. The one thing that really separates Pizza Expo from all of the other general foodservice shows is the fact that there’s only one tradeshow where you’ll find over 80 industry specific seminars, workshops and demonstrations, 450 exhibiting companies and 1,000 booths all devoted to pizza … and that’s Pizza Expo. Throw in the best networking event in the industry –– the Beer and Bull Idea Exchange –– along with all of our other great contests and competitions, such as the World Pizza Games, International Pizza Challenge, and the Great $20,000 Mega Bucks Giveaway, and you can see why industry veterans call Pizza Expo the “Show of Shows.”
This year’s Expo shattered all of our previous attendance records with nearly 7,000 attendees and 4,000 exhibitor personnel. And the international presence was astounding, with attendees from Australia, Brazil, Canada, China, Finland, Germany, Italy, Japan, Mexico, Mongolia, Norway and Spain –– just to name a few –– making it a truly worldly experience for everyone! Pizza is indeed a universal food, and there was plenty of it to be found on our show floor that measured over 5½ football fields.
If you didn’t get the chance to attend this year’s show, you still have the opportunity to listen and learn by ordering recordings of some or all of the 50-plus educational sessions that were offered. You can order a Multimedia DVD-ROM or download directly to your iPod by going to the InteliQuest Media website at www. intelliquestmedia.com. It’s also a good way to revisit a seminar to hear what you missed or listen to one you couldn’t attend –– and we know there were several you probably wish you could have made it to during the show.
In addition, I want to thank everyone who attended this year’s Expo. Without the continued support of pizzeria operators, suppliers, manufacturers and industry experts, we could not have achieved the measure of success that makes International Pizza Expo the must- attend event of the year.
It’s never too early to start making plans for next year’s show, slated for March 19 – 21, 2013, at the Las Vegas Convention Center, so save the date! We’re already making plans for next year’s Expo, and we think you’ll be pleased with the changes we’re making. If you have any ideas or suggestions on how we can improve the show, please give me a call at (800) 489-8324 or drop me a note at BOakley@PizzaToday.com.
Last but not least, please remember International Pizza Expo is a tax- deductible working vacation.
It’s all Pizza and it’s all for YOU!
Sincerely,
Bill Oakley
Executive Vice President
More Articles
{module_webapps,24627,i,5374934}More Articles

If you’re a student of the pizza industry, chances are you’ve probably heard of a little show called International Pizza Expo. If you were one of the nearly 7,000 people who attended, you experienced first-hand the knowledge, expertise and excitement the annual show brought to the Las Vegas Convention Center last March.
“This year we had attendees from all 50 states, Puerto Rico, Canada and 23 other countries,” says Bill Oakley, executive vice president of Macfadden Protech, parent company of International Pizza Expo. “We even had a group from the largest pizza company in Mongolia, Mr. Pizza, make the long trip to Las Vegas to experience everything Pizza Expo has to offer. As a result of their experience, they’ve already implemented some of the ideas they picked up at Expo.” Show organizers say that 25 percent of show-goers were first-time attendees, and the show designated a day devoted entirely to those looking to start pizzerias. “Based on the comments to date, it was a huge success with 684 attendees taking part in this day-long educational program,” Oakley says. “This stimulating day of educational sessions and workshops was followed by a reception where attendees could network with fellow ‘newbies,’ industry experts and event sponsors.” Keynote speakers for the three-day show included Nick Sarillo, owner of Nick’s Pizza & Pub in Illinois, and Marla Topliff, president of Rosati’s Pizza. Bruce Allar, vice president of meetings and conferences for Macfadden Protech, says the 2012 line-up of Pizza Expo speakers placed more emphasis on successful pizzeria owners, making International Pizza Expo a true peer-to-peer experience. “The buzz of activity never abated among buyers and sellers on the show floor, or among pizza professionals networking and learning at other Expo gatherings,” says Allar. “Pizza Expo maintained a powerful momentum from the opening bell on Tuesday morning all the way to its conclusion on Thursday afternoon.”
Contestants vied for supremacy in the International Pizza Challenge, a series of culinary competitions designed to highlight the best of the best.
In the traditional division, regional prelimary winners included:
Reál Varela, Brooklyn Pizza & Pasta, Los Angeles, CA – Southwest Region
Tim Silva, Pizza My Heart, Los Gatos, CA – Northwest Region
Mark Briand, Bondi’s Pizza, London, Ont. – Mid-America Region
Giovanni Gagliardi, Pizzeria La Leggenda, San Felice, Italy – International Region
Marlene Smith, Pizza Palace Plus, Emporium, PA – Northeast Region
Keith Coffman, Lost River Pizza Co., Bowling Green, KY – Southeast Region
Frank Baird, Franco’s Pizza, Chardon, OH – Wild Card
Silva took home the title of World’s Best Traditional Pizza Winner.
In the Non-Traditional Division, preliminary winners were:
Joleen Pisner, AJ Barile’s Chicago Pizza, Yucaipa, CA – Southwest Region
John Cammack, Lefty’s Grill, Nevada City, CA – Northwest Region
Rick Mines, Nima’s Pizza & More, Gassville, AR – Southeast Region
John Gutekanst, Avalanche Pizza, Athens, OH – Mid-America Region
Andrew Scudera, Goodfella’s Brick Oven Pizza, Staten Island, NY – Northeast Region
Tsutomu Inayoshi, Home Delivered Pizza, Aichi, Japan – International Region
Scudera took home the title of World’s Best Non-Traditional Pizza.
In the new American-Pan division, finalists included:
Shawn Randazzo, Cloverleaf Pizza of St. Clair, St. Clair Shores, MI – 1st Place
Matthew Heard, Humble Pie, Edmond, OK – 2nd Place
Alex Abellan, Pizza Zone, Victoria, BC – 3rd Place
The Italian-Style Division Finals Winners were:
Umberto Fornito, Italy – 1st Place
Saverio Ciampi, Italy – 2nd Place
Alessandra DeBellis, Italy – 3rd Place
Finalists from each division competed in a blind-box challenge in the Pizza Maker of the Year Bake-Off. The competition’s mystery ingredient, Cattlemen’s Carolina Tangy Gold Barbeque Sauce, proved to be a challenge for the four finalists, who presented the judges with unique pizzas created from a table of provided ingredients. Shawn Randazzo of Cloverleaf Pizza of St. Clair in St. Clair Shores, Michigan, walked away with the title of World Champion Pizza Maker and a cash prize. The International Pizza Challenge also pitted four former winners –– all industry experts in their own right. Tony Gemignani of San Francisco-based Tony’s Pizza Napoletana was named the “Best of the Best” Master Pizza Maker of the Year.
The popular World Pizza Games trials culminated at an event on Wednesday, March 13. Winners were:
1st Division Freestyle Acrobatics: Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan
Masters Division Freestyle Acrobatics: Jay Schuurman, Pizza Rock, Sacramento, CA
Fastest Dough Stretch: Ingrosso Simone, Pizzeria Del Mille, Italy
Fastest Box Folding: Jimmy Xang, Pizza Guys, Rancho Cordova, CA
Largest Dough Stretch: Mario Sigmorile, Pizzeria Del Centro, Italy
Longest Spin: Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan
Throughout the three-day event, show attendees visited sponsoring booths and turned in gamepieces for the $20,000 MEGA BUCKS Giveaway. Frank Sastano of Tulsa, Oklahoma-based Savastano’s Pizzeria took home the cash prize.
“This year’s Pizza Expo was the biggest and best show ever, breaking records for attendance with 6,901 pizza professionals, 940 booths and tons of excitement,” says Oakley. “Words just don’t do it justice; you really have to experience Pizza Expo to understand the interaction that takes place between our attendees and exhibitors. Everyone is truly anxious and motivated to get into discussions about new products, new technology, the latest industry trends and hot-button issues facing the industry today.”
In a memorable scene from the 1967 movie “The Graduate,” Mr. McGuire offers a cryptic suggestion about the key to future for the young college grad played by Dustin Hoffman.
Mr. McGuire: “I just want to say one word to you. Just one word.”
Benjamin: “Yes, sir.”
Mr. McGuire: “Are you listening?”
Benjamin: “Yes, I am.”
Mr. McGuire: “Plastics.”
Benjamin: “How exactly do you mean?”
Mr. McGuire was of course referring to the impending plastics revolution that he believed would change the future. Thirty-five years later, we can replace the word “plastics” with “technology.” Defining growth goals for your pizza operation is a part of healthy business planning. Whether you want to grow your sales by $1 million or $5 million, a cutting edge Point of Sale (POS) system is the key to the future growth and profitability of your pizza operation.
In 1995, Pizza Shuttle opened its doors at a new location on Milwaukee’s East Side. Armed with a pen and notepad, we ambitiously set out to grow our business in our new college-centric neighborhood. We had everything a young, independent pizzeria could offer: a hip marketing campaign, an expanded menu that catered to everyone, late-night hours and delivery service. With 10 years under our belts, we had struck a formula that seemed to work. But if we were to obtain the growth we desired and remain a competitive, evolving business, we had to have a “Mr. McGuire moment” and embrace the technology of the future.
Technology. What exactly does this mean?
We could not have grown efficiently or profitably without the investment in a POS system. You won’t either. Let’s assume you have an unprecedented work ethic, a great product, excellent location and a talented, hard-working staff. If you do not use a POS system, you might as well be taking orders with a pencil and paper on a rotary phone.
Modern pizza consumers have come to expect savvy use of technology by businesses they patronize. In addition to driving a smooth internal experience, a POS system can integrate with online ordering interfaces and social media, as well as offer advanced marketing capabilities that can create a two-way communication channel between the business and the consumer. An efficient business driven by technology will result in a rewarding employee and customer experience.
A good POS system can positively impact every aspect of your business and, most importantly, your bottom line. The following list captures only a short list of benefits that a POS system offers in sustaining and creating business growth.
1) Order taking accuracy and financial control.
2) Delivery dispatch management.
3) Labor management and payroll administration.
4) Integration with web and mobile order interfaces. (This could grow to 50 percent of your orders!)
5) Inventory control.
6) Reporting capabilities: logistics, sales, labor, promotions.
7) Security cameras and surveillance.
8) Credit card processing.
9) Customer relationship management through email, text marketing, social media.
10) Gift cards and loyalty programs.
Choosing a POS System Picking a POS company can be a daunting task. As POS systems evolve with today’s sophisticated business trends, it can be difficult to discern what system will result in the best fit for your business and produce the most return on your investment. The following suggestions can serve as a basic framework for choosing the best POS system for your business.
• Visit a restaurant of similar culture and volume that uses your prospective system. The POS system market offers numerous options for pizza operations of all kinds. The best way to see how a particular system will fit your operations is to observe its performance at a business similar to yours. Of course, you must also consider the future direction of your business in addition to outfitting the business you are today.
• Think about the kind of change you would like to see as a result of your POS system purchase. If you are considering adding delivery service as part of your POS system purchase, visit a high-volume delivery operation and pay attention. Define the areas of growth that are important to you and determine how the POS functions to see if it can get you there. Want to manage payroll? Integrate credit card processing? Expand your marketing capabilities? Make a list of future growth goals and use it as a roadmap in your POS system research.
• Ask the employees. Nobody can give a better testament to a system’s performance than the employees that use it every day. Employees will give you the brutal truth on how the system handles the busiest times or how intuitive the interface is to use and navigate.
• Know their support capabilities. Research a prospective POS company’s support capabilities to see if they match meet the needs of your business. Do you have somebody who is comfortable with programming menu changes in-house or will you be relying on the POS company to make changes? If you are open until bar time, you might want to make 24/7 service support a non-negotiable feature.
• Look into buying or leasing a used POS system. A POS system represents a significant investment in your business and the upfront costs can be intimidating, perhaps even prohibitive. Buying a used system from an existing restaurant or exploring leasing options can save you on upfront costs.
You are creating a living, breathing business that can and should grow. Remember, you do not have to do $1 million or $5 million to make money—although that doesn’t hurt! But at a very minimum, you need to take advantage of the technology available to maximize control of your money while minimizing your labor. A self-sufficient business cultivated by the smart use of technology will enable you to realize healthy business growth, maximize profits and spend more time with family and friends. That’s how technology can really help you enjoy life.
Mark Gold, a co-founder of Milwaukee-based Pizza Shuttle, which amasses $4.2 million in per-year sales from one store, will be a panel member for the Million-in-One Club discussion on Monday, March 18, during special pre-show programming at Pizza Expo. He’ll be joined by Tony Caputo of Red Rose Pizzeria, Tony Gemignani of Tony’s Pizza Napoletana and Ray McConn of Mother Bear’s Pizza for a question-and-answer session about growing one unit to $1 million-plus in annual revenues.
For more details on International Pizza Expo 2013, visit www.pizzaexpo.com.
Related

Who and what is Gen Y? The sheer variety in this young workforce makes it difficult to define Generation Y. This group is so ambiguous that it doesn’t even have its own generational name. The popular expression merely morphed from Gen X to Y.
This how I define Gen-Y: They’re a group of people who have been given everything—a defined path, a defined sense of worth, a laser pinpoint focus on how and what success is. All they know is to follow the path. This is both a positive and a negative. Never before has a group of kids been so highly talented while completely lacking any self-drive.
Trying to teach them the way you were taught—or expecting things of them in exactly the same way they were expected of you—will most likely lead to re-instruction and certain frustration. I’m generalizing here, but if you were trained with a 1,000-page manual on what to do and when to do it, then you might be great at giving the micro-managed direction that this group feeds off of. If, in contrast, you give minimal direction, don’t be surprised if one out of every 50 new hires “gets it” and gives top job performance.
I can say with absolute certainty to every single person reading this that there is a better way. There is a better way to train, a better way to manage, and a better way to thrive with this up-and-coming work force.
My father is a Retired Marine lieutenant colonel and every male in my family has served in the Marines at one point or another, including myself. I was diagnosed with Type 1 diabetes at 20 years old and changed my life to become a restaurant owner instead of a career Judge Advocate General lawyer. What I witnessed in the Marines is that young people when presented with a path—a path that leads to respect, self worth and a sense of accomplishment—can carry out any responsibility your pizzeria can set before them and then some.
Think about the power of the path to self-worth. What does your pizza place do for your employee’s mentality? Does your workplace create a consistent mindset fore the employee of, “We crank out a semi-decent product while I wait for the next thing in my life to flop into my lap while old man pizza-owner wastes his life inside these four walls”? Or is yours a place where it might instead be said that, “I the employee am learning how to conduct myself in a business, pushing my own boundaries and abilities to be a valued commodity when I one day leave this job or, fingers crossed, learn to manage and run my own store with this boss I respect and value?
All employees worth a damn want this. They are out there. The Marines transform kids smarter and dumber than your staff into focused, driven young people—who are motivated, ready and willing to deliver on their tasks.
However, you are not the Marine Corps; you are not dealing with life and death. You deal in pizza. The good thing is that you don’t have to be a drill sergeant and yell to get your point across. If you conduct yourself appropriately, the fear of having you be disappointed in their results will be fear enough. Look at what high school and college sports teams accomplish with young people. They achieve focused efforts from kids not through monetary gain but through a feeling of self-worth.
So how does that translate to Gen Y more than any other generation? Gen Y is used to the quick course. Go to this place; get this Facebook page. Text instead of talk; use GPS instead of mapping it out. They have always had a path. SO GIVE THEM ONE.
Create a rank structure. Not just manager and assistant manager, but different hats, shirts, or jackets for each level of skill and knowledge. Create programs and classes with direct expectations, arduous prerequisites, and pay raises and social incentives delivered upon completion.
Money alone is not motivation enough. I know that sounds crazy. You might have been willing to clean toilets all night if it meant extra cash, but that is not the norm for this group. There is an exception for servers getting tips, but for staff that needs to complete a prep list or get food out fast and perfect while maintaining high morale, a direct motivator like status in the restaurant works best. This is where ranking status and differences in the uniform parts they wear can work to your advantage.
Create a sense of positive competition, and reward results over effort. Appreciate those who try, but reward and openly compliment those who perform. As for staff that can’t get on board, create defined, emotionless structure of what will happen when they don’t meet expectations—and then act. Never give a lot of attention to negative actions, because Gen Y is attention-starved, only feed good attention to those who deserve it and punish negative behavior swiftly and directly.
Gen Y has several advantages. Show them how, watch them do it, and then tell them that is the standard and they can perform consistently. If your staff is proud to work at your restaurant and glad that they work for someone like you, than turnover, labor costs, food quality and quality of life can and will fall in line.
For more details on International Pizza Expo 2013, visit www.pizzaexpo.com.
Mike Bausch operates two Andolini’s Pizzeria stores in Tulsa, Okla., with a total of 140 employees. He will give a seminar at Pizza Expo 2013 on Thursday, March 21, titled “Managing and Motivating Gen Y Employees.”
Related
If you've ever wished you could sit down with a super-successful operator and quiz him about the keys to pizza profits, you'll want to sit in on Pizza Expo 2013's Wednesday morning keynote one-on-one session with $6-Million-Man Bill Jacobs and Pizza Today editor Jeremy White.
Jeremy will be your surrogate at this kick-off to the second day of Expo, March 20. He'll guide the discussion with Jacobs, whose Piece Brewery & Pizzeria in Chicago grosses more than $6 million in sales per year from one unit. You'll learn through this candid insider's exchange why Jacobs sold his successful bagel company and turned to pizza in 2001; how he found the perfect location in a mature pizza market and built revenues; why he's resisted opening a second unit; and much more.
Piece was named Pizza Today's Independent Pizzeria of the Year in 2011 and Jacobs, a Connecticut native who brought New Haven-style pies to the Windy City, has an engaging story to tell. There will be time for questions from the crowd as well during this wide-ranging and insightful keynote session.
Visit PizzaExpo.com to learn more about next year's show. .
Related

At Pizza Expo® you’ll find 5½ football fields of pizza-related products, services and equipment, as well as leading industry experts, consultants and analysts who are all willing to share new ideas and insights on everything you need to adapt, react and prosper in today’s economy. At next year’s show, we’ve added several new speakers to the lineup of experts keeping you abreast of trends and best practices in pizzeria management.
Here are just a few of the new speakers and topics we have planned for our 29th annual show, March 19–21, 2013:
“Famous Joe” Carlucci, owner of Joe’s Pizzeria, will tell you how to expand your catering business and boost your bottom line.
Roberta Matuson, president of Human Resource Solutions, is the author of the highly acclaimed book, Suddenly in Charge: Managing Up, Managing Down, Succeeding All Around, a Washington Post Top Five Business Book for Leaders. Roberta will show you how to “Make Dollars and Sense Out of Gen Y”, as well as present a second session on strategies for business growth.
Jeff Mease, founder & CEO of One World Enterprises, which includes Pizza X, Lennie’s, The Bloomington Brewing Co. and One World Catering & Events, will take you through the process of deciding whether or not to open a second unit.
Mike Bausch, owner of Andolini’s Pizzeria and 2011 Tulsa Restaurateur of the Year, will tell you how to manage, motivate and empower Gen Y to take your pizzeria to the next level.
T. J. Schier, president and founder of Incentivize Solutions and S.M.A.R.T. Restaurant Group, is one of the foremost authorities on restaurant training tactics. He’ll teach you the “Training Tactics of Pizza Pros” that really work and give a second seminar on 10 tactics to make your front line improve your bottom line.
Beckee Moreland, director of gluten-free industry initiatives for the National Foundation for Celiac Awareness, will disclose how gluten-free products are impacting foodservice and creating new menu opportunities. She’ll discuss the potential of gluten-free pizza in the working pizzeria kitchen.
The bottom line is there’s always something new at Pizza Expo that can improve your pizzeria… a new marketing idea, technological innovation or menu item. As always, our commitment to you, our partners, is to continue to grow and improve every facet of Pizza Expo… from the trade show floor to our networking events and contests. In fact, if you don’t come away from International Pizza Expo 2013 with new cost-saving or profit-boosting ideas, I’ll refund your registration fee. All you have to do is put it in writing to me and I’ll send you a prompt refund. What other show gives you a money-back guarantee? I’ll tell you, none!
Remember International Pizza Expo® is a tax-deductible working vacation.
For more information on our contests or to register, please call (800) 489-8324 or visit our Website at www.PizzaExpo.com.
It’s all pizza and it’s all for YOU!
Best regards,
Bill Oakley
Executive Vice President
Bill OAKLEY
More Articles

If you’re a student of the pizza industry, chances are you’ve probably heard of a little show called International Pizza Expo. If you were one of the nearly 7,000 people who attended, you experienced first-hand the knowledge, expertise and excitement the annual show brought to the Las Vegas Convention Center last March.
“This year we had attendees from all 50 states, Puerto Rico, Canada and 23 other countries,” says Bill Oakley, executive vice president of Macfadden Protech, parent company of International Pizza Expo. “We even had a group from the largest pizza company in Mongolia, Mr. Pizza, make the long trip to Las Vegas to experience everything Pizza Expo has to offer. As a result of their experience, they’ve already implemented some of the ideas they picked up at Expo.” Show organizers say that 25 percent of show-goers were first-time attendees, and the show designated a day devoted entirely to those looking to start pizzerias. “Based on the comments to date, it was a huge success with 684 attendees taking part in this day-long educational program,” Oakley says. “This stimulating day of educational sessions and workshops was followed by a reception where attendees could network with fellow ‘newbies,’ industry experts and event sponsors.” Keynote speakers for the three-day show included Nick Sarillo, owner of Nick’s Pizza & Pub in Illinois, and Marla Topliff, president of Rosati’s Pizza. Bruce Allar, vice president of meetings and conferences for Macfadden Protech, says the 2012 line-up of Pizza Expo speakers placed more emphasis on successful pizzeria owners, making International Pizza Expo a true peer-to-peer experience. “The buzz of activity never abated among buyers and sellers on the show floor, or among pizza professionals networking and learning at other Expo gatherings,” says Allar. “Pizza Expo maintained a powerful momentum from the opening bell on Tuesday morning all the way to its conclusion on Thursday afternoon.”
Contestants vied for supremacy in the International Pizza Challenge, a series of culinary competitions designed to highlight the best of the best.
In the traditional division, regional prelimary winners included:
Reál Varela, Brooklyn Pizza & Pasta, Los Angeles, CA – Southwest Region
Tim Silva, Pizza My Heart, Los Gatos, CA – Northwest Region
Mark Briand, Bondi’s Pizza, London, Ont. – Mid-America Region
Giovanni Gagliardi, Pizzeria La Leggenda, San Felice, Italy – International Region
Marlene Smith, Pizza Palace Plus, Emporium, PA – Northeast Region
Keith Coffman, Lost River Pizza Co., Bowling Green, KY – Southeast Region
Frank Baird, Franco’s Pizza, Chardon, OH – Wild Card
Silva took home the title of World’s Best Traditional Pizza Winner.
In the Non-Traditional Division, preliminary winners were:
Joleen Pisner, AJ Barile’s Chicago Pizza, Yucaipa, CA – Southwest Region
John Cammack, Lefty’s Grill, Nevada City, CA – Northwest Region
Rick Mines, Nima’s Pizza & More, Gassville, AR – Southeast Region
John Gutekanst, Avalanche Pizza, Athens, OH – Mid-America Region
Andrew Scudera, Goodfella’s Brick Oven Pizza, Staten Island, NY – Northeast Region
Tsutomu Inayoshi, Home Delivered Pizza, Aichi, Japan – International Region
Scudera took home the title of World’s Best Non-Traditional Pizza.
In the new American-Pan division, finalists included:
Shawn Randazzo, Cloverleaf Pizza of St. Clair, St. Clair Shores, MI – 1st Place
Matthew Heard, Humble Pie, Edmond, OK – 2nd Place
Alex Abellan, Pizza Zone, Victoria, BC – 3rd Place
The Italian-Style Division Finals Winners were:
Umberto Fornito, Italy – 1st Place
Saverio Ciampi, Italy – 2nd Place
Alessandra DeBellis, Italy – 3rd Place
Finalists from each division competed in a blind-box challenge in the Pizza Maker of the Year Bake-Off. The competition’s mystery ingredient, Cattlemen’s Carolina Tangy Gold Barbeque Sauce, proved to be a challenge for the four finalists, who presented the judges with unique pizzas created from a table of provided ingredients. Shawn Randazzo of Cloverleaf Pizza of St. Clair in St. Clair Shores, Michigan, walked away with the title of World Champion Pizza Maker and a cash prize. The International Pizza Challenge also pitted four former winners –– all industry experts in their own right. Tony Gemignani of San Francisco-based Tony’s Pizza Napoletana was named the “Best of the Best” Master Pizza Maker of the Year.
The popular World Pizza Games trials culminated at an event on Wednesday, March 13. Winners were:
1st Division Freestyle Acrobatics: Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan
Masters Division Freestyle Acrobatics: Jay Schuurman, Pizza Rock, Sacramento, CA
Fastest Dough Stretch: Ingrosso Simone, Pizzeria Del Mille, Italy
Fastest Box Folding: Jimmy Xang, Pizza Guys, Rancho Cordova, CA
Largest Dough Stretch: Mario Sigmorile, Pizzeria Del Centro, Italy
Longest Spin: Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan
Throughout the three-day event, show attendees visited sponsoring booths and turned in gamepieces for the $20,000 MEGA BUCKS Giveaway. Frank Sastano of Tulsa, Oklahoma-based Savastano’s Pizzeria took home the cash prize.
“This year’s Pizza Expo was the biggest and best show ever, breaking records for attendance with 6,901 pizza professionals, 940 booths and tons of excitement,” says Oakley. “Words just don’t do it justice; you really have to experience Pizza Expo to understand the interaction that takes place between our attendees and exhibitors. Everyone is truly anxious and motivated to get into discussions about new products, new technology, the latest industry trends and hot-button issues facing the industry today.”
More Articles
Exciting new seminars, workshops and competitions are in store for you at International Pizza Expo 2013, at the Las Vegas Convention Center, March 19-21 in Las Vegas, Nevada.
BREAKING NEWS: Pizza Expo will kick off with a special appearance by Chef Robert Irvine, host of Food Network’s prime-time series Restaurant Impossible.
A Craft Beer powerhouse panel discussion will make its debut at the 2013 Pizza Expo. Want to build a profitable craft beer program? Don’t miss this seminar.
The World Pizza Game return with the addition of a new “triathlon” category, comprised of box folding, dough tossing for a 16-inch screen and dough tossing for a 24-inch screen.
Find out more about the new additions to the 2013 Pizza Expo by clicking here.
To view a full schedule at a glance, click here.
International Pizza Expo® 2013, scheduled for March 19-21 at the Las Vegas Convention Center, is the oldest and largest annual gathering of pizza professionals—and will draw approximately 7,000 attendees and 450 exhibitors to a show floor covering an area equal to 5½ football fields. In its 29th year, Pizza Expo attracts top independent and chain operators to do business in the exhibit hall, attend education sessions and take part in pizza-making competitions.
Related

Pizza Expo® has something for everyone –– whether you’re looking for new ways to create revenue or just want to find out about the latest industry trends and products. The one thing that really separates Pizza Expo from all of the other general foodservice shows is the fact that there’s only one tradeshow where you’ll find over 80 industry specific seminars, workshops and demonstrations, 450 exhibiting companies and 1,000 booths all devoted to pizza … and that’s Pizza Expo. Throw in the best networking event in the industry –– the Beer and Bull Idea Exchange –– along with all of our other great contests and competitions, such as the World Pizza Games, International Pizza Challenge, and the Great $20,000 Mega Bucks Giveaway, and you can see why industry veterans call Pizza Expo the “Show of Shows.”
This year’s Expo shattered all of our previous attendance records with nearly 7,000 attendees and 4,000 exhibitor personnel. And the international presence was astounding, with attendees from Australia, Brazil, Canada, China, Finland, Germany, Italy, Japan, Mexico, Mongolia, Norway and Spain –– just to name a few –– making it a truly worldly experience for everyone! Pizza is indeed a universal food, and there was plenty of it to be found on our show floor that measured over 5½ football fields.
If you didn’t get the chance to attend this year’s show, you still have the opportunity to listen and learn by ordering recordings of some or all of the 50-plus educational sessions that were offered. You can order a Multimedia DVD-ROM or download directly to your iPod by going to the InteliQuest Media website at www. intelliquestmedia.com. It’s also a good way to revisit a seminar to hear what you missed or listen to one you couldn’t attend –– and we know there were several you probably wish you could have made it to during the show.
In addition, I want to thank everyone who attended this year’s Expo. Without the continued support of pizzeria operators, suppliers, manufacturers and industry experts, we could not have achieved the measure of success that makes International Pizza Expo the must- attend event of the year.
It’s never too early to start making plans for next year’s show, slated for March 19 – 21, 2013, at the Las Vegas Convention Center, so save the date! We’re already making plans for next year’s Expo, and we think you’ll be pleased with the changes we’re making. If you have any ideas or suggestions on how we can improve the show, please give me a call at (800) 489-8324 or drop me a note at BOakley@PizzaToday.com.
Last but not least, please remember International Pizza Expo is a tax- deductible working vacation.
It’s all Pizza and it’s all for YOU!
Sincerely,
Bill Oakley
Executive Vice President
More Articles
{module_webapps,24627,i,5374934}More Articles

If you’re a student of the pizza industry, chances are you’ve probably heard of a little show called International Pizza Expo. If you were one of the nearly 7,000 people who attended, you experienced first-hand the knowledge, expertise and excitement the annual show brought to the Las Vegas Convention Center last March.
“This year we had attendees from all 50 states, Puerto Rico, Canada and 23 other countries,” says Bill Oakley, executive vice president of Macfadden Protech, parent company of International Pizza Expo. “We even had a group from the largest pizza company in Mongolia, Mr. Pizza, make the long trip to Las Vegas to experience everything Pizza Expo has to offer. As a result of their experience, they’ve already implemented some of the ideas they picked up at Expo.” Show organizers say that 25 percent of show-goers were first-time attendees, and the show designated a day devoted entirely to those looking to start pizzerias. “Based on the comments to date, it was a huge success with 684 attendees taking part in this day-long educational program,” Oakley says. “This stimulating day of educational sessions and workshops was followed by a reception where attendees could network with fellow ‘newbies,’ industry experts and event sponsors.” Keynote speakers for the three-day show included Nick Sarillo, owner of Nick’s Pizza & Pub in Illinois, and Marla Topliff, president of Rosati’s Pizza. Bruce Allar, vice president of meetings and conferences for Macfadden Protech, says the 2012 line-up of Pizza Expo speakers placed more emphasis on successful pizzeria owners, making International Pizza Expo a true peer-to-peer experience. “The buzz of activity never abated among buyers and sellers on the show floor, or among pizza professionals networking and learning at other Expo gatherings,” says Allar. “Pizza Expo maintained a powerful momentum from the opening bell on Tuesday morning all the way to its conclusion on Thursday afternoon.”
Contestants vied for supremacy in the International Pizza Challenge, a series of culinary competitions designed to highlight the best of the best.
In the traditional division, regional prelimary winners included:
Reál Varela, Brooklyn Pizza & Pasta, Los Angeles, CA – Southwest Region
Tim Silva, Pizza My Heart, Los Gatos, CA – Northwest Region
Mark Briand, Bondi’s Pizza, London, Ont. – Mid-America Region
Giovanni Gagliardi, Pizzeria La Leggenda, San Felice, Italy – International Region
Marlene Smith, Pizza Palace Plus, Emporium, PA – Northeast Region
Keith Coffman, Lost River Pizza Co., Bowling Green, KY – Southeast Region
Frank Baird, Franco’s Pizza, Chardon, OH – Wild Card
Silva took home the title of World’s Best Traditional Pizza Winner.
In the Non-Traditional Division, preliminary winners were:
Joleen Pisner, AJ Barile’s Chicago Pizza, Yucaipa, CA – Southwest Region
John Cammack, Lefty’s Grill, Nevada City, CA – Northwest Region
Rick Mines, Nima’s Pizza & More, Gassville, AR – Southeast Region
John Gutekanst, Avalanche Pizza, Athens, OH – Mid-America Region
Andrew Scudera, Goodfella’s Brick Oven Pizza, Staten Island, NY – Northeast Region
Tsutomu Inayoshi, Home Delivered Pizza, Aichi, Japan – International Region
Scudera took home the title of World’s Best Non-Traditional Pizza.
In the new American-Pan division, finalists included:
Shawn Randazzo, Cloverleaf Pizza of St. Clair, St. Clair Shores, MI – 1st Place
Matthew Heard, Humble Pie, Edmond, OK – 2nd Place
Alex Abellan, Pizza Zone, Victoria, BC – 3rd Place
The Italian-Style Division Finals Winners were:
Umberto Fornito, Italy – 1st Place
Saverio Ciampi, Italy – 2nd Place
Alessandra DeBellis, Italy – 3rd Place
Finalists from each division competed in a blind-box challenge in the Pizza Maker of the Year Bake-Off. The competition’s mystery ingredient, Cattlemen’s Carolina Tangy Gold Barbeque Sauce, proved to be a challenge for the four finalists, who presented the judges with unique pizzas created from a table of provided ingredients. Shawn Randazzo of Cloverleaf Pizza of St. Clair in St. Clair Shores, Michigan, walked away with the title of World Champion Pizza Maker and a cash prize. The International Pizza Challenge also pitted four former winners –– all industry experts in their own right. Tony Gemignani of San Francisco-based Tony’s Pizza Napoletana was named the “Best of the Best” Master Pizza Maker of the Year.
The popular World Pizza Games trials culminated at an event on Wednesday, March 13. Winners were:
1st Division Freestyle Acrobatics: Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan
Masters Division Freestyle Acrobatics: Jay Schuurman, Pizza Rock, Sacramento, CA
Fastest Dough Stretch: Ingrosso Simone, Pizzeria Del Mille, Italy
Fastest Box Folding: Jimmy Xang, Pizza Guys, Rancho Cordova, CA
Largest Dough Stretch: Mario Sigmorile, Pizzeria Del Centro, Italy
Longest Spin: Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan
Throughout the three-day event, show attendees visited sponsoring booths and turned in gamepieces for the $20,000 MEGA BUCKS Giveaway. Frank Sastano of Tulsa, Oklahoma-based Savastano’s Pizzeria took home the cash prize.
“This year’s Pizza Expo was the biggest and best show ever, breaking records for attendance with 6,901 pizza professionals, 940 booths and tons of excitement,” says Oakley. “Words just don’t do it justice; you really have to experience Pizza Expo to understand the interaction that takes place between our attendees and exhibitors. Everyone is truly anxious and motivated to get into discussions about new products, new technology, the latest industry trends and hot-button issues facing the industry today.”
More Articles
Exciting new seminars, workshops and competitions are in store for you at International Pizza Expo 2013, at the Las Vegas Convention Center, March 19-21 in Las Vegas, Nevada.
BREAKING NEWS: Pizza Expo will kick off with a special appearance by Chef Robert Irvine, host of Food Network’s prime-time series Restaurant Impossible.
A Craft Beer powerhouse panel discussion will make its debut at the 2013 Pizza Expo. Want to build a profitable craft beer program? Don’t miss this seminar.
The World Pizza Game return with the addition of a new “triathlon” category, comprised of box folding, dough tossing for a 16-inch screen and dough tossing for a 24-inch screen.
Find out more about the new additions to the 2013 Pizza Expo by clicking here.
To view a full schedule at a glance, click here.
International Pizza Expo® 2013, scheduled for March 19-21 at the Las Vegas Convention Center, is the oldest and largest annual gathering of pizza professionals—and will draw approximately 7,000 attendees and 450 exhibitors to a show floor covering an area equal to 5½ football fields. In its 29th year, Pizza Expo attracts top independent and chain operators to do business in the exhibit hall, attend education sessions and take part in pizza-making competitions.
Related

Pizza Expo® has something for everyone –– whether you’re looking for new ways to create revenue or just want to find out about the latest industry trends and products. The one thing that really separates Pizza Expo from all of the other general foodservice shows is the fact that there’s only one tradeshow where you’ll find over 80 industry specific seminars, workshops and demonstrations, 450 exhibiting companies and 1,000 booths all devoted to pizza … and that’s Pizza Expo. Throw in the best networking event in the industry –– the Beer and Bull Idea Exchange –– along with all of our other great contests and competitions, such as the World Pizza Games, International Pizza Challenge, and the Great $20,000 Mega Bucks Giveaway, and you can see why industry veterans call Pizza Expo the “Show of Shows.”
This year’s Expo shattered all of our previous attendance records with nearly 7,000 attendees and 4,000 exhibitor personnel. And the international presence was astounding, with attendees from Australia, Brazil, Canada, China, Finland, Germany, Italy, Japan, Mexico, Mongolia, Norway and Spain –– just to name a few –– making it a truly worldly experience for everyone! Pizza is indeed a universal food, and there was plenty of it to be found on our show floor that measured over 5½ football fields.
If you didn’t get the chance to attend this year’s show, you still have the opportunity to listen and learn by ordering recordings of some or all of the 50-plus educational sessions that were offered. You can order a Multimedia DVD-ROM or download directly to your iPod by going to the InteliQuest Media website at www. intelliquestmedia.com. It’s also a good way to revisit a seminar to hear what you missed or listen to one you couldn’t attend –– and we know there were several you probably wish you could have made it to during the show.
In addition, I want to thank everyone who attended this year’s Expo. Without the continued support of pizzeria operators, suppliers, manufacturers and industry experts, we could not have achieved the measure of success that makes International Pizza Expo the must- attend event of the year.
It’s never too early to start making plans for next year’s show, slated for March 19 – 21, 2013, at the Las Vegas Convention Center, so save the date! We’re already making plans for next year’s Expo, and we think you’ll be pleased with the changes we’re making. If you have any ideas or suggestions on how we can improve the show, please give me a call at (800) 489-8324 or drop me a note at BOakley@PizzaToday.com.
Last but not least, please remember International Pizza Expo is a tax- deductible working vacation.
It’s all Pizza and it’s all for YOU!
Sincerely,
Bill Oakley
Executive Vice President
More Articles
If you were in Las Vegas, then you know that International Pizza Expo® was the THE place to be. You could feel the energy and pizza enthusiasm from the moment you walked into the Las Vegas Convention Center.
There was something for everyone at International Pizza Expo® 2012, whether you’re a veteran or just opening your first store. When the show closed on Thursday afternoon, nearly 7,000 buyers had visited more than 930 exhibits and attended more than 80 educational sessions. Rounding out the experience were numerous culinary competitions, contests, demonstrations and other special events.
The Traditional Division of the International Pizza Challenge™ had the following regional winners and wild cards that advanced to the finals:
Real Varela, Brooklyn Pizza & Pasta, Los Angeles, CA - Southwest Region
Tim Silva, Nima’s Pizza My Heart, Los Gatos, CA - Northwest Region
Mark Briand, Bondi’s Pizza, London, Ontario - Mid-America Region
Frank Baird, Franco’s Pizza Plus, Chardon, OH - Wild Card
Giovanni Gagliardi, Pizzeria La Leggenda, San Felice, Italy - International Region
Marlene Smith, Pizza Palace Plus, Emporium, PA - Northeast Region
Keith Coffman, Lost River Pizza Co., Bowling Green, KY, - Southeast Region
The Non-Traditional Division of the International Pizza Challenge™ had the following regional winners and wild cards that advanced to the finals:
Joleen Pisner, AJ Barile’s Chicago Pizza, Yucaipa, CA - Southwest Region
John Cammack, Lefty’s Grill, Nevada City, CA - Northwest Region
Rick Mines, Nima’s Pizza & More, Gassville, AR - Southeast Region
John Gutekanst, Avalanche Pizza, Athens, OH - Mid-America Region
Andrew Scudera, Goodfella’s Brick Oven Pizza, Staten Island, NY -
Northeast Region
Tsutomu Inayoshi, Japanese Home Delivered Pizza, Aichi, Japan -
International Region
Alexandre Brunet, Pizza Stromboli, Montreal, Quebec - Wild Card
Tim Silva, won the Traditional Division and $7,500, Andrew Scudera, won Non-Traditional Division and $7,500, Shawn Randazzo, Cloverleaf Pizza, St. Clair, MI, won the American-Pan Division, and Umberto Fornito won the Italian-Style Division and $4,000.
Following the International Pizza Challenge finals, the winners in each division squared off in the Pizza Maker of the Year competition. Contestants were presented with a table of ingredients from which to choose. There were no restrictions for toppings, but all contestants had to use the secret ingredient – Cattlemen’s® Carolina Tangy Gold™ Barbeque Sauce. Shawn Randazzo walked away with the title of World Champion Pizza Maker of the Year and an additional $5,000. We also introduced a new competition this year called the Best of the Best, where four past World Champions squared off to see who would be named the Master Pizza Maker of the Year. The inaugural winner was Tony Gemignani, of Tony’s Pizza Napoletana in San Francisco, California, who walked away with $2,500.
The Winners in the World Pizza Games® were as follows:
Freestyle Acrobatics –– Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan,
Masters Division Freestyle Acrobatics –– Jay Schuurman, Pizza Rock, Sacramento, CA
Fastest Dough Stretch –– Ingrosso Simone, Pizzeria Del Mille, Italy
Fastest Box Folding –– Jimmy Xang, Pizza Guys, Rancho Cordova, CA
Largest Dough Stretch –– Mario Sigmorile, Pizzeria Del Centro, Italy
Longest Spin –– Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan
Start making plans now to attend International Pizza Expo® 2013, which will again be held at the Las Vegas Convention Center March 19 – 21.
Sincerely,
Bill Oakley
More Articles

If you’re a student of the pizza industry, chances are you’ve probably heard of a little show called International Pizza Expo. If you were one of the nearly 7,000 people who attended, you experienced first-hand the knowledge, expertise and excitement the annual show brought to the Las Vegas Convention Center last March.
“This year we had attendees from all 50 states, Puerto Rico, Canada and 23 other countries,” says Bill Oakley, executive vice president of Macfadden Protech, parent company of International Pizza Expo. “We even had a group from the largest pizza company in Mongolia, Mr. Pizza, make the long trip to Las Vegas to experience everything Pizza Expo has to offer. As a result of their experience, they’ve already implemented some of the ideas they picked up at Expo.” Show organizers say that 25 percent of show-goers were first-time attendees, and the show designated a day devoted entirely to those looking to start pizzerias. “Based on the comments to date, it was a huge success with 684 attendees taking part in this day-long educational program,” Oakley says. “This stimulating day of educational sessions and workshops was followed by a reception where attendees could network with fellow ‘newbies,’ industry experts and event sponsors.” Keynote speakers for the three-day show included Nick Sarillo, owner of Nick’s Pizza & Pub in Illinois, and Marla Topliff, president of Rosati’s Pizza. Bruce Allar, vice president of meetings and conferences for Macfadden Protech, says the 2012 line-up of Pizza Expo speakers placed more emphasis on successful pizzeria owners, making International Pizza Expo a true peer-to-peer experience. “The buzz of activity never abated among buyers and sellers on the show floor, or among pizza professionals networking and learning at other Expo gatherings,” says Allar. “Pizza Expo maintained a powerful momentum from the opening bell on Tuesday morning all the way to its conclusion on Thursday afternoon.”
Contestants vied for supremacy in the International Pizza Challenge, a series of culinary competitions designed to highlight the best of the best.
In the traditional division, regional prelimary winners included:
Reál Varela, Brooklyn Pizza & Pasta, Los Angeles, CA – Southwest Region
Tim Silva, Pizza My Heart, Los Gatos, CA – Northwest Region
Mark Briand, Bondi’s Pizza, London, Ont. – Mid-America Region
Giovanni Gagliardi, Pizzeria La Leggenda, San Felice, Italy – International Region
Marlene Smith, Pizza Palace Plus, Emporium, PA – Northeast Region
Keith Coffman, Lost River Pizza Co., Bowling Green, KY – Southeast Region
Frank Baird, Franco’s Pizza, Chardon, OH – Wild Card
Silva took home the title of World’s Best Traditional Pizza Winner.
In the Non-Traditional Division, preliminary winners were:
Joleen Pisner, AJ Barile’s Chicago Pizza, Yucaipa, CA – Southwest Region
John Cammack, Lefty’s Grill, Nevada City, CA – Northwest Region
Rick Mines, Nima’s Pizza & More, Gassville, AR – Southeast Region
John Gutekanst, Avalanche Pizza, Athens, OH – Mid-America Region
Andrew Scudera, Goodfella’s Brick Oven Pizza, Staten Island, NY – Northeast Region
Tsutomu Inayoshi, Home Delivered Pizza, Aichi, Japan – International Region
Scudera took home the title of World’s Best Non-Traditional Pizza.
In the new American-Pan division, finalists included:
Shawn Randazzo, Cloverleaf Pizza of St. Clair, St. Clair Shores, MI – 1st Place
Matthew Heard, Humble Pie, Edmond, OK – 2nd Place
Alex Abellan, Pizza Zone, Victoria, BC – 3rd Place
The Italian-Style Division Finals Winners were:
Umberto Fornito, Italy – 1st Place
Saverio Ciampi, Italy – 2nd Place
Alessandra DeBellis, Italy – 3rd Place
Finalists from each division competed in a blind-box challenge in the Pizza Maker of the Year Bake-Off. The competition’s mystery ingredient, Cattlemen’s Carolina Tangy Gold Barbeque Sauce, proved to be a challenge for the four finalists, who presented the judges with unique pizzas created from a table of provided ingredients. Shawn Randazzo of Cloverleaf Pizza of St. Clair in St. Clair Shores, Michigan, walked away with the title of World Champion Pizza Maker and a cash prize. The International Pizza Challenge also pitted four former winners –– all industry experts in their own right. Tony Gemignani of San Francisco-based Tony’s Pizza Napoletana was named the “Best of the Best” Master Pizza Maker of the Year.
The popular World Pizza Games trials culminated at an event on Wednesday, March 13. Winners were:
1st Division Freestyle Acrobatics: Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan
Masters Division Freestyle Acrobatics: Jay Schuurman, Pizza Rock, Sacramento, CA
Fastest Dough Stretch: Ingrosso Simone, Pizzeria Del Mille, Italy
Fastest Box Folding: Jimmy Xang, Pizza Guys, Rancho Cordova, CA
Largest Dough Stretch: Mario Sigmorile, Pizzeria Del Centro, Italy
Longest Spin: Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan
Throughout the three-day event, show attendees visited sponsoring booths and turned in gamepieces for the $20,000 MEGA BUCKS Giveaway. Frank Sastano of Tulsa, Oklahoma-based Savastano’s Pizzeria took home the cash prize.
“This year’s Pizza Expo was the biggest and best show ever, breaking records for attendance with 6,901 pizza professionals, 940 booths and tons of excitement,” says Oakley. “Words just don’t do it justice; you really have to experience Pizza Expo to understand the interaction that takes place between our attendees and exhibitors. Everyone is truly anxious and motivated to get into discussions about new products, new technology, the latest industry trends and hot-button issues facing the industry today.”

Photos by Josh Keown
When Scott Gittrich founded Toppers Pizza in Champaign, Illinois, in 1991, he didn’t look for prime locations for his shop. After all, in the early 1990’s, 95 percent of his stores’ sales were delivery. But as his pizzerias became more popular and expanded into several states, he started rethinking how Toppers interacted with its customers.
“Back in the ‘80’s, we used to open locations in sort of hole-in-the-wall places,” Gittrich explains. “But as we’ve become more successful, we’ve decided to open Toppers in more prominent locations.” This geographical change also meant changes for his customer interactions. Rather than being 95 percent delivery, Toppers now attributes 30 percent of its sales to carryout. And a big part of a customer’s in-store experience is spent at the counter.
The counter is the “point-of-purchase” spot, usually shortened to POP. And if all you’re using your POP counter for is your register, you’re missing out on a powerful way to increase your bottom line and better connect with your customers.
If you’re already making a pizza sale, is adding on a few cents here and there at the checkout really that big of a deal? Gittrich says it can be. He recently relocated one of his stores only six blocks from where the old store sat. But that short move took it from an area with almost no pedestrian traffic to a spot that had a lot of people walk by. “That store saw an 18 to 20 percent sales increase that can be attributed directly to the move,” he says. “The sales boost has all been at the counter.”
The natural inclination for store owners is to place only high-margin “impulse purchase” items at the POP counter. But this isn’t always the most effective use of this prime store space. In fact, Gittrich says he doesn’t really worry about the profi t margin of the items at Toppers’ POP counters, because “it’s all gravy,” he says.
“We have priced our pizzas so if they’re there to buy a pizza, we’re already making a profit,” he says. “So even if they just buy a few sodas, which aren’t a high-margin item, that’s still basically pure profit for me.”
Even though you shouldn’t necessarily worry about the margins on every item at your POP counter, do try to limit your space for things that either make money directly or boost your brand presence. If possible, leave the pick-up items like napkins, pepper packets and utensils in a sidebar area.
Izzy Ginzberg, CEO of Monetized Intellect, a business and marketing strategy firm, says he advises clients to run a few retail experiments to make sure they’re matching their POP items with what their customer base wants. He recommends choosing an assortment of items items. Then watch. “For one week, keep track of what sells in the space each hour. You may find in the mornings you should have high-volume items, then during the afternoons, you should switch to some high-margin items.”
Ginzberg recommends having someone –– it could be just a trusted friend or an employee –– sit in the store and monitor your clientele and what they buy. It may be time-consuming, but it will give you a better idea of your clientele and what they buy. “You may discover the three corporate clients who order by phone are the only ones who buy soda,” he says. “Then you know you can move those to a fridge in the back and use that space in front more effectively.”
It makes business sense to have those impulse purchase items like sodas, brownies and mints at your POP counter. But you should also consider using the space for promotional items. Gittrich places material at the register that informs customers about specials with Toppers’ add-ons. After all, you can’t really stick piles of bread sticks or hot wings at the cash register, but you can still sell them at the POP counter.
“We train our people to suggest the add-ons and point to the promotional material there at the counter,” Gittrich says. He likes to have his items photographed nicely and reproduced well to appeal to hungry buyers picking up pizza. “We even have a contest for team members to encourage them to sell the add-ons,” he says. “We’re doing a lot of business that way at the POS counter.”
And don’t be afraid to get creative and leverage local or regional popularity. Consider creating new trademark items for the counter. If you have a popular brand, try creating t-shirts or bumper stickers. Or begin selling jars of your pizza or spaghetti sauce. “You might just fi nd that ‘our exclusive pizza sauce’ sold by-the bottle for $10 a jar translates into an extra $2,000 a month in profit,” Ginzberg says. And in doing this, you’re not just building your bank account — you’re building your brand, and business, as well.

Creative ways to use your POP space
There’s nothing wrong with offering sodas, candy or plastic-wrapped baked goods at your counter. But that isn’t the only way to make a few extra bucks in that space. Here are a few creative ways to use your point-of-purchase area:
❖ If you have a popular local brand, consider selling t-shirts with your logo and/or slogan prominently displayed. Don’t go too cheap creating them, though — stylish and witty are always plusses.
❖ You can also sell bumper stickers, or even give them away with orders at a certain price point. They’re cheap to create, are free advertising, and build brand loyalty.
❖ Do people die for your spaghetti sauce or breadstick dip? Don’t just sell them in those tiny packets. Offer them by-the-jar at your counter.
❖ Create a “pizza club” — have people sign up and give you demographic information, then reward them with email coupons throughout the year. Consider offering a drawing for a free specialty pizza among club members each month.
Alyson McNutt English is an award-winning freelance writer specializing in home, health, family, and green topics. She is based in Huntsville, Alabama.
Submit your questions via e-mail to Jeremy White (jwhite@pizzatoday.com) — make sure to put “Ask Big Dave” in the subject line.
We’ll pass the best questions on to Dave each month for his highly sought-after advice.
Dave, I just opened my first pizzeria a couple of months ago. Labor has consistently been running
between 20-22 percent. At times, I feel short-staffed, but I really can’t afford to hire new help right now until I get sales higher. Do you have any suggestions for me? Is my labor where it should be?
Dave Perez
Davie P’s Pizza
Florida
The industry average pushes 30 percent of gross sales. If you are computing wages, salaries and benefits correctly, you are running a phenomenal operation. Since new operations generally are not well-oiled machines, they will often run labor in the high 30s. By the way, to clear up a common misconception, labor cost is not what the computer says in its on-the-fly report. Most POS systems are fantastic time clocks that can keep a running total of clocked-in employees to the minute. Divide that amount into the sales (less sales tax) and you get a labor report.
Most accountants worth their fees will describe labor costs as the sum of:
1. Hourly wages
2. Salaried managers
3. Workers’ comp insurance premiums
4. Unemployment contributions
5. Medicare and Social Security matching fees
6. Any paid vacation or medical insurance charges
7. Bonuses
8. Basically, any cost associated with providing a job for someone
You are to be congratulated on your 20 to 22 percent labor. Please ask your financial person to compute in accordance with Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) and get back to me. I believe you are working your guts out with a fair amount of in-training crew.
If you feel like your customers aren’t receiving extraordinary guest service at every step of the hospitality process, you are doomed.
My drivers are complaining about doing extra work during non-peak times, such as cleaning and answering phones. But I don’t have enough delivery orders for them to do nothing but deliver. What should I cross-train them to do?
Kyle Vanser
A&K’s Pizza Pub
Houston, TX
Your problem started at the time of hire. As the owner, you have failed to make job descriptions crystal clear. I developed an employee handbook as well as a power point presentation that new hires had to watch. Afterwards, they were tested to make sure they understood the material.
I’ll assume that you accidently hired a couple of ‘prima donnas’ and they are resisting doing the dirty work. If you think you can turn them around, take them back to square one. If you know they are not going to adapt, help them with a career change. And get to work on that employee handbook! u
Big Dave Ostrander owned a highly successful independent pizzeria before becoming a consultant, speaker and internationally sought-after trainer. He is a monthly contributor to Pizza Today.
Photos by Josh Keown
Did you know that a 14-inch pizza actually has nearly twice the surface area of a 10-inch pizza? It’s true, and all it takes to show customers that fact is a little simple math. Let’s turn back the clock to your school days, where we’re sure you learned in math class that “pie” equals 3.14.
To determine the area of a pizza, you take pie (3.14) and multiply it by the radius (which is half of the diameter) squared.
What?
It’s easier than we just made it sound:
The radius of a 10-inch pizza is five (remember, radius is half the diameter). Five squared is 25. Twenty-five multiplied by 3.14 is 78.5. So the area of a 10-inch pizza is 78.5 square inches.
By contrast, the area of a 14-inch pizza is 154 square inches.
Since your 14-inch pizza is practically double the size of your 10-inch pizza, you’re presumably using twice the sauce, twice the cheese, twice the pepperoni, etc. to make your 14-inch pizza. But are you charging double? Probably not.
Let’s look at another popular size, the 16-inch. It is 201 square inches — approximately 31 percent larger than a 14-inch. Does this mean your 16-inch pizza should be priced 31 percent higher than your 14-inch pizza? Probably so. If a 14-inch cheese pizza is priced at $8.99, for example, then a 16-inch should be priced at $11.75.
Unfortunately, some customers aren’t willing to pay $11.75 for a cheese pizza when they can get one loaded with toppings from a major chain for under $10. That’s okay — you don’t want those customers to start with!
Ultimately, the best method for
determining the final price of your
pizza would be to figure your food costs, then find an acceptable markup from there. You likely won’t make as much per pie on your larger pizzas, but you won’t alienate your customers, either.
Finally, if you are resigning yourself to making more profit on a small pizza than a large, there’s no need to fret. Push your smaller pies as part of a bundle that includes appetizers, dessert, drinks, etc. That will allow you to increase ticket averages while increasing sales of the more profitable pizzas.
Photos by Rick Daugherty
Editor’s Note: This is the second installment of a two-part series on tip reporting. Part I was published in our March issue.
Your employees are required by law to report 100 percent of their tips. As the employer, it is your responsibility to make sure employee tips are accurately reported. To assist with this, there are several tip reporting agreements designed by the IRS to encourage employer diligence.
The Tip Rate Determination Agreement (TRDA) requires at least 75 percent of employees to sign a Tipped Employee Participation Agreement (TEPA) and report tips received at or above the rate determined by the IRS and the restaurant. The Tip Reporting Alternative Commitment (TRAC) is where an employer agrees to establish and maintain a quarterly education program for all directly and indirectly tipped employees as well as formal tip reporting procedures as outlined by the IRS. Employers assume responsibility for tip reporting, and the IRS doesn’t assess the business employment taxes on unreported tips unless the employees are audited first. There’s also the Employer-Designed Tip Reporting Alternative Commitment (EmTRAC), available only to businesses where employees receive both cash and credit tips. The newest effort by the IRS to simplify tip reporting is the voluntary Attributed Tip Income Program (ATIP). Eligibility requires that at least 20 percent of gross receipts be charged receipts with credit tips, and at least 75 percent of tipped employees must sign employee participation agreements. ATIP provides a formula for employers to determine tip rates. The IRS will not initiate tip examinations if ATIP requirements are met satisfactorily.
Employers who operate large food or beverage establishments (food or beverage is provided for consumption on the premises, tipping is a customary practice and more than 10 employees who work more than 80 hours were normally employed on a typical business day during the previous calendar year) must also annually file Form 8027, Employer’s Annual Information Return of Tip Income and Allocated Tips to report employee tips. (See IRS.gov for forms and more info; The National Restaurant Association also provides information on income laws, see www.restaurant.org).
None of this sits particularly well with pizzeria owners, and the information overload and complexity of the issue is dizzying. Melissa Klein, operations manager and finance director at Stone Hearth Pizza (which has three locations in Belmont, Cambridge and Needham, Massachusetts), says pizzerias are especially vulnerable to negligible tip reporting by young employees who don’t understand either the actual legalities regarding tip reporting or the serious consequences associated with taking them for granted.
“Tip reporting is one of those areas where people like to interpret the law to their own benefit, which, quite frankly, when you’re dealing with the government, you can’t do that,” says Klein. “You don’t want to do that. When you’re a young server — a lot of kids in college will become a server and they don’t fully grasp the implications of tip reporting — it’s so tempting for them (to under-report) … Say, at the end of a typical night, they make $125. (It’s tempting when) they do their cash out (to say) … no one really knows I made $125 — let me just put in $75!”
Klein counters potential confusion by making education a priority from the moment a server is hired. “From the first day of training, they are explained how it works, and that is that you declare 100 percent of your tips,” says Klein.
She also explains to employees that it’s beneficial to them to correctly report their income, because not doing so can be detrimental when seeking a loan or other income-based agreement.
As the IRS continues to interpret and develop tip-reporting regulations, experts advise showing a resolute effort and respect for the law. “What I can suggest and what I always focus on, is creating a procedure and audit trail that shows that you understand the legal requirements and have taken all available steps to ensure compliance,” says James Sinclair of OnSite Consulting. “While good faith might not be good enough, it certainly does not hurt and also ensures without question that you cannot be accused of letting compliance be ignored or fueling any violations.”
When in doubt, pizzeria owners are making concerted attempts to show compliance. “We make sure that, in the aggregate, employees report their tips in an amount that is consistent with the tipping percentage that customers tip on their credit card charges,” says Peter Cooperstein, president of Amici’s East Coast Pizzeria in San Mateo, California. “Now that almost all of our sales are by credit cards, life has become much simpler — both for us and for the IRS. There is no way for us to assure that our servers declare every dollar; however, if we were audited, the IRS would certainly see that we are making a serious effort.”
The best way to avoid an audit is to make sure your operation has an accurate system of checks and balances for tip reporting in place, and continuously educate yourself and staff about income laws. Tip reporting should be a priority, not an afterthought. “If this topic is just one of the million things on a pizzeria manager’s list, it’s a sure thing the ball will get dropped,” says Dan Simons, principal at Vucurevich Simons Advisory Group, a restaurant consulting agency. “This is one fumble, that if picked up by the IRS, either on audit or due to a complaint from a disgruntled employee, can be devastating to a business. While it may seem tedious to stay up to speed with all voluntary compliance guidelines, the alternative is far worse than tedious.”
Lee Erica Elder is a freelance writer in NYC.
Keeping Your Dream Alive
ESOPs five Employees a stake in success

BY DIANNE MOLVIG
PHOTOS BY JOSH KEOWN
In the midst of the bustle of running your restaurant, perhaps you sometimes pause to remember when you first opened your doors. Do you think about that future day when you’ll make your exit?
Barbara Gabel and Zach Zachowski, who are self-described “think-ahead types,” began to consider their exit strategy when they reached their early 50s. The husband-wife team had no family member to take over Zachary’s Chicago Pizza in Oakland, California, and they balked at the notion of selling to just anybody.
Would a new owner maintain the product quality and workplace environment that had made the restaurant a Bay Area icon, as some observers have described it? What would happen to employees, many of whom had worked at Zachary’s for a decade or two?
“Even a benevolent owner could come in and change the dynamics, the mojo, the benefits, the pay,” Gabel says. “We didn’t want that.”
The solution the couple struck on was an employee stock ownership plan (ESOP), established at Zachary’s in 2003.
Currently there are about 11,500 ESOPs in the United States, covering 10 percent of the private-sector workforce, according to The ESOP Association in Washington, D.C. “An ESOP is similar to a profit-sharing or 401(k) plan in many ways,” explains Corey Rosen, executive director of the National Center for Employee Ownership in Oakland, California. “But unlike those plans, an ESOP is designed to invest in company stock.”
The company puts money into the ESOP and gets a tax deduction for doing so. The ESOP uses that money to buy company shares from the owners; employees don’t pay for shares out of their own pockets. That’s a tough concept for people to comprehend, Rosen acknowledges, but it’s critical to an ESOP’s essence.
“If employees had to buy stock with their own money, it would never happen,” he says. “An ESOP is a way for the company’s tax-deductible future earnings to purchase shares from the existing owner.”
To be a viable candidate for an ESOP, a company should be profitable and have a healthy cash flow. Depending on company size, it costs at least $40,000 to create an ESOP, plus $12,000 or more for annual maintenance fees, Rosen says. A restaurant should have at least 20 employees and sales of $1 million or more for an ESOP to make sense, he adds.
ESOPs are complex, and, because these are tax-deferred employee retirement plans, they’re subject to Internal Revenue Service and Department of Labor rules. For instance, all employees age 21 or older who work at least 1,000 hours a year must be allowed to participate.
To install an ESOP, a company must be either an S or C corporation, or convert to one. In a C corporation, an ESOP allows the owner to defer capital gains taxes on the sale proceeds by reinvesting that money in other securities. The ESOP must own at least 30 percent of the stock for this deferral to kick in.
An S corporation with an ESOP offers a different tax advantage, according to Jude Anne Carluccio, chair of the ESOP practice group at Barnes & Thornburg LLP, a Minneapolis law firm.
“In an S corporation, which a lot of small businesses are, the ESOP is considered a tax-exempt shareholder,” she explains. “So cash that otherwise would go to pay taxes at the shareholder level is instead used to help fund the ESOP’s stock purchase. Or, if the S corporation is owned 100 percent by the ESOP, (it is) kept in the company to fund company growth initiatives.”
Still, with all the tax advantages, another factor often poses the strongest appeal to owners. “Most small business owners I’ve worked with want to keep their dream going,” Carluccio says. “That’s one of the big pluses of the ESOP as a transition vehicle. It allows owners to perpetuate the dream they’ve actualized.”
In 2000, Johnny Huntsman set up an ESOP at Johnny’s Pizza House, headquartered in West Monroe, Louisiana. The company now has 28 area locations. “He wanted an exit strategy,” says president/CEO Melvin DeLacerda, “and he wanted to reward employees who had helped him build the company. The ESOP accomplished those goals.”
DeLacerda, who started at Johnny’s 30 years ago when he was a high school student working part time, believes the ESOP is a valuable retention tool. “Our turnover for managers, and even assistant managers, is extremely low,” he says. “A lot of things enter into that, but the ESOP plays a big part.”
Still, employees often are skeptical when they first hear about the ESOP, DeLacerda admits. They can’t believe it costs them nothing, and they don’t fully comprehend the benefit until they see it. “We have store managers and even delivery drivers who have account balances that amaze them,” he says. “They never could have saved that much on their own.”
Today the ESOP owns 62 percent of the company’s stock, while Huntsman retains 19 percent. Two other individuals hold the remainder. “Johnny is tickled to death about how well this has worked,” DeLacerda says. “We now have an ownership culture among our employees. Even though we had a good culture to begin with, the ESOP has solidified it.”
At Zachary’s Chicago Pizza, which now has three locations, the ESOP owns 100 percent of the company. Gabel and Zachowski turned over the last 25 percent to the employees on July 25, 2010, the company’s 27th anniversary. “As Zach put it, ‘It’s their turn now,’” Gabel says. “This was a good way for us to go out.”
It’s also a good deal for employees. Kevin Suto started out at Zachary’s in 1984 as a dishwasher and rose to the position of general manager. “I’ve done pretty much every job there is here,” he says. Last summer, Suto became the new CEO and chief financial officer. Now 44, he looks forward to the ESOP providing him an attractive retirement payout.
That’s if, of course, the business continues to succeed. “Your stock is only as valuable as the company is,” Suto says. “So there’s a motivation for all of us to leave the company even stronger than it was when we arrived.”
Dianne Molvig is a freelance writer in Wisconsin.

Photos by Josh Keown
Soda is a serious moneymaker, especially in the pizza world. And fountain sodas, especially, can help keep your business in the black, namely because you don’t have to pay the extra for cans and bottles. Like many owners, Nick Merlino of Goomba’s Pizza in Colmar, Pennsylvania, started out with bottles. “We mostly do take-out and delivery,” Merlino says. “Bottles we don’t have to store cold, we don’t have to worry about ice, it’s pretty much ‘take your bottle and go.’”
However, the company is opening a second store and for that, they’re likely to go the fountain route. “It’s more of a sit-down place,” Merlino says. “So we’ll want to give people that option. They’ve come to expect it.”
This sentiment is true of many pizza places –– both new and growing. They’re finding that fountain sodas are almost a must-have. But what’s the best way to do it? A self-service machine in the dining room? An over-the-counter offering? A little of both? The answer depends on a number of factors, including space, customer expectations and staffing.
First, let’s take a look at the units. Soda fountains come in two styles: behind-the-counter (for use by staff only) and self-service (for both staff and customers). There are many differences between the two, but one of the most important components is the ice-delivery system. Due to the increased health risk of scooping ice (not just with possibly dirty hands, but also with potential for spillage), soda machines with ice bins below the unit typically must be used only by staff members. Self-service units, on the other hand, have ice situated on the top of the machine, either via an automatic ice-maker or a manually filled ice bin.
“Thus, behind-the-counter units tend to be less expensive, because they have less moving parts,” says Mike Cominski, manager of Soda Dispenser Depot. “On the other hand, they also don’t have the glamour and merchandising that a huge unit sitting in the dining room does.”
This brings up another important consideration: how much space will the machine take up relative to the space you have? Behind-the-counter units are smaller, but typically so is the space behind the counter. “For us, the most cramped area is around our counters,” says Matt Galvin, owner of Pagliacci Pizza in Seattle, Washington. “Plus, all the fluid –– liquid, ice, water –– is intermingling in the area where you’re dealing with receipts and customer tickets. It makes sense for us to keep our soda machines away from all of that.”
Beyond the machines themselves, there are additional things to consider. Ice usage, for example, is a biggie for many restaurants. By offering behind-the-counter drinks, staff members control the ice, which is typically cheaper than soda. Self-service customers, on the other hand, are more likely to fill their glass with more soda and less ice.
There is also typically more waste with self-service machines. Customers use extra napkins when they spill, they take too many straws, and they’re more likely to grab one soda, and then dump it out when they realize they wanted something else.
For Kelly Willey, owner of Ramunto’s Brick Oven Pizza in Claremont, New Hampshire, it makes financial and time sense to have someone else take care of the cleaning basics. “We have just one soda fountain in the dining room area, and we have a company that services it regularly,” she says. Bringing someone else in to do the, well, dirty work, does mean an increased cost — but it also means that you’re putting the job in the hands of someone who probably knows the ins and outs of the
machine better than your staff does — and, operationally speaking, that’s never a bad thing.

Refills are another important consideration. If you do free refills, self-service might be a better choice –– the money you’re losing on the extra soda is fairly small in contrast to what it costs to hire someone to refill drinks. This is also true if you charge a small amount for a refill; does the money you’re making offset the cost of hiring someone to do the work of refilling the glass and taking the customer’s money?
“If you’re charging for refills, then self-service becomes a drain,” says Galvin. “When it’s busy and someone just wants a refill and there’s a line of eight people, it can be frustration for everyone. We’ve also gone away from the refill charge because it felt like we were nickel and diming our customers.”
Free refills also add the value perception of getting something for nothing; this can often make or break a customer’s experience. On the other hand, some customers dine out specifically to be served, and the idea of having to pour their own soda does not fit into their expected experience.
Whether you go behind-the-counter or self-service, soda fountains can be a boon for your business. No need to throw your coins in and wish for better sales — the coins will be coming to you instead.
Safety First It’s not hard to keep soda fountains looking and behaving their best, but it does take a bit of upkeep from both owners and staff to maintain cleanliness and safety over the long haul.
First and foremost, obey all the health code regulations for your area. Know them in and out, and make sure your staff does, too. The two most important places to clean are the nozzles and syrup box connections. Nozzles should be removed and soaked in a mild soap solution every night.
“Many restaurants have two sets of nozzles,” says Mike Cominski, manager of Soda Dispenser Depot. “This way they can have one soaking at all times and one in use. This kills off any bacteria that would accumulate on the nozzles and will make your health inspector very happy.”
Secondly, store your syrup properly. Make sure your syrup is kept at the temperature that’s recommended by the seller or manufacturer, and double-check the expiration dates regularly.
Finally, make sure the floors around your machines have the proper coverage and that your staff knows to clean up any spills as quickly as possible to keep accidents to a minimum.
Shanna Germain is a freelance writer based in Portland, Oregon. She loves to write about both food and drink, and she contributes to a variety of publications.
METRO PIZZA // LAS VEGAS, NV
In 1970, Pogo, a famous and beloved cartoon character, uttered the phrase, “We have met the enemy, and he is us.” While the reference was made with regards to man’s negative impact on the environment, those words certainly
apply to today’s pizza industry as well.
In my conversations with pizzeria
operators around the country, I am always asked the same question: “How much do you charge for a pie?” Invariably, my answer is this: “As much as I need to.” That typically invokes a follow-up question regarding the competition. To that, I quote a statement from the menu of renowned pizzaiolo Anthony Mangieri: “ I have no quarrel with the man who charges less for his pizza … he knows what his is worth.” I believe that one of the greatest challenges for independent pizzeria operators is hidden in that statement. We all must know what our product is worth.
All too often, our primary marketing tools involve some sort of giant discount. Even the most experienced operators forget the most basic rule: Low price alone is not an indication of value. In truth, value is a ratio of price to quality. You can have the lowest prices in town and still be a lousy deal. More importantly for independent operators, you can have higher prices and still be the best value — if you offer the very best food and service.
One thing is certain, however: you cannot be the best and the cheapest if you intend to stay in business. Over the last several years, the major chains have done our industry a huge disservice. They have turned an artisan product into a commodity. The $5 large pizza creates the illusion that all pizzas are created equal. Furthermore, it sets the bar so low that it becomes impossible for any of us to earn a fair profit for our work.
The large chains have staked out the low end for themselves. Fine. I say, “Let them have it.”
It is time for pizza makers to understand that what we do has real value. As independent operators, we must resist turning towards the discount game as an easy fix for sales challenges. Every time a piece of advertising goes out that stresses low-priced pizzas, we diminish the value of what we do.
Engaging in a price war is a fatal exercise. Your rivals buy ingredients by the trainload. They function with a core of low-paid employees. They make the best real estate deals for prime locations and they have collective advertising power that can’t be matched.
So, how do we compete? Ironically, Sam Walton, the biggest of all big boys, provided an answer when asked what he would do if he were a small
retailer and Wal-Mart came to town. His answer: Specialize and concentrate on giving a level of quality and service that the big chains can’t match.
As independent operators, it is essential that we dictate the rules of engagement. The best part of this is that once you have made the commitment to compete on quality and service instead of price, your life will become much easier. Every decision that you make will be based on only one question: Will this improve the experience at my pizzeria?
Calculate what it costs you to provide a world-class pizza experience, and then add in a fair profit margin. There’s your price point. From there, let those other guys worry about how they are going to compete against the best pizza experience in town.u
Photos by Josh Keown
Chuck Wilburn was already a veteran Shakey’s Pizza Parlor operator when he watched a new restaurant open across the street from his Redlands, California, store several years ago. The restaurant was good, and the business flourished quickly. But Wilburn wondered how long the good times would last when the owner’s spending habits changed drastically amid that honeymoon period.
“He’s only just opened and he’s already living large,” says Wilburn, who has been in business 25 years. “One day he comes riding in on a new Harley, and then I see him in a leased BMW. The next thing you know, I hear there’s trouble.”
Word on the street revealed the operator wasn’t sending his employee withholdings to the government, plus he was dipping into the business’s surge of cash flow to fund his power toy habit. When suppliers began cutting him off, the restaurant died.
“I’d been in business long enough by that time to know you can’t drain the business of its cash,” Wilburn says. “Heck, I remember the days when I was hoping just to have a really good night so I could cover payroll. You learn to set a lot of money aside and take very little out.”
Tom Kohler, a certified public accountant and owner of Premier Accounting Services in Louisville, Kentucky, says the failed operator’s story is not only too common, his problem likely was tied to a misunderstanding of how best to pay himself. Since most small businesses are structured in such a way that owners don’t receive a salary, many owners mistakenly use the business’s cash flow and profits to pay themselves an owner’s draw without understanding the tax implications.
“The phrase ‘owner’s draw’ sounds simple, but in reality the concept is complex,” says Kohler, who specializes in bookkeeping and tax assistance for restaurant groups. “As the owner, you can draw that money out, but that draw has to be labeled clearly so the IRS can tax it properly. That it’s called the owner’s draw is part of the problem: it’s just too vague.”
Knowing how to classify each draw derives from whether a business is an LLC (which can be taxed either as a partnership or S-Corp), a partnership, an S-Corp or a C-Corp. (For truly detailed advice on business types, seek advice from an attorney, bookkeeper or tax preparer.) That means the owner’s income will be taxed either at a personal tax rate, the business’s tax rate, or as wages if that owner is listed as an employee of the company.
For example, in many S-Corps and LLCs (taxed as S-Corps), draws made on profits are not considered an expense to the company. Such draws are subject to federal and state taxes, though not FICA, Medicare, Medicaid or unemployment.
But in both S-Corps and LLCs (taxed as S-Corps), the owner can simultaneously be an employee and have any draws taxed as wages. Unlike money drawn as an owner, those wages are subject to all federal and state taxes, including FICA, Medicare, Medicaid and unemployment. But those wages also are considered an expense to the company and reconciled differently than draws at the end of the year.
Overall, says Kohler, the tax impact is usually lowest when an owner draws on profits rather than setting himself up to be paid a wage. But how much one draws out can make things tricky.
“Let’s say yours is an S-Corp, and you have $100,000 in your account. You might say, ‘Well, I’ll take it all out as an owner’s draw and avoid paying Social Security and Medicare,’” Kohler began. “Sorry, but no! If you withdraw all your money from an S-Corp as an owner’s draw, the IRS will reclassify all or part of that money as wages, and then you’re taxed differently. That can be a significant amount of money...”
Partnerships, while modestly simpler, are taxed solely on the business’s net income. For
example, if a company’s revenues are $100,000 and its expenses are $20,000, it has a net income of $80,000.
“So even if you draw $50,000 or $70,000, you’re still taxed on $80,000,” Kohler says. “That $80,000 is subject to all taxes except federal and state unemployment; you still pay that 15.2 percent for FICA and Medicare.”
Michael Shepherd founded Michael Angelo’s Pizza as an S-Corp, but later repositioned it as a C-Corp to lower his personal tax burden.
“The difference for me was paying 15 percent tax versus 28 percent tax,” says Shepherd, whose pizzerias are in Kenton and Rushsylvania, Ohio. Based on profits and cash flow throughout the year, Shepherd raises or lowers his draw. “There are times when I choose to pay myself more and be taxed at my pay rate rather than let the company pay a corporate tax rate on that money. You have to watch it closely.”
Watch it closely –– while also looking toward the future, says Robert Langdon, CPA, author of Managing your Business for Profits, and a regular financial speaker at the International Pizza Expo. Too few operators — and especially new ones — take the time to forecast their sales and expenses in order to ensure the business is properly funded.
“Most people, when they start a business, either overestimate sales or underestimate expenses, and sometimes both,” says Langdon. “They’ve got to let the business build up cash before they even think of taking money out of it.”
If a business has operated two or more years, its history will provide a picture of expected expenses. If it is profitable, Langdon says that owner should only then consider drawing some money out of it — and just some, he stresses.
“You don’t want to draw so much out of the business that you have nothing to fall back on when something unexpected happens,” he says. “The goal is to keep cash flow up.”
Steve Coomes is a former Pizza Today editor and freelance writer in Louisville, Kentucky.

Dave, I need to trim costs considerably in just about every facet of my business. Where do I start? I can’t afford to cut quality of my product, I know, but I can’t afford not to make cuts everywhere else.
Peter White
San Diego, California
Peter, I feel your pain. And I’m glad you know right off the top that the one area you can’t touch is your quality. Substitute a lesser quality cheese or meat topping, and you will suffer for it immensely.
I have an outline I call “Death by a Thousand Cuts.” Sometimes, there are areas where the fat needs to be trimmed. But I see plenty of operations get a little too happy with the knife and do permanent damage (or worse).
Run down this checklist and see what improvements can be made off of it before you start slashing everything in the building.
1. Plug all holes in cash handling procedures. Intentional and unintentional cash shortages are avoidable. Institute a zero tolerance on cash shortage policy.
2. Portion control your cheese.
3. Become a menu-engineering
expert. You must know which menu items are producing the most and least profitability. Promote the stars.
4. Know your exact entrée costs.
5. Examine a profit and loss statement (P&L) weekly.
6. Re-price and re-print your menus and flyers at least twice a year. Quarterly is even better.
7. Get an energy audit performed by your utility provider.
8. Shop your insurance policies. You are most likely underinsured. In fact, it’s quite possible that you are one incident away from financial ruin.
9. Set up a forced savings plan. Put what you can each week from checking into savings.
10. Explore catering as an additional revenue source.
11. Get yourself out of the “employee owner” routine and understand your position as CEO of your pizza company. In other words, work on your business, not in it.
12. Think in percentages: food cost; labor cost; prime cost; occupancy cost; income before taxes depreciation and amortization.
13. Develop a marketing strategy and a marketing budget.
14. Decide, right now, once and for all, whether you’re going to be the lowest price guy in your town or the highest priced, highest quality producer in your town. Get off the fence.
15. Try to negotiate a prime vendor agreement with your distributors. In this type of agreement, you are put on a cost-plus pricing model and you get the right to audit prices from time to time. Just make sure you’re purchasing at least 85 percent of your food and supplies — if not a higher percentage — from the supplier with which you are going to enter into this agreement.
16. Lastly, over-train and cross-train your staff in order to maximize their contributions to your company. u
Big Dave Ostrander owned a highly successful independent pizzeria before becoming a consultant, speaker and internationally sought-after trainer. monthlycontributor to Pizza Today.
YOU'VE BEEN WARNED
Get a grip on these trouble spots before they get a grip on you

BY PIZZA TODAY STAFF
PHOTOS BY JOSH KEOWN
Here, we take a brief look at a handful of "tells" that can signal a business is in trouble, then tell you what to do about it.
Warning Sign: Your balance sheet is a wreck
You might have: Too much debt
Your balance sheet, simply put, is a current snapshot of your operation's health. It demonstrates your pizzeria's assets, liabilities and your equity as the owner. If your liabilities — the amount you owe — are too high, you could be in real trouble. Whether it be from tapping out your lines of credit or (gasp!) using credit cards for major purchases, a balance sheet that's out of balance is a disaster in the making.
Start by having an experienced foodservice accountant review your balance sheet. He or she will want to delve much deeper and will analyze your income statements, statement of cash flows, etc. If your debt is too high, you'll need an aggressive plan to pay it down. If adequate cash flow to accomplish this doesn't exist, then it is time to either cut costs or increase sales (or both). Easier said than done, we know. But an operation can't sustain a heavy debt load long-term.
Start with cost-cutting measures such as streamlining staff (cross training is the key here). But do not tamper with your product. (See next warning sign.)
Warning Sign: You are considering switching to a
cheaper cheese/sauce/vegetable/meat, etc.
You might have: To have your head examined!
Seriously, one of the biggest mistakes operators can make is to downgrade the quality of the food. It may make sense in your head: "If I save $XYZ per week on pepperoni, I can get back to break-even." Here's the problem: that subpar pepperoni isn't fit for an animal, let alone human consumption. As soon as your customers taste the difference (and believe us, they will), they'll abandon ship. And you're left with a shop full of bad inventory and no customers to serve.
Your customers don't visit because of your marketing. That got them in the door the first time, but it never brought them back again. They returned because they liked the food/service/price/convenience. Change your product for the worse … stand in the unemployment line. It's that simple.
Warning Sign: Your employees are demoralized
You might have: Poor management
Examine the body language of your employees. Are they exuberant, open and outgoing? Do they smile and laugh at work? Do they serve customers with pep in their step? If not, then management is failing the staff. In turn, the staff is failing the customers. And we all know where this leads.
Employees make or break the energy of an establishment, so it behooves you to keep your staff motivated and happy. When you see signs that your crew isn't happy, address them immediately. Find out what is on their minds and what you can do to make your shop the best place to work. If your staff feels underappreciated, that doesn't mean you have to automatically throw more money at them. Often, the answer is more about leadership and other perks, such as free meals at the end of a shift or learning trips to pizza-centric cities such as New York or Chicago.
A perk for you: employee retention measures can save countless hours and thousands of dollars that many restaurants spend on re-hiring and re-training the same position over and over again.
Darryl Reginelli, co-owner of Reginelli's Pizzeria in New Orleans, Louisiana, says: "the employer is responsible for fostering an environment that gets the new hire connected to the company and turns that employee into a 'keeper.' This is most easily done through clear, honest communication and support. A system of performance reviews that measure all applicable skills and traits should be used. Don't just talk to your employees about their performance. Instead, give them a typed or written review that can be discussed together and kept by them for reference. You'll find that your employees will value their reviews, good and bad, because their superiors took time to think about their future."
Additionally, Reginelli says it is crucial to "build a culture beyond the walls of your restaurant. Everyone wants to be part of something greater. Eventually, the job will become routine. Even your best employees will need a deeper connection to their work. Integrate your business into the community. Donating product, time and staff to local organizations and events benefits everyone involved. It's something your staff will be proud of and it will set your business apart from others."
Warning Sign: Sales are good, but profit is low.
You might have: A problem with employee theft
Sad, but all too true: employee theft happens in this industry more than anyone wants to admit. "Big" Dave
Ostrander says that one of his first assignments when he started consulting was to help turn around a group of pizzerias that were barely keeping afloat. The owners, he says, were in serious trouble.
"They had cashed in all of their CDs, 401ks and charged their credit cards to the max," says Ostrander.
At first glance, the situation had Big Dave puzzled. The group was receiving fair pricing from vendors and had implemented a solid portion control system. A closer look at the financial statements told Ostrander that the company was most likely being plagued by a thief on the inside. To prove his suspicion, Ostrander planted one of his former pizzeria employees on the pizza company's staff.
"He was hired in as a driver/rookie pizza maker," explains Ostrander. His real job "was to determine who was stealing and how much was being skimmed."
As it turns out, one general manager and several drivers were in collusion with one another.
"A year later," says Ostrander, "my client went from losing $40,000 a year to making $75,000. The $2,000-a-week
difference saved the operation."
You don't have to plant a mole to catch a thief. Often, a series of security cameras throughout your business — some of them fake, even — can make a big difference.
Warning Sign: Your food costs are trending higher
You might have: A battle with cheese prices
As of the time of this article, operators were getting a much-needed break in the cheese cost category. In early March, when we sent this issue to press, 40-pound cheddar blocks were trading at $1.46 per pound on the Chicago Mercantile Exchange. Compare this to prices in the $2.15 per pound range in early August.
To seasoned operators, this up and down is nothing new. But to an inexperienced pizzeria owner, cheese price fluctuations can quickly kill the desire to own a restaurant. No one understands this better than Ostrander, who fields calls all year long about cheese prices, cheese usage and portioning cheese.
"Most foodservice distributors set the price of cheese, specifically mozzarella, on a weekly basis," Ostrander explains.
The weekly selling price is typically based on several factors. Ostrander says the five prime considerations are: cost of cheese from the factory, transportation costs from factory to warehouse, administration and selling costs, delivery costs and profit on the account.
It's important to know that, contrary to the belief of many pizzeria owners, distributors don't pave their offices with gold off of cheese sales. In fact, Ostrander says, "they make only pennies per pound in profit."
While that's good to know, it doesn't ease the burden on pizzeria operations. So, what are you to do? Ostrander recommends being an informed buyer.
"The U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) has created federal Standards of Identity for mozzarella based on moisture (water) and milk fat content," he explains. "Whole milk and part-skim mozzarella is allowed to contain moisture contents between 52 and 60 percent. Cheeses with moisture contents this high are hard to process, age quickly and don't bake up well. Low moisture, whole milk and part skim mozzarella (LMWM, LMSP) contain moisture contents of 45 to 52 percent moisture. Pizza cheese can't be called
mozzarella if the moisture content is higher than allowed by the USDA. Cheese with 45 percent moisture is not the same as cheese with 52 percent moisture, even though they carry the same name. The higher moisture cheeses have a lower production cost because water is cheap. Bargain and economy cheese will most likely have these higher moisture contents and sell for a lower price."
Translation: choose the right cheese for your operation. This, says Ostrander, "starts with comparing the baking and eating characteristics of equal portions of competing brands. Sometimes a higher cost per pound premium cheese will yield a pizza that is better tasting and better looking using 10 to 15 percent less cheese per pie. Instead of comparing price per pound or ounce from competing brands, you may want to compare cost per pizza using fewer ounces."
Is your bottom line being adversely affected by food costs? If so, Big Dave Ostrander has this to say:
“After I realized that I was leaving tens of thousands of profit dollars unaccounted for, I studied and achieved the perfect food cost month in and month out. The biggest breakthroughs I discovered were:
- Placing in-line portion control scales on my make line
- Pre-weighing cheese cups
- Placing portion size cheat sheets at eye level with my cooks
- Having high accountability for achieving food cost on my managers’ shoulders. This meant rewards and penalties.”
There you have it. Get started today.
Related

Did you know that a 14-inch pizza actually has nearly twice as much area to cover than a 10-inch pizza? That’s right, believe it or not. In order to figure the area of your pizza (in square inches), turn back to your school days and recall that the area of a circle is ascertained by taking pie — or 3.14 — and multiplying that times the radius squared.
Okay, okay, too complicated. So, trust us. We’ve done the math for you. A 10-inch pizza is comprised of 78 square inches, while a 14-inch pizza has 154 square inches.
What that means is that a 14-inch pizza will contain nearly twice the amount of sauce, cheese and toppings of a 10-inch pizza. When setting your menu pricing, this is a critical point.
Now, let’s say you offer 14-inch “small” pizzas and 16-inch “large” pizzas. A 16-inch pie is 201 square inches — approximately 31 percent larger, in terms of area, than a 14-inch pie. Just like in the example above, what this means is that your 16-inch pizza, though only two more inches in diameter, will require 31 percent more sauce, cheese and toppings in order to look and taste like your 14-inch pizza.
Does that mean your 16-inch pie should carry a price point that’s 31 percent higher than your 14-inch pie? Perhaps. If a 14-inch cheese pizza is priced at $8.99, for example, then a 16-inch cheese pizza would be marked up to $11.75.
Unfortunately, customers in many markets aren’t willing to pay $11.75 for a cheese pizza when they can get one loaded with toppings from a major chain for under $10.
Ultimately, the best method for determining the final price of your 16-inch pizza would be to figure your food costs, then find an acceptable markup from there. You likely won’t make as much per pie as you do on your 14-inch pizzas, but your customers won’t feel overcharged and alienated, either.
Finally, if you are resigning yourself to making more profit on a small pizza than a large, there’s no need to fret. By pushing your 14-inch pies in your marketing and bundling small pizzas with breadsticks or wings and soda, you can increase sales of these pizzas.
More Articles
Debt Management
Is there such a thing as good debt?

BY Pamela Mills-Senn PHOTOS BY JOSH KEOWN
“Debt isn’t inherently bad or good,” explains Chris Alberta, senior managing director of Conway MacKenzie, Inc., a Detroit-based consulting firm providing turnaround/crisis management services. “It depends on the intent of its use. Debt used to mask deficiencies in the operations is bad, but debt taken on as growth capital to expand a profitable concept can be a very good thing.”
Fred Wolfe, who drives the operations and executive leadership team for Orange County, California-based Synergy Restaurant Consultants, says good debt doesn’t exceed low income expectations. Debt turns dangerous when paying it back depends on maximum cash flow and everything going right.
“This raises the risk level substantially and
increases the likelihood of a default,” he
explains. “Bad debt also carries a high interest rate because of risk or lack of a financial history. Leveraged debt always carries an inherent risk and can be exemplified by the high number of restaurant company bankruptcies.”
When undertaken sensibly to move the business forward in a planned way, and there’s a sustainable way to pay it back, taking on debt can work in your favor, says restaurant consultant John T. Self, a professor at the Collins College of Hospitality Management at Cal Poly Pomona. Bad debt is unplanned and unsustainable. Depending on the circumstances it can be a mere annoyance or it can become catastrophic, he adds.
Nick Sarillo, owner of two Nick’s Pizza & Pub restaurants located in Illinois (one in Crystal Lake and one in Elgin), knows firsthand how quickly debt can turn surly. Sales at both sites were strong, so good that he began the process of opening a third location. However, around 2007/2008, business started to roller coaster, especially at the Elgin location (where the dips hit the double-digits). At times, Sarillo says he couldn’t cover the mortgage or overhead.
To keep the business going he tapped into a line of credit. His predicament worsened. The third restaurant didn’t pan out, thanks to a change of lenders, and he lost over $300,000. The opening of a Super Wal-Mart across the street from the Elgin site was delayed, depriving Sarillo of an anticipated boost in traffic. He began offering steep discounts on Monday and Tuesday nights, running this program for almost two years. This initially helped profitability, but when it began eroding the weekend business he ended it.
By 2011, thanks to severe winter storms and disruptive road construction at both locations, things were dire. Barely hanging on, this September Sarillo emailed a letter to the frequent diners in his database explaining his situation, asking for their support. It posted on Facebook within minutes. His phone began ringing and customers poured in. Now, says Sarillo, they’re about 75 percent out of the woods.
But Sarillo isn’t banking on this alone to keep him going; he started taking a different approach to running his business. He began monitoring operating costs. He reduced overhead by streamlining his management staff, which he had kept too high in anticipation of opening more locations. And he hired a consultant, who pointed out a major error — Sarillo hadn’t been looking at the balance sheet as a whole, looking instead at each restaurant’s individual performance. Consequently, he hadn’t realized how negatively the Elgin site was impacting the entire business.
By not analyzing the contribution each store was making to the corporate overhead, Sarillo made a common error. Alberta says restaurant owners/operators often fail to look at every aspect of each site’s performance — what he calls doing a “four-wall” analysis. With this data it’s possible to compare one location to another and identify problems before more debt is incurred and profitability is further eroded.
“If on a store-level basis, the operations are cash-flow negative, new debt would be unlikely to improve the overall cash flow and could compound the cash-flow problem,” Alberta says. And “if they’re not generating a positive cash flow on a four-wall basis, adding new stores could actually lead to decreased profitability.”
The biggest mistake Self sees owners make is not having a budget income statement. “They don’t do inventory, they don’t do cost of sales or food costs, they don’t do P&Ls. They just sense they’re losing money but they don’t know how much or where.”
They also fail to plan — and save — for debt, maintaining sufficient cash reserves to handle equipment breakdowns or replacements, Self says. Instead of being proactive, they react — never a good strategy.
“Another error is failing to do a cost/benefit analysis when they need to purchase something, asking why they’re taking on the debt and how they’re
going to pay for it,” he says.
Perhaps the biggest downfall is being overly optimistic in their sales forecasts and/or cost management, says Wolfe. Sarillo says he did this, but no longer.
“Now I’ve started operating as the two-restaurant business we are rather than as the five-restaurant business I wanted to be,” he says. “I got real.”
Pamela Mills-Senn is a freelancer specializing in writing on topics of interest to all manner of businesses. She is based in Long Beach, California.

Did you know that a 14-inch pizza actually has nearly twice as much area to cover than a 10-inch pizza? That’s right, believe it or not. In order to figure the area of your pizza (in square inches), turn back to your school days and recall that the area of a circle is ascertained by taking pie — or 3.14 — and multiplying that times the radius squared.
Okay, okay, too complicated. So, trust us. We’ve done the math for you. A 10-inch pizza is comprised of 78 square inches, while a 14-inch pizza has 154 square inches.
What that means is that a 14-inch pizza will contain nearly twice the amount of sauce, cheese and toppings of a 10-inch pizza. When setting your menu pricing, this is a critical point.
Now, let’s say you offer 14-inch “small” pizzas and 16-inch “large” pizzas. A 16-inch pie is 201 square inches — approximately 31 percent larger, in terms of area, than a 14-inch pie. Just like in the example above, what this means is that your 16-inch pizza, though only two more inches in diameter, will require 31 percent more sauce, cheese and toppings in order to look and taste like your 14-inch pizza.
Does that mean your 16-inch pie should carry a price point that’s 31 percent higher than your 14-inch pie? Perhaps. If a 14-inch cheese pizza is priced at $8.99, for example, then a 16-inch cheese pizza would be marked up to $11.75.
Unfortunately, customers in many markets aren’t willing to pay $11.75 for a cheese pizza when they can get one loaded with toppings from a major chain for under $10.
Ultimately, the best method for determining the final price of your 16-inch pizza would be to figure your food costs, then find an acceptable markup from there. You likely won’t make as much per pie as you do on your 14-inch pizzas, but your customers won’t feel overcharged and alienated, either.
Finally, if you are resigning yourself to making more profit on a small pizza than a large, there’s no need to fret. By pushing your 14-inch pies in your marketing and bundling small pizzas with breadsticks or wings and soda, you can increase sales of these pizzas.

Photos by Josh Keown
“So if I don’t pay attention to my expenses, I just don’t make money,” Lanz says.
In the margin-tight restaurant world of volatile commodity prices and ongoing overhead costs, labor remains one of the few business costs an operator can moderate.
To be certain, rising labor costs remain a significant concern to pizzeria operators and the livelihood of their outlets, particularly as wage regulations jump. Last January, eight states raised their minimum wage floor; meanwhile, 2013 will deliver additional rate hikes to operators. Such raises often put upward wage pressure on other positions within the restaurant.
According to the National Restaurant Association, labor costs now represent about one-third of sales in America’s full-service restaurants, outdistancing food and beverage costs. If labor costs are not managed through scheduling, planning and monitoring, experts warn, the expense can sprint away from operators and weaken the profit line.
“If you have too many people on the clock, it’s like deciding to pay the landlord a higher rent; each cuts off the bottom line,” says Dave Pavesic, a former Italian restaurant operator who spent 26 years on faculty at Georgia State University’s School of Hospitality.
While the temptation for Lanz and other operators is to run a leaner workforce and toil every possible hour themselves, such short-term relief often places pressures on areas such as service and productivity, thereby threatening to unleash long-term impact upon sales and traffic.
“If you cut on labor, odds are good the service or quality will suffer and that can become a vicious cycle,” Illinois-based restaurant consultant Izzy Kharasch says.
In the restaurant world, where it’s easy to be consumed by routine, set labor patterns can be disastrous. Operators will over or under-schedule staff to maintain harmony, effectively ignoring the fact that sales may dip or rise by the day, week or season.
“The ones who control labor costs best know and monitor their numbers,” says Jennifer Wiebe of SpeedLine Solutions, a Washington-based provider of restaurant POS software. She adds that labor savings come from building a schedule that’s “reflective of labor targets.”
To that end, Lanz utilizes software tools that allow him to compare sales to labor costs as he compiles upcoming schedules. He’ll review past sales on POS reports and plan his labor accordingly. As he inputs schedules into the POS system, the software will display his labor costs and allow him to pivot as necessary.
“Tools save time and time is something you can never have enough of if you’re running your own restaurant,” Lanz says.
Operational and managerial changes can also help restrain labor costs.
Operators who understand the production of their products also should know how many employees are needed. Then, adopting an assembly versus preparation mindset, the staff should be able to work more efficiently. “Be prepared and organized for the volume of business you anticipate,” Pavesic advises.
Kharasch, meanwhile, encounters numerous operations that don’t have a time clock, which, he argues, deteriorates accountability.
For those who do require employees to “clock in,” time thievery is not uncommon. Employees might punch in early or linger before punching out. At one recent operation Kharasch visited, employees “milking” the clock was costing the restaurant $30,000 a year. “We’re in a pennies business and pennies add up,” Kharasch says, adding that operators cannot be afraid to “cut people loose during slow times.”
Yet, the most important labor cost-controlling tool, many operators and HR pros agree, is hiring the right people for the right job from the start, training them appropriately, and investing in them to heighten retention.
“Having the right people in place is the beginning and end of this conversation,” Lanz says, who subscribes to the well-adopted philosophy of hiring for personality and training for skill.
Kharasch suggests operators expand the horizons and skill sets of current employees. For instance, train someone on the register to serve tables or train the dishwasher to be a line cook.
“Look at the people you have and train them to do the next thing,” he says. “They’ll save labor costs by being a more versatile employee, but you’ll also be giving them confidence and improve retention by investing in their development.”
Kharasch advises operators to avoid looking exclusively at dollars and cents, a rather narrow-minded view that ignores the value of retention and someone who knows the business. In one recent case, Kharasch encountered a restaurant riding 11 consecutive months of losses. Within 60 days, the restaurant eliminated its workforce turnover and turned a profit.
Says Lanz: “Efficient workers who know your system help you control labor costs more than anything.” u
Chicago-based writer Daniel P. Smith has covered business issues and best practices for a variety of trade publications, newspapers, and magazines.
CUTTING LABOR AT THE POS: A STEP-BY-STEP GUIDE
Jennifer Wiebe of SpeedLine Solutions offers operators step-by-step instruction on how to utilize a POS system to control labor costs.
First, set a labor goal and plan a schedule to meet it:
1. Review the sales forecast and analyze the breakdown by daypart, order type and hour.
2. Copy the previous week’s schedule in the POS and adjust it to meet targets. Set staff availability for ease of scheduling and overhead for accurate labor costs.
3. Set restrictions for overtime and teen staff to comply with labor code.
Second, track labor costs throughout each shift:
1. Set limits on early and late clock-ins. Force a manager override for any exceptions.
2. Use fingerprint security to eliminate time clock abuse.
3. Track pay rates for staff performing multiple jobs.
Finally, audit labor performance:
1. Monitor labor dashboard metrics and send staff home during slow times.
2. Take a shift snapshot to review labor metrics.
3. Track breaks and overtime for labor audits as well as manger overrides.
4. Export time clock data for payroll to reduce paperwork and accounting costs.
Photos by Josh Keown
Darren Larson
AllStar Pizza
Clute, Texas
For the most part, suppliers are not keen on pricing with a loose group of independents. They are looking for groups that have been around for a while and have the authority to speak/represent their respective groups. What you are referring to is what is called a Prime Vendor Agreement. All chains purchase 85-plus percent of their food from one supplier. In effect, this allows the supplier to enter into the agreement and charge less margin. The way they look at it goes like this: “Would I rather make 18-percent margin on a third of spotty business, or would I rather make 13 percent on all of the business, week in and week out?”
If you are a good prospective customer you can enter into your own Prime Vendor Agreement with your current suppliers. I have written and given numerous seminars on the subject. I also have assisted many of my single-unit clients in establishing their own contracts with suppliers. Once the new prices kick in, a 5-percent or better drop in pricing typically occurs.
This is how it works. First, you compose a letter and mail it to all suppliers that could service you and with which you are comfortable doing business. This letter invites the supplier to bid on your purchases using a cost-plus system. At that time you will honestly describe several important things to the supplier.
They will want to know:
- How many deliveries will you require a week?
- What sort of credit terms do you desire –– COD, 7-days or 14-days, electronic payment, credit card, etc.?
- How will you place your order and how much lead time will you want? Internet, phone, in person to DSR, etc.
- Will you allow automatic substitutions if they are out of stock on specific items?
- What time do you want the delivery?
- Is your business seasonal?
All of the above factors are important in determining how much it costs to service your account. If you lower the cost of doing business with you, you deserve lower pricing. If you are unorganized, don’t have the order placed before cut off time, bounce checks, and give away business to their competitors who come in and quote lowball prices to get your business, they won’t be interested in being your supplier/partner. On the other hand, if you are loyal and easy to do business with, you are what they are looking for.
I assure you that if you meet the above criteria this system will work for you. It is a two-way street with requirements on both the buyer and seller. These agreements are cancellable by either party with two week’s notice and allow you to do spot check audits of their costs from their suppliers to guarantee they are actually pricing your ingredients on a true cost-plus percentage basis.
For the most part, this is how the majority of big chains purchase their food items. It lowers their overall food cost percentages in the long run.
The last 15 years I owned Big Dave’s Pizza & Subs I never asked my sales rep the cost of cheese. When you think about it, the rep has the least amount of power in the entire organization. He or she has a laptop that is programmed with the least amount they can charge for items before they have to do some fancy explaining to their boss or the company buyer if they override the pricing bracket. My system takes the adversarial component out of purchasing. Every Friday, I looked up the block price of cheese and then added our pre-agreed “cost plus XYZ pennies over block”, and that figure is what showed up on my invoice.
This is a simplistic description, but you get the point.
Big Dave Ostrander owned a highly successful independent pizzeria before becoming a consultant, speaker and internationally sought-after trainer. He is a monthly contributor to Pizza Today.
Photos by Josh Keown
Many restaurant operators treat beverages as an afterthought — an oversight that can show up in your bottom line, says restaurant consultant Annette Fazio, owner of York, Maine-based Using Your Noodle in Business.
Maintaining Pricing Accuracy
Looking at sales volume, costs and profit margins can help operators determine if they’ve priced correctly, says consultant Annette Fazio. Monitoring costs is especially critical for pricing accuracy, especially considering fluctuating commodity costs, says Aaron Allen, also a restaurant consultant. Because of the day-to-day fires popping up, operators often neglect to analyze as closely and as deeply as they should, he explains. Allen suggests establishing key performance indicators, monitoring them in real time. Other tips to ensure pricing accuracy include:
- Use the correct glassware, says Allen. Have recipes for everything.
- Calculate in things like refills on coffee, tea and fountain drinks, say both consultants, adding this is something commonly overlooked. Remember, when pricing beverages, people use things like cream, lemon, sweeteners and stirrers.
- It’s challenging to generalize about profit margins, says Allen, since different beverages — alcoholic, juices, water, sodas, bottled, fountain, and so on — all have different profit ranges, he explains. Fazio says for beverages as a whole, profit margins should average 20 to 25 percent. “Although if you’re a really upscale operation you should look at the competition,” she says. “Because even at 20 percent, you could still be charging several dollars less than the competition.”
“They should really take a look at beverages because this is where you can bring in a little more money and can do so without loading up your inventory and creating more work,” she says.

There are several factors restaurant operators should consider when establishing beverage prices, say Fazio and Allen. These are:
- The concept, format and clientele. Are you mainly dine-in, takeout or delivery? Fast casual, QSr or fine dining? Positioning is also important, Allen says. “Some may want to be perceived as higher end, some may want to be more value-added.”
“You have to know what your business is,” says Jeff Miller, who owns two extreme Pizza franchises. Both in Northern California, they do mainly delivery; dine-in comprises about 20 to 25 percent of the business. They serve beer, wine, soda, juices and bottled water. Beer and wine sales account for two percent of their overall sales; nonalcoholic beverages contribute six percent, says Miller, adding that his customer base is a mix of business, family and college students.
“I knew going in that beverages would be less than 10 percent of our overall revenue,” he says. “Our business model is gourmet pizza; we’re not a sports bar.” Then there’s Shorty’s. with two Georgia locations (in Atlanta and Tucker), Shorty’s offers full bars, plus live music and dancing in the Tucker restaurant, says owner Brian wilson. Beer/wine and liquor sales account for 20 percent and seven percent of the total sales respectively at the Tucker restaurant, which is in a suburban area.
The Atlanta restaurant is more urban, wilson says. Beer/wine sales are about 18 percent; liquor is three percent. There, thanks to a more business clientele, wine sales are higher. For both operations, nonalcoholic beverage sales are classified with food; at the Atlanta restaurant, food sales are just under 80 percent.
“This reflects our focus on food,” he explains. “even though we’re close to emery University, kids don’t go to a pizza restaurant to pound beers.”
- The competition. “Competitive analysis is important; we don’t want to charge more than the competition,” says wilson. “See what competitors are charging and don’t charge more; charge less if you can.”
Also:
- Compare concepts in the same tier as yours; like to like, says Miller.
- Be thorough, advises Allen. Check type, size, if refills are free and what incidentals and add-ons are provided.
- Consider your marketing and positioning strategy; the experience you’re offering guests, says Allen. If the experience is upscale or unique, you may be able to get away with charging a bit more. And keep your competitors confused; make your own signature drinks, says Fazio, and “you can charge more for these. Plus customers like them and it won’t be as easy for the competition to shop you.”
- Consider your costs. when wilson first opened, he priced on what the market would bear. Now, although he doesn’t want to charge more than the competition, he does factor in costs, raising prices if costs demand it (wilson’s end-of-month beverage costs run 30 to 33 percent).
“In the last couple of years we’ve gone up on our draft beer prices considerably,” he says. “People love craft beers and microbrews, so we’re completely comfortable the market will tolerate it.”
Miller runs his cost of goods at around 28 percent with beverages making up about two percent of that. “If my costs go up by five percent, I’ll evaluate if I can raise my prices,” Miller says. “I scout the competition first. But if they haven’t raised their prices I’d still raise mine if the cost of goods warranted it.”
Allen’s reluctant to generalize about costs, explaining these can vary based on the concept, and what’s being served and how. However, he says that on average, the combined costs of beer, wine and liquor should be around 22 percent; Fazio’s estimate is around 23 percent (including nonalcoholic beverages). Offering nonalcoholic beverage only? Fazio estimates costs should be no more than 18 percent, depending on type (fountain, bottle, juice boxes, etc).
Ultimately, all the above factors considered, pricing remains very individual, says Fazio. “You have to go with what you’re comfortable with and be able to defend it.”
Pamela Mills-Senn is a freelancer specializing in writing on topics of interest to all manner of businesses. She is based in Long Beach, California.
Q&A: Cheese Prices

Tim Ridout, via Facebook
Big Rounds
Ravenna, Michigan
Hey, Tim. Without exception, I can’t think of any ingredient that has gone down in price. Since cheese is the costliest ingredient on our pizzas, and we buy so much of it every week, it comes to mind first. The wholesale price of mozzarella is fixed every Friday afternoon at the Chicago Mercantile Exchange (CME). A weekly average for trading on the exchange based on supply and demand is posted under the weekly block average. Your distributor uses this price when they purchase. Since the block price is a starting point, costs must be added on before you receive it and pay for it.
Typically these costs to your distributor are not cheap. They pay for transportation from the dairy to the warehouse, transportation to your restaurant, warehouse and refrigeration fees, administration, the distributor’s profit and the salesman’s commission. You can see what they see every week by visiting PizzaToday.com and clicking on the “Cheese Market News” tab on the left side of the page.
After the distributor has all of the hidden costs added up, they pay the dairy, or broker, Block + xyz cents over. The price of cheese is very fluid. Surprisingly, every distributor I know doesn’t make very much profit selling cheese. After all is said and done, a nickel or dime a pound may be the entire margin they earn on a refrigerated, clock ticking, expiring commodity.
I bought all of my cheese from one distributor. I never asked him the price of mozzarella for the last 15 years of my business. We agreed with a handshake that I would pay him Block + so many pennies over. This is confidential information and his buyer will probably have to sign off on it. The question that begs to be answered is this: what’s a fair markup? The answer depends on several factors.
1. What kind of cheese do you desire? They are all not created equally. Budget cheeses will be less expensive than premium cheeses.
2. What is your weekly volume? Do you pay your invoices promptly? Do you play one distributor against the other for the cheapest price? Are you a loyal buyer?
3. Every step up the convenience ladder will affect the cost per pound. Diced and shredded costs about 20 cents a pound more than loaf. Also, blends increase the cost.
Generally speaking, you get what you pay for. Cheap cheese is just that. Premium cheese is not. Ask for samples from several manufacturers and conduct a blind, side-by-side bake off. Only then will you know the right cheese for you. That said, ask the distributor if they would quote you on a weekly locked cost based on how many cents over CME you can both live with.
Finally, if you don’t portion control cheese on every pizza, why would you even care what it costs? After I implemented using cheese cups for every pizza every time, my weekly purchases went from 1,000 pounds a week to 800. I have turned on hundreds of operators to my method, and the majority of them report a 20-percent reduction in cheese purchases afterward.
Big Dave Ostrander owned a highly successful independent pizzeria before becoming a consultant, speaker and internationally sought-after trainer.
Louis Phelps
Kansas City, Missouri
In the current economic freefall we’ve been destined to play out due to very bad decisions made by ‘too big to fail institutions,’ you are suffering. When all else failed, I borrowed from friends, family, my distributors and even secret fraternal organizations. The groveling is painful, and if you are late on a payment you risk a relationship. I have not heard any positive outcomes from getting credit card advances. The writing is on the wall. There is very little to no investment money available currently. I’m not sure if we’ll ever return to the days when your bank just automatically issued big lines of credit to their best business customers.
If you are currently profitable and can prove it, it may be time to consider franchising. That’s how the last wave of foodservice giants was born. If you are marginally profitable, I would advise you to stand pat, do nothing but save for the future. Live lean and mean. When this financial fiasco finally breaks loose, you will be a survivor. You will have your own saved money to finance your growth. No more humble pie trips to loan officers. I truly believe that you need to, in the words of Harvey Mackay, “Dig your well before it runs dry.” This means that between today and the future get to really know a lender. Purchase bank stock, get invited to meetings. People lend to people they trust, period. If they don’t know your character, ability to repay and creditworthiness, they won’t get excited about standing up for you to the loan committee. If they believe in you, they will go to bat for you. You haven’t cultivated those deep trusting relationships yet. Use this time to ‘get to know your banker’ investor. Good luck.
Big Dave Ostrander owned a highly successful independent pizzeria before becoming a consultant, speaker and internationally sought-after trainer. monthly contributor to Pizza Today.
Debt Management
Is there such a thing as good debt?

BY Pamela Mills-Senn PHOTOS BY JOSH KEOWN
“Debt isn’t inherently bad or good,” explains Chris Alberta, senior managing director of Conway MacKenzie, Inc., a Detroit-based consulting firm providing turnaround/crisis management services. “It depends on the intent of its use. Debt used to mask deficiencies in the operations is bad, but debt taken on as growth capital to expand a profitable concept can be a very good thing.”
Fred Wolfe, who drives the operations and executive leadership team for Orange County, California-based Synergy Restaurant Consultants, says good debt doesn’t exceed low income expectations. Debt turns dangerous when paying it back depends on maximum cash flow and everything going right.
“This raises the risk level substantially and
increases the likelihood of a default,” he
explains. “Bad debt also carries a high interest rate because of risk or lack of a financial history. Leveraged debt always carries an inherent risk and can be exemplified by the high number of restaurant company bankruptcies.”
When undertaken sensibly to move the business forward in a planned way, and there’s a sustainable way to pay it back, taking on debt can work in your favor, says restaurant consultant John T. Self, a professor at the Collins College of Hospitality Management at Cal Poly Pomona. Bad debt is unplanned and unsustainable. Depending on the circumstances it can be a mere annoyance or it can become catastrophic, he adds.
Nick Sarillo, owner of two Nick’s Pizza & Pub restaurants located in Illinois (one in Crystal Lake and one in Elgin), knows firsthand how quickly debt can turn surly. Sales at both sites were strong, so good that he began the process of opening a third location. However, around 2007/2008, business started to roller coaster, especially at the Elgin location (where the dips hit the double-digits). At times, Sarillo says he couldn’t cover the mortgage or overhead.
To keep the business going he tapped into a line of credit. His predicament worsened. The third restaurant didn’t pan out, thanks to a change of lenders, and he lost over $300,000. The opening of a Super Wal-Mart across the street from the Elgin site was delayed, depriving Sarillo of an anticipated boost in traffic. He began offering steep discounts on Monday and Tuesday nights, running this program for almost two years. This initially helped profitability, but when it began eroding the weekend business he ended it.
By 2011, thanks to severe winter storms and disruptive road construction at both locations, things were dire. Barely hanging on, this September Sarillo emailed a letter to the frequent diners in his database explaining his situation, asking for their support. It posted on Facebook within minutes. His phone began ringing and customers poured in. Now, says Sarillo, they’re about 75 percent out of the woods.
But Sarillo isn’t banking on this alone to keep him going; he started taking a different approach to running his business. He began monitoring operating costs. He reduced overhead by streamlining his management staff, which he had kept too high in anticipation of opening more locations. And he hired a consultant, who pointed out a major error — Sarillo hadn’t been looking at the balance sheet as a whole, looking instead at each restaurant’s individual performance. Consequently, he hadn’t realized how negatively the Elgin site was impacting the entire business.
By not analyzing the contribution each store was making to the corporate overhead, Sarillo made a common error. Alberta says restaurant owners/operators often fail to look at every aspect of each site’s performance — what he calls doing a “four-wall” analysis. With this data it’s possible to compare one location to another and identify problems before more debt is incurred and profitability is further eroded.
“If on a store-level basis, the operations are cash-flow negative, new debt would be unlikely to improve the overall cash flow and could compound the cash-flow problem,” Alberta says. And “if they’re not generating a positive cash flow on a four-wall basis, adding new stores could actually lead to decreased profitability.”
The biggest mistake Self sees owners make is not having a budget income statement. “They don’t do inventory, they don’t do cost of sales or food costs, they don’t do P&Ls. They just sense they’re losing money but they don’t know how much or where.”
They also fail to plan — and save — for debt, maintaining sufficient cash reserves to handle equipment breakdowns or replacements, Self says. Instead of being proactive, they react — never a good strategy.
“Another error is failing to do a cost/benefit analysis when they need to purchase something, asking why they’re taking on the debt and how they’re
going to pay for it,” he says.
Perhaps the biggest downfall is being overly optimistic in their sales forecasts and/or cost management, says Wolfe. Sarillo says he did this, but no longer.
“Now I’ve started operating as the two-restaurant business we are rather than as the five-restaurant business I wanted to be,” he says. “I got real.”
Pamela Mills-Senn is a freelancer specializing in writing on topics of interest to all manner of businesses. She is based in Long Beach, California.
Examining your P&L
Report gives insight into health of business

BY NORA CALEY PHOTOS BY RICK DAUGHERTY
Pam Proto, founder of the six-location company, says she and the managers use the P&L, which summarizes sales and expenses, to see how the Colorado and Idaho restaurants are performing compared to the same period the previous year. “We take first quarter 2011 and we compare it to first quarter 2010, and we say, ‘We did less in sales, but why did we spend more on cheese?’ ” she says. “It’s very transparent. We all talk about it. Everyone has certain things they have to accomplish, and they are rewarded when they accomplish these things.”
The P&L is a financial statement your bookkeeper or accountant sends you, along with other reports such as daily sales figures or weekly snapshots. Some accounting experts refer to the P&L as the income statement, and many recommend examining it monthly. The important thing, they agree, is that as a restaurant owner you examine the P&L, understand what it says about the health of your business, and then do something with the information.
“It really tells a story of your business,” says Alex Coppersmith, chief financial officer of the San Francisco-based Bacchus Management Group, parent company for four Pizza Antica restaurants and several other restaurants. “It gives you a glimpse of not just what’s happening today, but what’s happening over a week, a month, a year.”
That glimpse tells you whether your business really is making any money. “So many people think, ‘If I have money in the bank, I am making money’,” says Barbara Ann Barschak, CPA and restaurant and hospitality partner at the accounting firm Katz Cassidy in Los Angeles. “The P&L will help them manage their business. It will tell them if they are pricing their menu properly, if their portions are right, if they are overstaffed.”
The P&L shows sales, and how much those sales cost your business. Sales encompass food and beverage, merchandise such as t-shirts and gift cards. Costs include food, labor and operating expenses. Each has its own subcategories. For example, Barschak says, labor
includes not only wages, but workers’ compensation insurance, uniforms, payroll processing, payroll taxes and, for some, health insurance. Operating expenses include everything from marketing and utilities to oven repair.
Make sure the P&L is timely. Barschak suggests getting the P&L around the tenth of the month, showing revenues and expenses for the previous month. Compare the figures to how your business did in past months. Also use other restaurants as a benchmark. You can get these industry standards from the National Restaurant Association, friends and peers in other restaurants, or an accountant who specializes in foodservice.
Most restaurants have food costs of about 30 percent of revenues, and for pizzerias that figure is lower. Labor should be no more than
33 percent, and rent should be seven to 10 percent, Barschak estimates. Credit card processing could take up two-and-a-half percent. Marketing might be two percent.
The more information you have on the P&L, the better. “It is very important that business owners are aware of how much money they are actually making, and not just hyper focused on sales figures,” says Kevin Suto, CEO of Zachary’s Chicago Pizza Inc., with three locations in California. “If your sales are consistent, yet your profit is down, the P&L will show you where you have incurred higher expenses.”
Proto says when food costs went up, she renegotiated with vendors. Managers came up with ways to save electricity and to schedule less staff during certain shifts. “The economy helped us be better at what we do. It really made us look at our costs,” she says.
Coppersmith agrees that collaboration is important. “Let the chef know the food costs were 23 percent and the industry norm is 20, and last year you had 19 to 20,” he says. “As an owner you don’t need to worry about it by yourself. Go to the dining room manager and say, ‘We are having issues with labor costs, do we have more waiters than last year?’”
Also speak with your accountant. Theodore D. Derma, CPA, audit manager for the accounting firm R. J. Augustine and Associates in Schaumburg, Illinois, says sometimes restaurant owners panic because one month went badly. An accountant can offer some perspective. “A client will say, ‘I am losing money this month. What’s going on?’ and we say, ‘You just spent 20 grand on a liquor license, it was similar to last year,’” he says. Sometimes he suggests small changes, such as using a scale to weigh cheese before it goes on the pizza.
Don’t look at the P&L as a list of things to cut. The P&L might also suggest you should raise prices,
develop new marketing tactics, or revamp your menu, says Suto. “These decisions are difficult ones,” he says. Or you might need to just stay put. “If sales and profits are strong or up, the P&L is telling you to keep doing what you are doing.”
What’s important is the bottom line, literally the last figure on the chart, the net profit. “If you are doing three percent after taxes,” says Derma, “you are doing a good job.”u
Nora Caley is a freelance writer based in Colorado and is a frequent contributor to Pizza Today.
DIY?
Should you create your own profit and loss statement or hire a bookkeeper or accountant? Daniel V. Augustine, CPA, director of accounting for R. J. Augustine and Associates in Schaumburg, Illinois, says there is reasonably priced software available that enables business owners to draw up their own charts, including P&L, balance sheets, and cash flow statements.
“The software makes financial information available to owners almost on a daily basis,” he says.
However, he says, the pizzeria owner’s main task is to sell pizzas. “You don’t want to micro-manage the profit and loss detail on a daily basis.” A full or part-time bookkeeper can generate these reports, or you can hire an accounting firm that sends you the reports, and discusses them with you, on a regular basis.
If you do want to create the P&L yourself, you’ll have to pull the sales information from your point of sale system and the expenses information from your invoices, credit card statements, and bank statements. Software such as QuickBooks can help.
The Price Of A Remodel
Investing in updated look can breathe new life into restaurant
BY DEANN OWENS PHOTOS BY JOSH KEOWN
When considering a remodel, operators need to ask that question and others before making a decision. “You don’t need to go for broke. Every situation is different,” says Kevin Goldfein, owner of KBG Dining Group, a hospitality management company in California that owns Rosti Tuscan Kitchen. “The important thing is to ask why you want to remodel and what are your goals. What do you want to accomplish?”
After developing an extensive plan, Goldfein remodeled the Encino and Santa Monica locations of Rosti Tuscan Kitchen.
“We increased seating and improved infrastructure and became current with our competition and our brand and our image, but we kept our identity,” Goldfein says. “We wanted people to come in and say, ‘oh, this is brand-new, but it’s still the same Rosti we love. The remodel has been a big benefit to us.”
According to Goldfein, the remodel was a chance to increase sales as well as update Rosti’s brand.
“I bought the company in 2008, because it had great bones in terms of great service, food and reputation. But it had been in business for over
15 years and needed updating,” Goldfein says. “So, remodeling went hand in hand with re-branding — a chance to rejuvenate itself.”
The right remodel can result in
increased sales. “Yes, renovation will absolutely lead to increased sales if the design (and designer) is simpatico with the brand and target customer. If you don’t have that synergy between design, brand and target customer, then you won’t be maximizing sales. Not at all,” says Christopher Studach, creative director of King Retail Solutions in Oregon.
According to Studach, for a remodel to stand the test of time it must start with a focused plan.
“If you figure that ‘worn’ is likely a sign that the business has been suffering over time — losing customers — then just the mere fact that the business is investing in the customer’s experience will create a jump in business,” Studach says. “But how successful over time is a direct result of an educated and targeted design process.”
So how much does it cost to put a design plan into motion? It depends on the scope of the plan, the size and location of the restaurant and the needs of the business.
“Remodels vary in scope tremendously. A simple face-lift (no kitchen, furniture, etc.) can be very affordable, while a complete change including
updated equipment, finishes, furnishings and exterior upgrade can cost much more. Of course the size and location will affect that number as well,” Studach says.
Lena Gordon, principal interior designer and owner of D2D Studio, Inc., in Littleton, Colorado, offers these examples of renovations in Denver.
Example 1: A 15-table casual pizzeria, young college demographic, simple standard toppings and no alcohol served: New furniture, paint, flooring, some architectural interest, simple restroom. Cost with design service: $25,000-$50,000.
Example 2: A 15-table medium scale pizzeria, young family demographic, semi-upgraded toppings and wine/beer: New furniture, paint, flooring, more architectural interest, impressive light fixtures, medium restroom. Cost with design service: $45,000-$100,000.
Example 3: A 15-table gourmet pizzeria, hip foodie demographic, upgraded toppings, fancy salads and apps, full bar: New furniture, wall treatments, flooring, lots of interior architectural elements, nice restroom. Cost with design service: $75,000-$200,000.
The remodel of the Valencia location of zpizza focused on the kitchen and the customers, according to Amir Sabetian, vice president of operations for zpizza International in Irvine, California.
“In the case of Valencia we spent about $20,000 total. Almost half was in kitchen equipment that needed repair or replacement. Guest view — we
upgraded about $11,000,” Sabetian says. “Complete customer area
remodels, which include changing all furniture, lighting, art, interior signage, paint or wall coverings, flooring and casework, can run from $100,00 to $200,000 depending on location and size. This does not include kitchen and business equipment upgrades.”
A budget will help operators determine where to spend and save.
“The bulk of cost is usually flooring, furniture and then electrical. Details, such as flatware, table linens, etc. can break the budget quickly. Splurging on lighting and restrooms is a good bet,” Gordon says. “Operators can save money by using the creative genius of an interior designer to create inexpensive wow moments without necessarily throwing a ton of money at the space. Strategically using used restaurant furniture and equipment, inexpensive art and wall/ceiling treatments, designing unique items with simple materials.”
Operators should make the most of what they already have. “A professional assessment should be done to determine what the challenges are and to prioritize the opportunities,” Studach says. “ ‘Splurge’ is not something we would even recommend — it implies spending more than was necessary to achieve maximum benefits. It’s more about prioritizing to determine, for your particular business, which investments are going to generate the most sustainable ROI.”
Doing homework will result in a better bid. “Be practical about restaurant remodels; it’s not your house — lots of contractors need work these days,” Sabetian says. “Shop around. We saved $1,200 just on the paint quote in Valencia by calling for three quotes. Also, fortunately franchise stores share the same brand elements, furniture, lighting (and) art work, so these items can be purchased with deep quantity discounts. Paint is one of the quickest, cheapest and most dramatic ways to make a change that will be noticed by your customers.”
According to Sabetian, successful updates are in the eye of the beholder.
“The majority of expense should be done where guests can experience the enhancements. Operational equipment in the kitchen is important, but if the guest can’t see it, it won’t affect their view on the enhancement expense.”
Operators need to make design trends work for their brand now and in the future.
According to Gordon, trends lean toward the raw, natural materials mixed with metals, upgraded metallic vinyls, great design in light fixtures and impressive restrooms.
Studach warns against getting caught up in a trend. “Any trendy design element will quickly date itself and negate much of the benefits of the remodel in the first place. Unless, of course, you can afford to update every three to five years. Besides, do you want to be just like everyone else?” he asks.
When it comes to design ideas, the brand determines the look. “For the zpizza brand, minimalism and pure were the driving forces,” Sabetian says. “These were expressed through light pure colors and materials, bamboo, stainless steel, and accents of the brand red. Packaging materials were recycled and recyclable. (We went for) modern clean lines in furniture and lighting.”
Since any remodel, small or large,
requires time and money, operators need to do their research before any walls come down or high-price equipment is ordered. To put the right remodel in motion, operators need to know what works best with their current establishment, brand, budget and business goals.
DeAnn Owens is a freelance journalist living in Ohio. She specializes in features and human interest stories.
Security Breach
Data theft is a major problem for credit card users

BY PAMELA MILLS-SENN PHOTO BY JOSH KEOWN
Stolen credit cards. Data security breaches. Identity theft and fraud. When customers come to your restaurant or place a phone or Web order, these issues are probably not even on their radar, but they should be on yours. If you’re not careful, your customers, employees, even your business could be at risk of experiencing a ruinous data theft.
Restaurants’ unique characteristics make them particularly vulnerable, says Jon McDowall, president/CEO of the Fraud Resource Group, an international consulting and expert witness firm headquartered in Bettendorf, Iowa. The workforce is generally young and transient, he says. The workload and pace is demanding and the compensation isn’t always commensurate. Orders are coming in over the phone or Web, with payments made remotely (even when dining in, credit cards typically leave the customers sight, sometimes for relatively extended periods).
Also, “the consistent segregation of employees’ duties and managerial oversight found in many other businesses may not feasible,” McDowall adds. “Let’s face it; many pizza establishments have the potential to be a risk-manager’s nightmare.”
Lest you think that there’s nothing you hold of interest to ID thieves, think again, advises Joseph Steinberg, cyber security expert and CEO of Green Armor Solutions, a Hackensack, New Jersey-based provider of information security software. Along with the aforementioned credit card data, there’s sensitive employee information, such as social security numbers and payroll information, he reminds. Don’t forget things related to running the business –– not just processes, but recipes,
e-mails from corporate and so on.
“Then there are those customer loyalty programs that collect information like addresses, birthdates and e-mail addresses,” Steinberg addds. “All this information can be used by a criminal for nefarious purposes.”
Data theft and breaches happen in numerous ways. For restaurants, skimming — the theft of credit card information used in an otherwise legitimate transaction — is a particular concern, says identity-theft prevention expert, Johnny May, owner of Security Resources Unlimited in Bloomfield Hills, Michigan. “It’s huge,” he says. “The restaurant is the one place where you lose sight of your card.”
Skimming can involve an employee writing down a customer’s credit card information, or photocopying the card, or using an electronic device (“skimmer”) to steal the data and make a clone card, says May.
“A large percent of data theft is committed by dishonest insiders,” May says. “Companies are often focused on outside attacks but really, the biggest percent comes from inside.”
Dumpster diving is another way data theft happens, says McDowall. Which is why, under Federal law, every U.S. employer, regardless of the size of the business, must destroy sensitive data
before tossing it—this includes credit card information, customer names,
addresses and so on, he explains.
“The most common means is shredding and employers need to have functional shredders in convenient locations so they’re used every time,” McDowall says.
Credit card processors can pose a risk if not handling information correctly, says Steinberg, mentioning that a recent breach involving a Texas eatery may have occurred at a third-party processor. He advises restaurants to verify their processors follow PCI Standards (Payment Card Industry Data Security Standards) and to also follow them.
Then there are data breaches caused by keyloggers, worms, Trojans and malicious codes, says McDowall. “Links, photos, attachments, website content and many other common online items can be seeded with malicious code, allowing the code’s handlers to steal sensitive identifying data, banking and credit card data, and to convert this into profit.”
The fixes aren’t necessarily complicated. In addition to implementing layered computer security — for example installing software that protects against malware, viruses, spyware, and offers intrusion detection, and so on — Steinberg advises encrypting all sensitive data; easy to do and inexpensive.
He also suggests that digitally connected, multiple-location operations take precautions to ensure a breach at one site won’t lead to breaches at the others (this may require IT assistance). Also, employees logging into the restaurant’s computer system should have their own personal identification and should only be able to log onto those things that concern them, Steinberg says. For example, a chef should not have access to credit card information or to employee personal data.
“This will help protect against breaches and thefts caused by disgruntled employees and will also limit damage in the case of a leak,” he explains.
McDowall suggests having separate computers for order taking that don’t allow for surfing or e-mailing. He also advises that restaurants establish written policies — and train on them — for how credit card information is handled, including compliant disposal of that information.
Offering free wi-fi, increasingly common, exposes you to a “whole new level of risk,” says Steinberg, mentioning that this should never be provided on the same network as the restaurant operates on.
“One of the easiest ways for a criminal to figure out if they can attack the restaurant is to go in and use the wi-fi to nose around,” he says, adding that it’s not difficult to set up a separate network.
The best protection is awareness, says McDowall. “The most important step
involves acknowledging that a number of risks exist and ownership and management committing to being as secure as possible,” he says. u
Data Protections
One of your first lines of defense when it comes to warding off internal theft is the background check, says Johnny May of Security Resources Unlimited. He reminds operators that employees typically pose the biggest threat to data security. He also suggests restaurants:
Consider video monitoring, especially over registers and where orders are taken. Monitors can prove effective deterrents.
Store employee data in locked cabinets and limit access.
Think about using wireless credit card technology that allows customers to pay at the table. “It’s a simple fix but many restaurants don’t use it,” says May.
Keep audit trails to document and determine who has accessed what and when. There are software programs that will allow you to keep audit trails.
Jon McDowall, president/CEO of the Fraud Resource Group, recommends exercising caution when considering new technologies. “Make sure you’ve explored and adequately understand the security implications. You may want to delay rollout to see how others fare.”
Pamela Mills-Senn is a freelancer specializing in writing on topics of interest to all manner of businesses. She is based in Long Beach, California.

If you haven’t taken the time to show your employees how things really work, now’s the time. The economy has tightened. Cheese prices are high. Gas prices are high. The minimum wage has increased. You don’t have much to show for every dollar you bring in. If your employees are careless about waste — or if their thieving — you are not making any money. Take a good look at the graphic that accompanies this article. Cut it out and hang it up for your employees to see just how little is left over for you at the end of the day.
Roughly, before taxes, the average pizzeria operator has a 7 percent net profit.
Here’s a breakdown of the average operator’s expenses:
• Food and Beverage, 30 percent
• Labor & Benefits, 35 percent
• Occupancy (rent, taxes, insurance, phone, supplies, common area maintenance, etc.), 20 percent
• Administrative, 8 percent
• Net profit before taxes, 7 percent
Gone are the days of the 10- or 15-percent profit margins. You aren’t getting rich off of each sale, so let your employees know that. It will make a difference.

To ease the burden of rising energy costs, start by taking a look at your HVAC system. The unit not only maintains the current climate control in your restaurant, but it also controls exhaust from the kitchen. One way to maintain climate in the back and front of the house is to install two or more HVAC units. While costly in the beginning, you’re likely to see a more even internal temperature throughout.
Tips for saving energy (sourced from the Washington State University Cooperative Extension Energy Program and the Northwest Energy Efficiency Alliance) include:
• Use the thermostat factory settings. Leave the thermostat settings at 76 F for cooling and 68 F for heating. Each degree of heating or cooling can cost an additional four to five percent in energy costs.
• Use the thermostat’s night setback feature. Set the thermostat to bring your restaurant to temperature no earlier than needed.
• Opt for florescent lighting and save as much as 1/4 on your energy output. Plus, the bulbs expel less heat than traditional light bulbs, helping to keep your restaurant cooler.
Related
Dollars & Sense
Why it’s important to understand your EBITDA

BY Robert Lillegard
But that’s a mistake, especially when it comes to financial planning. Spending a little time tracking your cash flow now can mean the difference between success and failure later. And while accounting can get extremely complicated, a simple formula called EBITDA can tell you much of what you need to know.
First things first. EBITDA stands for “Earnings Before Interest, Taxes, Depreciation, and Amortization.” It’s basically your gross revenue minus your food costs, payroll and other expenses, with the four expenses mentioned above added back in. EBITDA is a basic measure of cash flow that would be available to a debt service. According to Brian Murphy, vice president of business banking at the Duluth, Minnesota-based North Shore Bank of Commerce, it’s crucial if you’re interested in getting a loan.
“It’s critical,” Murphy says. “It’s one of the most important calculations that we do as bankers. What we’re trying to do is determine capacity to pay.”
So how can a restaurateur learn their EBITDA? Murphy says the answer is probably already in front of most of them.
“It’s right in the financial statements,” Murphy says. “That’s the first good piece of advice — keep good financial statements.”
Even if you don’t read your financial statements, it’s still good practice to keep them for the bank. Pete Radosevich, who owns Eskomo Pizza Pies in Esko, Minnesota, says that he couldn’t tell you his EBITDA offhand, but he’s able to get it when it counts. He tracks sales and expenses in QuickBooks, which automatically processes the numbers.
“When you write everything down in QuickBooks, once a month you can print out a balance sheet,” Radosevich says. “I don’t even look at the balance sheet. I just send it to the bank once every quarter or so.”
A positive EBITDA is good, and the higher the better. With a higher EBITDA, you’re able to borrow more money at lower interest rates because you’re less of a risk. Conversely, a negative EBITDA means you’re losing money month to month. While you may be able to supplement with savings or income from another business to stay afloat, your business model is unsustainable over the long term. Your minimum EBITDA depends on how much money you need to borrow.
“Say an operator has round payments of $1,000 of principal and interest — EBITDA needs to be greater than $12,000,” Murphy says. “If the EBITDA is less than $12,000, then there isn’t adequate cash to make those payments.”
While these numbers can help you plan for financing, Radosevich says they’re not important for most day-
to-day operations. He sets money aside in a separate account for expenses like maintenance, and he keeps track of more basic metrics in the short term.
“I know every month on the 15th I have a payment of about $8,000 and I need to plan,” Radosevich says. “If you know your sales last week were $20,000, you know you’re going to get a bill from Roma for $5,000. I don’t need to see every day that my building has depreciated another $42.”
When it comes to financial planning, the best advice is to play to your strengths. Radosevich says that there are two ways to run a pizza business. Some operators focus on staying profitable and in the black, and simply make sure their pizza is good enough to keep customers happy. Others, like Radosevich, focus on quality pizza, and do just enough math to stay afloat. This approach can work, as long as you find someone to help with the more complex aspects of financing.
“Most of the time, people who go into small business need to have a rudimentary (financial) understanding,”
Radosevich says. “But the concepts you’re talking about are usually far beyond people who all they want to do is make pizzas. They should find an accountant who can explain these things.”
Robert Lillegard is based in Minnesota.
Knowing Your EBITDA
Finding your EBITDA is actually a fairly simple process if you keep good records. For each quarter, start by finding your operating income (or net revenue before taxes). If interest payments have been subtracted, add those back in. Also, add in depreciation and amortization expenses. Do this for each quarter and add the figures together to find your EBITDA for the year. When you do, exclude one-time expenses and any income/extra expense from operations that you no longer do (for example, if you used to cater but now you don’t). That will give you a realistic idea of your current EBITDA.
So what can you do to change your number? Well, you COULD hit your oven with a sledgehammer to speed depreciation. But realistically, the only way to get a better EBITDA is to add income and cut expenses.
“It’s not always easy to do, but it’s that simple,” says Brian Murphy of North Shore Bank of Commerce. “It’s a good thing to educate your operators about.”
More Articles
Examining your P&L
Report gives insight into health of business

BY NORA CALEY PHOTOS BY RICK DAUGHERTY
Pam Proto, founder of the six-location company, says she and the managers use the P&L, which summarizes sales and expenses, to see how the Colorado and Idaho restaurants are performing compared to the same period the previous year. “We take first quarter 2011 and we compare it to first quarter 2010, and we say, ‘We did less in sales, but why did we spend more on cheese?’ ” she says. “It’s very transparent. We all talk about it. Everyone has certain things they have to accomplish, and they are rewarded when they accomplish these things.”
The P&L is a financial statement your bookkeeper or accountant sends you, along with other reports such as daily sales figures or weekly snapshots. Some accounting experts refer to the P&L as the income statement, and many recommend examining it monthly. The important thing, they agree, is that as a restaurant owner you examine the P&L, understand what it says about the health of your business, and then do something with the information.
“It really tells a story of your business,” says Alex Coppersmith, chief financial officer of the San Francisco-based Bacchus Management Group, parent company for four Pizza Antica restaurants and several other restaurants. “It gives you a glimpse of not just what’s happening today, but what’s happening over a week, a month, a year.”
That glimpse tells you whether your business really is making any money. “So many people think, ‘If I have money in the bank, I am making money’,” says Barbara Ann Barschak, CPA and restaurant and hospitality partner at the accounting firm Katz Cassidy in Los Angeles. “The P&L will help them manage their business. It will tell them if they are pricing their menu properly, if their portions are right, if they are overstaffed.”
The P&L shows sales, and how much those sales cost your business. Sales encompass food and beverage, merchandise such as t-shirts and gift cards. Costs include food, labor and operating expenses. Each has its own subcategories. For example, Barschak says, labor
includes not only wages, but workers’ compensation insurance, uniforms, payroll processing, payroll taxes and, for some, health insurance. Operating expenses include everything from marketing and utilities to oven repair.
Make sure the P&L is timely. Barschak suggests getting the P&L around the tenth of the month, showing revenues and expenses for the previous month. Compare the figures to how your business did in past months. Also use other restaurants as a benchmark. You can get these industry standards from the National Restaurant Association, friends and peers in other restaurants, or an accountant who specializes in foodservice.
Most restaurants have food costs of about 30 percent of revenues, and for pizzerias that figure is lower. Labor should be no more than
33 percent, and rent should be seven to 10 percent, Barschak estimates. Credit card processing could take up two-and-a-half percent. Marketing might be two percent.
The more information you have on the P&L, the better. “It is very important that business owners are aware of how much money they are actually making, and not just hyper focused on sales figures,” says Kevin Suto, CEO of Zachary’s Chicago Pizza Inc., with three locations in California. “If your sales are consistent, yet your profit is down, the P&L will show you where you have incurred higher expenses.”
Proto says when food costs went up, she renegotiated with vendors. Managers came up with ways to save electricity and to schedule less staff during certain shifts. “The economy helped us be better at what we do. It really made us look at our costs,” she says.
Coppersmith agrees that collaboration is important. “Let the chef know the food costs were 23 percent and the industry norm is 20, and last year you had 19 to 20,” he says. “As an owner you don’t need to worry about it by yourself. Go to the dining room manager and say, ‘We are having issues with labor costs, do we have more waiters than last year?’”
Also speak with your accountant. Theodore D. Derma, CPA, audit manager for the accounting firm R. J. Augustine and Associates in Schaumburg, Illinois, says sometimes restaurant owners panic because one month went badly. An accountant can offer some perspective. “A client will say, ‘I am losing money this month. What’s going on?’ and we say, ‘You just spent 20 grand on a liquor license, it was similar to last year,’” he says. Sometimes he suggests small changes, such as using a scale to weigh cheese before it goes on the pizza.
Don’t look at the P&L as a list of things to cut. The P&L might also suggest you should raise prices,
develop new marketing tactics, or revamp your menu, says Suto. “These decisions are difficult ones,” he says. Or you might need to just stay put. “If sales and profits are strong or up, the P&L is telling you to keep doing what you are doing.”
What’s important is the bottom line, literally the last figure on the chart, the net profit. “If you are doing three percent after taxes,” says Derma, “you are doing a good job.”u
Nora Caley is a freelance writer based in Colorado and is a frequent contributor to Pizza Today.
DIY?
Should you create your own profit and loss statement or hire a bookkeeper or accountant? Daniel V. Augustine, CPA, director of accounting for R. J. Augustine and Associates in Schaumburg, Illinois, says there is reasonably priced software available that enables business owners to draw up their own charts, including P&L, balance sheets, and cash flow statements.
“The software makes financial information available to owners almost on a daily basis,” he says.
However, he says, the pizzeria owner’s main task is to sell pizzas. “You don’t want to micro-manage the profit and loss detail on a daily basis.” A full or part-time bookkeeper can generate these reports, or you can hire an accounting firm that sends you the reports, and discusses them with you, on a regular basis.
If you do want to create the P&L yourself, you’ll have to pull the sales information from your point of sale system and the expenses information from your invoices, credit card statements, and bank statements. Software such as QuickBooks can help.
PHOTO BY JOSH KEOWN
With four Blue Moon Pizza stores spread about the Atlanta area, Kelvin Slater cannot make every pizza and touch every table. It’s why Slater feels so compelled to draw and hold on to first-rate employees.
“I need to make sure quality is coming across to the customer every time,” says Slater, who oversees about 150 employees amid the Blue Moon enterprise.
Slater surely knows that part of attracting –– and retaining –– skilled and qualified employees is offering competitive wages and an enticing array of bonuses, promotions, incentives and perks.
“It’s beneficial to reward employees because the employee who knows my business and its nuances is invaluable,” Slater says, adding that employee retention generally breeds customer retention as well.
For many operators, competitive pay as well as bonus and promotion opportunities not only drive talent management but expense management as well. By building a strategy around pay, both base pay and variable components, operators address their single largest cost –– people.
So how does one build a competitive payscale, especially when the practice relies on factors as diverse as regulations, geography, tasks, job skills, and even certifications, such as TIPS or ServSafe?
First, Stacey Carroll, director of professional services for PayScale, a Seattle-based firm that tracks compensation data, urges operators to make payscale decisions based on credible, current data about market rates and job responsibilities.
“You need to ask: is this data relevant and does it provide a good benchmark from which to build a payscale?” Carroll says.
In some cases, operators may decide to offer lower base pay and bolster the overall compensation package with tempting incentives. Others may elect to ignore bonuses and pay $1 more per hour beyond competitors to build a perception of higher pay.
“There are no right or wrong answers, but you want to make sure you’re where you want to be relative to the competition,” Carroll says. “It’s about gathering the right data and setting a strategy to make sound decisions.”
Jeff Mease, who runs five pizza shops in Bloomington, Indiana, including the delivery-dominant Pizza X and the pizza brew pub Lennie’s, monitors the general state of competitors’ hourly fees, while also reviewing his own pricing and revenue to determine what he can afford.
“The higher the ticket, the more room there is to heighten compensation,” says Mease, who directs a staff of 100.
With a mix of knowledge of the competitive landscape and years of trial and error since opening his first Blue Moon in 2003, Slater maintains a set minimum for all new managers and operating partners, shifting that rate if the new hire possesses proven experience and know-how. Later, when it comes to raises, he does not cap pay bumps.
“If the employee is good for the company and helping us perform, there’s no reason to put a limit in place,” he contends.
While Carroll understands that few operators will unveil a published salary scale to employees, lest they risk relinquishing flexibility and discretion, she urges operators to be as transparent as possible with employees, letting them know about salary ranges for specific jobs as well as how pay increases and promotions are determined. “Give employees a sense of things, so they can see the opportunities,” she suggests.
For Mease, a 30-year industry veteran, compensation is a tool to spark extra motivation and attention to detail, particularly when it comes to compensation beyond the base rate.
At Pizza X and Lenny’s, Mease returns 20 percent of each store’s income to its GM, while another five percent of company profit is spread among the five GMs equally. Mease says his compensation plan fosters positive peer pressure among the managers and inspires them all to perform their best. He says that the simple nature of his plan –– rooted in the basic P&L statement and devoid of any complicated metrics –– puts ownership and management on the same page.
“If you set the compensation structure just right, then you don’t have to manage the staff,” he says, adding that his assistant managers receive bonuses tied to labor costs and efficient commodities usage in addition to their hourly rate.
In fact, many operators turn to incentive programs to boost base pay and heighten employee performance, particularly for those in the managerial, kitchen, and support staff ranks who are not naturally motivated by tips.
Carroll says the most productive incentive programs feature attainable results, reward on results not activity, and include measurable metrics that allow an operator to assess ROI.
“A properly designed incentive plan should pay for itself because it boosts profitability,” Carroll says.
While some contend that an employee should not be rewarded for filling the job’s requirements, Slater actively seeks opportunities to recognize those who exceed expectations. He’ll frequently run daily contests for salesmanship at each of his four stores as well as regular contests between the stores for gift cards, event tickets, or staff adventures.
“If nobody was getting rewarded, it would certainly change the culture of the restaurant,” Slater says, adding that employees enthusiastically share news of their rewards with colleagues, which heightens the overall level of performance throughout the Blue Moon ranks.
INSIDE THE KITCHEN: USING INCENTIVES TO DRIVE HIGH PERFORMANCE
At his five-store, Indiana-based pizza empire, Jeff Mease has tried to tie incentive compensation throughout the system. While servers and drivers are naturally motivated by tip income, Mease explored adapting the incentive idea for other hourly staff, specifically those in the kitchen.
At his commissary operation, Mease performed a time study to baseline production of specific elements, such as making dough balls and slicing green peppers. He posts a goal time each week. When achieved, the staff receives 70 percent of the saved money.
“The message is clear: ‘When you’re more efficient and the company saves, you’ll get back the bulk of those savings,’” Mease says.
As a result of his incentive-laden plan, Mease doesn’t need to ride his kitchen staff or worry about being overbudget.
“These guys get into the kitchen and it hums along,” Mease says. “They’re empowered to be productive and get a sense of accomplishment from the bonus.”
Chicago-based writer Daniel P. Smith has covered business issues and best practices for a variety of trade publications, newspapers, and magazines.
Q&A: Menu Development

BY BIG DAVE OSTRANDER
PHOTOS BY JOSH KEOWN
I haven’t updated my menu in a couple of years except for price adjustments. Is it worth it to pay a professional company to do this for me?
Austin Rodigero
Phoenix, Arizona
I’m rarely stopped dead in my tracks. A few years ago, however, I did a double-take as I passed an exhibitor’s booth at International Pizza Expo. It was setup day, and I was getting a sneak-peak at what attendees would see on the show floor. This particular booth showcased menus and flyers that were stunning in layout, design, photography and professionalism. It was eye candy for me.
Too often, restaurant menus are uninspired price lists. That’s a shame, because your menu is a powerful marketing and sales tool. Analyzing and costing out your menu is part of the equation; designing it smartly brings it all full circle.
A well-thought-out menu design will bring about sales increases, sometimes in the double-digits. The key is to produce classy, eye-catching pieces that convey your quality, brand and image.
Remember, your menu is a marketing piece. Its performance should be scrutinized the same way you critique the results generated by your flyers, newspaper ads, door hangers, etc.
Perception is reality in your customers’ eyes. If your menu looks amateurish and boring, your guests will unconscientiously think your operation is amateurish and boring. If it sizzles with color, photos, stories and mouth-watering descriptions of your entrées … Well, you get the picture.
Many of my single-unit clients have been asked if they were part of a larger franchise company because of how refined their image happens to be. Trust me, putting a pretty face on your current menu will do good things to your top line sales. Menus are like pizzeria managers — they are either moneymakers or money losers. Pretty menus coupled with current and updated data, and backed up with period reports, are guaranteed to generate gobs of new cash you may be leaving on the table today. Get started!
Big Dave Ostrander owned a highly successful independent pizzeria before becoming a consultant, speaker and internationally sought-after trainer. He is a monthly contributor to Pizza Today.
DEAL BREAKER
Seven tips for renegotiating your lease

BY ROBERT LILLEGARD
PHOTOS BY RICK DAUGHERTY
While the recession is coming to an end, many operators are still struggling. The good news? Your landlord is feeling the squeeze, too. According to the National Association of Realtors, retail vacancy rates nationwide were at 12.6 percent in the fourth quarter of 2011, and retail rents actually declined during the year. With empty space everywhere, it’s easier than ever to renegotiate your lease.
Real estate agent Jim Ronding has worked with several restaurants and recently sold a building to VIP Pizza in Superior, Wisconsin. He says the downturn has made real estate deals easier for tenants.
“There are more vacancies now than there have been in the last five years,” Ronding says, adding that it’s definitely a buyers market.”
How much can you expect to save? While that depends on your location (retail vacancies in San Francisco, for example, were only 3.7 percent last year), smart operators in most areas are in a position to save significantly. Ronding, for instance, has seen local rents fall over 20 percent from peak years.
There’s “some of the retail where the high-end traffic is $24 a foot,” Ronding says. “If you’re paying that much in rent per foot you have to be honest with the landlord. $24 a foot space is probably now $19 a foot.”
So how should you as an operator go about approaching your landlord? Here are tips for making sure you get the best deal you can.
When it comes to leasing, timing is crucial. If your pizzeria is struggling, you want to move quickly. Brad Erickson, owner of Duluth, Minnesota’s Vitta Pizza, says landlords are willing to cut their tenants a break immediately to save themselves the hassle of finding someone new.
“A lot of landlords will renegotiate just not to have a new tenant in there,” Erickson says. “And (high turnover) is a black eye on the space. They don’t want that. They want stability and good tenants that pay their rent and don’t give them a lot of headaches.”
Have an honest talk with your landlord, and be ready to prove your case with your balance sheets. It’s embarrassing to admit that you’re not doing well, but your landlord is on your side and probably willing to accommodate you.
If you’ve been successful in spite of the recession, however, you won’t be able to use the pity approach. Instead, run down the clock to around 18 months before your lease is set to expire before starting talks. That way, you’re close enough that your landlord will start feeling the heat, but not so close that you can’t walk away from the deal and find a new place if you need to.
“The smart ones are going out there before their lease is up, with plenty of time,” Ronding says. “If you do it with three months to go, they know you’re not going anywhere.”
Any landlord would rather work with a good tenant than a bad one. Do you pay your rent on time? Are you easy to deal with? If not, start thinking about ways you can improve before you start throwing down requests.
“If you’re going to attempt to renegotiate your rent, you’ve got to know your landlord,” Erickson says, “How much do they value you as a tenant?”
Once you’ve nailed the basics, little niceties like holiday cards or a free pizza dinner for your landlord’s family can further smooth out rough edges. And don’t be afraid to play two landlords against each other. “You have to know your market,” Minnesota-based real estate lawyer Paul Kilgore says. “I would never tell a tenant not to shop around. If it’s a tenant’s market it can be to their advantage.”
Start talking to other businesses and look for places you could move if you needed to. Even if you’re hoping to stay in your existing space, it’s to your advantage to look at other options.
“They’ve got to be able to convince the landlord that they’ve got other options,” Kilgore says. “For example, if there’s a new shopping area that’s being constructed nearby, the landlord may have to worry.”
Once you’ve gotten your landlord on your side and learned your options, think about the ways you could structure a deal. The most common approach is a cut in rent in exchange for a lease extension — you stay seven more years and your landlord cuts your rent. But now is the time to consider a package deal. Could you shovel the sidewalks in exchange for two more parking spaces? Would your landlord be willing to build you an office in exchange for another year on the lease? Since it will be several years until your next lease renewal, make the most of the opportunity while you have it.
A weak economy means strong tenants, and that can translate into major savings. So find a good lawyer, consider your options, and strike a deal with your landlord. After all, you’ve probably had to cut prices for your customers —why shouldn’t you get a break too?
“It’s worse than it was last year, but prices are so low that people are starting to get a little bit of faith here,” Ronding says. “There’s some good deals out there. People are still going to go out and have a pizza.”
Three Big Mistakes When Signing A Lease
Not getting counsel. Since a lease is such a big investment you need a good commercial real estate agent, a quality real estate lawyer, or both, says Brad Erickson, owner of Duluth, Minnesota’s Vitta Pizza.
“Especially people on a tight budget, they may be apt not to hire a lawyer,” Erickson says. “They’ll think, ‘No, that’s too expensive.’ That could save you thousands, even tens of thousands of dollars in the long run.”
Not looking carefully at the lease. Especially if lawyers are involved, lease language can be quite hostile to tenants. Landlords can ask for personal guarantees or even prevent you from selling your business. So, it pays to look carefully at every aspect of your agreement—and then fight for a good deal.
“Assume nothing,” Erickson says. “It sounds so simple but it isn’t. My lease negotiation didn’t happen overnight — it probably took two months. You’ve got to put your fighting gloves on.”
Being unrealistic. While it’s good to drive a hard bargain, make sure not to overestimate your position. Even in a down market, newer or less stable operators shouldn’t expect to get prime terms. You may have to start smaller than you think. “I think the tenant has to be realistic about how long the term of the lease is,” says real estate lawyer Paul Kilgore. “If it’s a start up business maybe signing on to a 10-year lease isn’t such a good idea.”
Robert Lillegard is a Duluth, Minnesota, freelance writer.
Out in The Open
Letting employees in on your books fosters goodwill

BY ANNEMARIE MANNION
PHOTOS BY RICK DAUGHERTY
Nick Sarillo, owner of Nick’s Pizza and Pub, takes home $120,000 a year, and he doesn’t care who knows it, including –– and perhaps most importantly –– the 200 full and part-time staffers who work for him.
Sarillo, who operates pizzerias in Elgin and Crystal Lake, Illinois, has an open books policy, which means he makes available to his employees every detail of how his business operates financially, from daily sales information to how much paper napkins cost to how much he and his managers earn and how much it costs to rent space.
Ian’s Pizza, which has four locations in Madison and Milwaukee in Wisconsin and Chicago, also follows an open books policy.
“We find it breeds a culture where employees take a bigger interest in the company and have a bigger interest in the success of the company,” says Nick Martin, general manager at one of Ian’s two locations in Madison, Wisconsin.
Since establishing open books in 2002, Sarillo says his business has seen profitability increase from an average of between 8 and 9 percent to between 12 and 16 percent. At its highest, pre-recession point, he says profitability was 18 percent.
“The average net profitability in the restaurant industry is three percent. With open books, profitability goes through the roof,” says Rudy Miick, president of Miick and Associates in Boulder, Colorado, which worked with Nick’s to put open books in place.
The policy allows employees to see and understand financial information, to take a role in trying to push those numbers in a positive direction, and to have a share in profits or in some other way reap a reward from the company’s success, such as with a party or a salary increase, says Miick.
The main cost centers around which information is shared, and which have the most potential for being moved in either a negative or positive direction, include food, beverage and labor costs. Other information on money going out also is shared, but is not as variable, like the cost of renting a business space, Sarillo says.
When instituting the policy, Sarillo also established a daily cost system that provides up-to-the-minute numbers and started holding weekly meetings for staff that he calls huddles, at which they review financial information and set goals.
Each employee takes responsibility for a line item such as lunch sales or average amount of check per guest. The employee reports previous data on that line item, such as how the restaurant fared the week, month or year before on that day of the week; looks at what factors might affect that number, such as an impending snowstorm or a weekend homecoming game; and forecasts a goal.
“We have everyone from 16 year olds to 40 year olds involved in our numbers,” Sarillo says. “It energizes the team. It gives them something where they feel like they have a real impact on the business.”
Sarillo says he has white boards at the meetings on which important financial information is outlined. “If there’s any area that needs attention, we’ll put it on the board,” he says.
Knowing how much the owner earns also dispels any misconceptions employees may have that a business just opens its doors and the owner rakes in the dough.
“When the team comes in and sees that a pizzeria is really busy, they think those pizzas, at $10 a piece, is pure profit,” says Miick. “This takes away any sort of misunderstanding from the team and we get to deal with real, hard data.”
It also helps staff better understand why when a shift is slow, the restaurant may need to send some employees home.
“It energizes our people to be the best crew and do the highest number of sales they can,” says Martin. “They’ll say, ‘Look at all the sales we did with just this few number of people.’ And any employee can punch in their employee code and see what our labor costs are. They understand why they’re being cut on a slow night.”
Both Martin and Sarillo agree that the most challenging aspect of the open books policy is putting in the time and effort to educate staff in what those financial numbers mean.
“There is a big teaching aspect to open books. Employees get a crash course in bookkeeping and finance,” says Martin. “We hire a lot of college students, and for a lot of them it’s their first real job. It’s great for them to see how a real business operates.”
“It’s a matter of getting in the habit of having those weekly meetings,” Sarillo adds. “The hard part is getting started and you have to be disciplined to not give up.”
Armed with knowledge, employees are more likely to make better financial decisions even in small details, advocates say. “They aren’t going to grab a stack of paper napkins when they just need two,” Miick says.
Another challenge of the policy can be assembling a management team that is willing to share information. “You need to have managers who aren’t afraid to be open and transparent,” Sarillo says.
Employees at Nick’s are rewarded with the potential for profit sharing that can range from as little as $2 to up to about $120. “Every four weeks there’s a potential for a bonus,” says Sarillo.
Those amounts are paid based on how many hours an employee works and other factors in their control such as taking additional leadership training classes offered by the pizzeria or getting a certification.
“A server who wants a pay raise goes after a certification to be a bartender and that makes them more valuable to the restaurant,” says Miick.
Sarillo adds that even during trying economic times, he has found open books to be a benefit. “When things are down it’s almost like you don’t want to tell anyone,” he says. “But having more heads working on a problem are better than one. The team rallies together.”
For people used to playing their financial numbers –– representing either increased or decreased performance –– close to the vest, Miick says embracing the concepts behind open books may be hard, but worth it. He says: “It’s counter-intuitive, but it works.”
Annemarie Mannion is a freelance writer living in the Chicago area. She specializes in business and health stories.
What if…
Protecting your restaurant with adequate insurance

BY DENISE GREER, ASSOCIATE EDITOR
PHOTOS BY JOSH KEOWN
Catastrophe — it’s one of those words you try not to utter in the restaurant industry. But it’s hard not to think about “what if there’s a fire, someone gets hurt in my place, the delivery driver has an accident?” or the infinite number of other scenarios that could take place.
That is when your insurance policy should set your mind at ease. But, is your coverage good enough?
For Dan Collier, owner of Rusty’s Pizza Parlor in Ventura, California, the answer was “no,” costing his shop $100,000 more than an insurance claim paid after a fire. He says he didn’t understand that his $250,000 contents insured amount didn’t cover his building.
“A good insurance broker will review your lease and let you know what is required by the lease,” Collier says of coverage requirements.
Karen Kiernan, business insurance agent with Willis Insurance in Concord, California, agrees. “Every lease is just a little bit different,” she says. She suggests bringing a lease with you when you visit an agent so it can be reviewed line by line. Some leases require tenants to pay for glass breakage or even wiring and lighting.
“Usually if there is a loss, you get a shell to start with and you have to build out from the shell out,” she says. “If (tenants) are responsible for the air conditioning, heating, lighting, all of the light fixtures, carpet, tile … how much is that if they need to replace that? They need to do an inventory list and they actually need to do it on the replacement cost, not what they anticipate they can get it for as a used item.”
The same goes for business contents. What is the replacement value if you have to buy an item new, whether it’s an oven or tables?
Darryl Reginelli of Reginelli’s Pizzeria in New Orleans, Louisiana, thought his contents were covered by his insurance policy after Hurricane Katrina in 2004, along with food spoilage and business interruption. Much of his claim was denied due to flooding and wind damage that was not covered under his policy.
“We spent $500,000 to redo the store,” he says, adding that he only received about $110,000 from the insurance payout.
With demolition, architect fees and the note on the property, Reginelli says, “By the time we got the shell ready, we spent the insurance.”
When his rates rose astronomically after Katrina, Reginelli got insurance savvy about selecting a policy from an insurance company that he felt was stronger, more aggressive and more pro-business. When Hurricane Gustav damaged a Reginelli’s location in 2008, he was confident in his coverage. “They sent out adjusters right away, getting a payment within 30 days,” he says, making interaction with his new insurance company a positive one.Reginelli’s and Rusty’s had a common problem with their insurance: they were underinsured. Kiernan says being underinsured is a frequent issue. For instance, an owner may have $250,000 in business improvements and business personal property and they only insure for $100,000.
“If they did have a loss…it’s harder for them to rebuild their store if they are working with a value that is half of what they should have had.”
Kiernan says there are key areas of insurance coverage that a pizzeria should have:
property
general liability
auto
workers’ compensation.
All areas but the workers compensation can be grouped into one business coverage package, Kiernan says. The workers compensation carries its own policy.
Kiernan says auto is an important coverage to not be overlooked. “That is probably the No. 1 exposure that they do have because they have their employees on the road at all times and in all weather conditions.”
She also warns that expecting an employee’s personal insurance will kick in is risky. “More and more carriers on the personal line side are adding an exclusion into the policy that says any type of delivery or pizza delivery specifically — then there is no coverage afforded on the policy.”
There are also add-on policy items that might be pertinent to your business specifically. Kiernan says that some of the hot topics right now are data compromise and credit card security. It’s a good idea to see if these areas are covered in your general policy.
Once a plan is in place, Collier advises: “You should meet once per year and discuss any changes to your business. When you leave the meeting, you should know exactly what you are covered for and what you have decided to leave to risk.”
Denise Greer is associate editor of Pizza Today.
Is your business properly insured?
The Insurance Information Institute, a nonprofit organization supported by the insurance industry, offers four important questions to ask your insurance agent to be sure you are adequately insured:
1) Do I have enough insurance to rebuild my business property and replace all merchandise possessions? This includes all personal business property — furniture and fixtures, machinery and equipment; stock; all personal property owned by you and used in your business; labor, materials or services furnished or arranged by you on the personal property of others; improvements you have made (if a tenant); and leased personal property that you have a contractual obligation to insure.
2) Do I have enough insurance to protect the personal property of my employees? This is an additional coverage area to a general policy.
3) Do I have enough insurance to keep my business open? The types of business interruption insurance include: business income coverage, extra income coverage and contingent business interruption insurance.
4) Do I have enough insurance to protect my assets from a lawsuit? A commercial general liability insurance policy covers four areas of business liability claims—bodily injury, property damage, personal injury and advertising injury.

Photo By Josh Keown
Amid Chicago’s pizza-loving populace, Lou Malnati’s Pizzeria stands tall. A frequent stop for Windy City inhabitants as well as visitors seeking Chicago’s famed deep-dish pizza, Malnati’s runs 34 stores across the Chicago area, most offering a mix of dine-in, carryout and delivery.
With such volume, Malnati’s touches thousands of pieces of consumer data each day, particularly credit card info, and safeguarding that data remains a top priority for Malnati’s brass.
“We know the restaurant industry is ripe for data theft and the ramifications of a breach can be enormous,” says Jordan von Kluck, Lou Malnati’s IT director for the last eight years. Data breaches remain an ever- increasing, ever-evolving issue for restaurants of all types. According to Trustwave’s 2012 Global Security Report, the food and beverage industry made up 44 percent of data breach investigations in 2011, the highest percentage of all industries.
While a potential breach can damage both brand reputation and consumer confidence, those penalties take a backseat to the potentially crippling financial consequences. “The credit card companies can make your life miserable if you get hacked,” says Avivah Litan, a fraud expert and analyst with Connecticut-based Gartner. “There are fines for noncompliance, the breach, charge-back fraud, and the credit card companies may even increase your interchange fees.”
John Pearson, director of data security and compliance for NCR Corporation’s hospitality division, says restaurants are frequent data theft targets for two reasons: Americans love to eat and love to pay with credit. “Combined with a low cost of entry and quick turnaround time to hard cash, the credit card fraud business has criminals constantly seeking a supply source of credit card data,” Pearson says.
While most pizzeria operators focus on serving high-quality pies alongside outstanding customer service, few possess the tech-savvy skills to ward off cybercrime. “Criminal hackers know this and target their tools to find restaurants with weak or no security measures in place,” Pearson says.
And the national names can be just as vulnerable as the independents. Trustwave’s report identified more than one-third of 2011 investigations occurred in a franchise business. To address the increasing array of data breaches, the credit card processing industry hosts a set of 12 requirements called the Payment Card Industry Data Security Standards (PCI DSS). Meeting PCI DSS is required for all who accept and process credit cards.
Assuming a restaurateur is using a validated PCI Payment Application (PA)-DSS POS solution, data theft most often happens one of three ways.
First, hackers snag data at the point of authorization, oftentimes without every visiting the restaurant. As all POS solutions must hold card data in memory just prior to sending an authorization to the processor, savvy criminal hackers can gain administrative rights to the system, frequently accomplished through the Internet connection, and access the POS system’s contents.
Hackers “look for weaknesses in remote access software, the operating system, (or) the lack of a properly configured firewall,” Pearson says.
Criminals might also install a device that steals cardholder data upon the swipe, called “skimming.” In some cases, the device might be a rogue look-alike; in others, the inspection seal might be broken or there may be an additional connector cable.
“Time and time again, these simple security basics are overlooked, which leads to compromise,” PCI Security Standards Council general manager Bob Russo says.
Finally, there’s the risk of old- fashioned data theft by dishonest employees. Some estimates hold that 20 percent of reported data breaches occur at the exchange of the credit card from customer to employee, a particularly contentious point at many dine-in eateries where the customer’s card can disappear from view for minutes at a time.
The best way to minimize data theft, security experts agree, is to follow PCI DSS guidelines, which include simple measures such as changing passwords on the applications and devices used to accept and process credit card payments every 90 days and regularly inspecting POS equipment. operators should alsoseek business partners and technology vendors present on the PCI Security Standards list.“ by doing so, you can keep this data safe from criminals and everyone can avoid the financial and reputational fallout that results from its compromise,” Russo says, adding that the PCI Council has a special Web site geared toward small businesses (www.pcisecuritystandards.org/smb/).
Additionally, operators should use PA-DSS validated software that is supported by the vendor; install a commercial grade hardware firewall that is actively managed and tightly controlled; and use secure remote access only when necessary.
“The best way to cut off a lot of threats is strong perimeter security,” says von Kluck, adding that Lou Malnati’s also purges old information on a systematic basis and educates staff on proper handling of credit card information to further minimize trouble. “PCI compliance is the starting point, but we’ll take the extra precautions to protect ourselves and our customers.”
Operators should also install and update antivirus software, remove unused software, disable unnecessary features, and limit activity on the POS and payments systems to business use alone. “Do these things first, then focus on PCI DSS and re-assess your approach annually to adjust to industry changes,” Pearson advises.
Protect the POS
Like any technology, POS systems continue evolving at a rapid pace, a reality that demands operators maintain and regularly update the POS system to both leverage its profit-building capabilities and protect consumer data.
“POS systems need to be re- viewed regularly to ensure they are operating at peak performance,” says security expert John Pearson. “As a gas stove may become a hazard due to a leak which develops over time, a POS system may become a hazard due to a defect or vulnerability which is discovered in the operating system or in a hardware component over time.”
Pearson calls POS security an “ongoing action” and urges operators to respect two rules:
maintain a relationship with the POS vendor and religiously follow their maintenance advice.
“Any business who does not properly secure their POS and network,” Pearson says, “might as well open their doors and hang
a neon sign to the world saying, ‘Rob me!’”
Chicago-based writer Daniel P. Smith has covered business issues and best practices for a variety of trade publications, newspapers, and magazines.

Why bother with portion control? Well, do you like money? I do, and I like to keep as much of it as I can.
Implementing a simple and concise portion-control program can literally save you tens of thousands of dollars! Tens of thousands of dollars that you already have and are let slipping through your fingers and right out the door in front of you. Right at this very moment pizzas are walking out your door with too much on them. Pizzas loaded down with your cash!
Chances are that right now in your restaurant you have about four different types of offenders who are over-portioning your pizzas. Do you recognize any of these characters?
The Artist: This particular pizza maker is sure that each and every pizza he or she makes is a beautiful work of art. Even though you’ve personally shown this employee exactly how much cheese, sausage and pepperoni to put on every pizza, there are no written guidelines or charts to follow, so he follows his artistic inspiration. Every pizza is different than the last and none has the correct amount of toppings on it. You probably have at least one of these “artists” in your shop.
Mr. Clueless: Food is cheap, right? Cheese is like, what 50 cents a pound or something, right? Or so thinks Mr. Clueless. This is one of your typical employees who thinks because you are a restaurant you get everything really cheap, everything is a “tax write off” and businesses make a ton of money anyway. This is the guy who scrapes all the cheese out of the catch pan and into the trash instead of back into the cheese bin. This is the guy who likes to “load up” the pizzas the way he would like to have them made. How many of these guys are working for you right now?
The Regular Joe: This is a normal guy, just like you and me—the high school kid starting his first job or the new hire who wants to really work hard and impress the boss. This is the guy who would love to make a pizza the right way, a perfect pizza made the way you want him to make it. But he can’t. The key employee that you had training him showed him one way; you showed him another; and then the manager showed him yet another way. His pizzas are not what you want going out your door either. The “Regular Joes” are the bulk of the portion offenders that you have working for you, and they’re trying hard to please.
You: Yes, the worst offender of them all. If you are free-throwing toppings on your pizzas, then I can guarantee that you are either over-portioning or under-portioning your pizzas 99 percent of the time. It’s impossible to free-throw toppings and get them 100 percent correct, 100 percent of the time. Worst of all you are setting a bad example for your staff. (I know you’re thinking, “I’ve been doing this for 149 years and I can put 10 ounces of cheese on a 16-inch pizza every … single … time.” Well, I’m sorry to burst your bubble, but you can’t.)
So, is your staff to blame for you losing money on over portioned pizzas as well as subs, salads, desserts, draft beers, wines, etc? Absolutely not. Most of the time your staff is not over-portioning or under-portioning on purpose or with malicious intentions in mind. It is just a simple systems failure.
Right now I’m paying almost $3 per pound for whole-milk mozzarella and I make about 4,000 pizzas per month at each of my pizzerias. If I were to put 1 ounce too much on every pizza, the cost to my bottom line would be $760 per month or $9,120 per year, per pizzeria! Just in cheese!
How can they be sure to get it right every single time and stop wasting money? It’s very simple really: a portion-control program. Putting together a portion-control program for your operation can be as simple or as complex as you want, but the basics are always the same. Here are the steps:
Information: You need to give employees the information they need. This can be done with portion charts on the make line or recipe books at prep stations. Just make sure the exact portion requirements are printed and in plain site. Staff members need to know, for example, that 8 ounces of cheese is what is expected on that 14-inch pizza, and they need to be able to look that number up immediately if necessary.
Tools: Once your pizza makers know the correct portions they need hit those numbers every time. This can only be done with tools such as digital scales and measuring cups. Their use must be mandatory.
Monitoring: Once you’ve trained your staff on how much of what goes on each item and given them to tools to get it done, you need to make sure they are actually implementing the portion-control system. A close eye on a busy night will tell you who is following the rules and who is not, but you can take it one step further and document ingredients usage with your POS. Taking advantage of the inventory module and portion-control features of your POS will allow you to keep an eye on your inventory and measure how close your staff is coming to hitting your portion goals.
Portion control is simple and easy. Believe it or not, your employees will grow to like it once it becomes routine. It takes the guessing out of their jobs; it makes training easier; and perhaps most importantly of all, they may get a boss who is in a good mood more often.
Michael Shepherd, who operates three independent pizzerias in northwest Ohio, will give an hour-long seminar on portion control on Wednesday, March 20, at Pizza Expo. He’ll also speak on Thursday, March 21, on the topic of low-cost marketing that generates added business.
For more details on International Pizza Expo 2013, visit www.pizzaexpo.com.
Related

The convenience of ordering pizza online is in such high customer demand that any pizzeria without an online ordering system should question how serious it is about growing business and profits. Offering customers an online ordering system has many benefits, including:
• New customers who prefer online ordering
• Higher ticket averages and sales (our online tickets are worth 25 percent more, on average)
• Increased efficiency due to reduced need for employee order-taking
• Improved customer service because customers can take as much time as they want to place and review an order prior to submission
• Lower marketing investment due to low-cost online ad placement
• Increased ROI due to higher ticket averages, new customers and low-cost marketing
When I first implemented an online ordering system at our pizzeria, online orders grew to 2 percent of total sales just weeks after the launch—and before we sent out a single promotion. Because our online tickets are worth, on average, 25 percent more than our carryout and delivery tickets, online ordering has proven to me that it’s a powerful way to increase profits.
I’ve also learned the importance of choosing an online ordering system wisely in order to maximize profits without requiring a major time investment. The following seven tips will help you select the best online ordering system for your pizzeria.
1. Get A Third-Party Provider
While it's possible to host an online ordering system on your own website, there are definite drawbacks. Maintenance is up to you, and if the system goes down you will have to scramble to fix it—or wait for your web designer to do so at whatever hourly rate he or she charges. Third-party providers specialize in online ordering systems and are therefore less expensive and more responsive to your needs. Moreover, they are accountable for keeping your system running.
2. Excellent Branding
Your online ordering system should allow you to brand the look of the user interface, allowing you to prominently display your logo, address, phone number, website, company colors and other brand markers. The customer experience should be seamless; patrons should not feel they are being redirected to an unknown entity to complete their orders.
3. Ease Of Use
Your online ordering system should be extremely simple for customers to use. They should be able to log in, find what they want quickly and order it in a matter of minutes. It should also be easy for you to update whenever you have special offers, coupons and price changes. The easier your online ordering system is to use the more you can work it to your advantage, and the more customers will enjoy interacting with it. And, ultimately, the more profitable it will be.
4. Selling Tools
Your online ordering system should include selling tools that will help increase your ticket averages. Suggestive selling, interactive promotions and other sales tools should be presented in an intuitive fashion to the users. For example, any customer ordering bread sticks should be prompted automatically to opt for an extra sauce, and all customers should be asked if they'd like to add soda to their orders. Consider your online ordering system to be a marketing investment that carries an expected return.
5. Integration
The best online ordering systems integrate with your POS to make accounting fast and easy. Yours should also integrate with your kitchen printer, which needs to be outfitted with a buzzer so workers there know when an online order comes in. If properly structured, online ordering shouldn't add a lot of work and it can make your kitchen operations more efficient.
6. Customer Service
Before you make your online ordering solution decision, investigate a provider’s customer service. You want fast and knowledgeable support staff to assist you when you have questions and quickly correct any system malfunctions. You definitely don't want to lose an entire night's worth of online sales waiting for a tech to fix your system. Ask for references and follow up to see if other pizzeria owners would recommend the provider you're considering.
7. Pricing
Finally, pricing should play a role in your decision. As noted, your online ordering system is an investment that is expected to bring a return. The cheapest isn't necessarily the worst, and the most expensive isn't necessarily the best. Seek an online ordering system that satisfies the other six requirements listed here, then factor price into your decision-making process. The goal is to implement an online ordering system that will help you earn more profits in return for a fair investment.
Making the most of online orders is one of three topics Shawn Randazzo will be covering at Pizza Expo 2013. He will also present seminars on maximizing delivery business and building a winning company culture. He is co-owner of Detroit Style Pizza Co. in St. Clair Shores, Mich., and was the 2012 Pizza Maker of the Year winner at Expo’s International Pizza Challenge.
For more details on International Pizza Expo 2013, visit www.pizzaexpo.com.
Related
If you've ever wished you could sit down with a super-successful operator and quiz him about the keys to pizza profits, you'll want to sit in on Pizza Expo 2013's Wednesday morning keynote one-on-one session with $6-Million-Man Bill Jacobs and Pizza Today editor Jeremy White.
Jeremy will be your surrogate at this kick-off to the second day of Expo, March 20. He'll guide the discussion with Jacobs, whose Piece Brewery & Pizzeria in Chicago grosses more than $6 million in sales per year from one unit. You'll learn through this candid insider's exchange why Jacobs sold his successful bagel company and turned to pizza in 2001; how he found the perfect location in a mature pizza market and built revenues; why he's resisted opening a second unit; and much more.
Piece was named Pizza Today's Independent Pizzeria of the Year in 2011 and Jacobs, a Connecticut native who brought New Haven-style pies to the Windy City, has an engaging story to tell. There will be time for questions from the crowd as well during this wide-ranging and insightful keynote session.
Visit PizzaExpo.com to learn more about next year's show. .
Related

At Pizza Expo® you’ll find 5½ football fields of pizza-related products, services and equipment, as well as leading industry experts, consultants and analysts who are all willing to share new ideas and insights on everything you need to adapt, react and prosper in today’s economy. At next year’s show, we’ve added several new speakers to the lineup of experts keeping you abreast of trends and best practices in pizzeria management.
Here are just a few of the new speakers and topics we have planned for our 29th annual show, March 19–21, 2013:
“Famous Joe” Carlucci, owner of Joe’s Pizzeria, will tell you how to expand your catering business and boost your bottom line.
Roberta Matuson, president of Human Resource Solutions, is the author of the highly acclaimed book, Suddenly in Charge: Managing Up, Managing Down, Succeeding All Around, a Washington Post Top Five Business Book for Leaders. Roberta will show you how to “Make Dollars and Sense Out of Gen Y”, as well as present a second session on strategies for business growth.
Jeff Mease, founder & CEO of One World Enterprises, which includes Pizza X, Lennie’s, The Bloomington Brewing Co. and One World Catering & Events, will take you through the process of deciding whether or not to open a second unit.
Mike Bausch, owner of Andolini’s Pizzeria and 2011 Tulsa Restaurateur of the Year, will tell you how to manage, motivate and empower Gen Y to take your pizzeria to the next level.
T. J. Schier, president and founder of Incentivize Solutions and S.M.A.R.T. Restaurant Group, is one of the foremost authorities on restaurant training tactics. He’ll teach you the “Training Tactics of Pizza Pros” that really work and give a second seminar on 10 tactics to make your front line improve your bottom line.
Beckee Moreland, director of gluten-free industry initiatives for the National Foundation for Celiac Awareness, will disclose how gluten-free products are impacting foodservice and creating new menu opportunities. She’ll discuss the potential of gluten-free pizza in the working pizzeria kitchen.
The bottom line is there’s always something new at Pizza Expo that can improve your pizzeria… a new marketing idea, technological innovation or menu item. As always, our commitment to you, our partners, is to continue to grow and improve every facet of Pizza Expo… from the trade show floor to our networking events and contests. In fact, if you don’t come away from International Pizza Expo 2013 with new cost-saving or profit-boosting ideas, I’ll refund your registration fee. All you have to do is put it in writing to me and I’ll send you a prompt refund. What other show gives you a money-back guarantee? I’ll tell you, none!
Remember International Pizza Expo® is a tax-deductible working vacation.
For more information on our contests or to register, please call (800) 489-8324 or visit our Website at www.PizzaExpo.com.
It’s all pizza and it’s all for YOU!
Best regards,
Bill Oakley
Executive Vice President
Bill OAKLEY
More Articles

If you’re a student of the pizza industry, chances are you’ve probably heard of a little show called International Pizza Expo. If you were one of the nearly 7,000 people who attended, you experienced first-hand the knowledge, expertise and excitement the annual show brought to the Las Vegas Convention Center last March.
“This year we had attendees from all 50 states, Puerto Rico, Canada and 23 other countries,” says Bill Oakley, executive vice president of Macfadden Protech, parent company of International Pizza Expo. “We even had a group from the largest pizza company in Mongolia, Mr. Pizza, make the long trip to Las Vegas to experience everything Pizza Expo has to offer. As a result of their experience, they’ve already implemented some of the ideas they picked up at Expo.” Show organizers say that 25 percent of show-goers were first-time attendees, and the show designated a day devoted entirely to those looking to start pizzerias. “Based on the comments to date, it was a huge success with 684 attendees taking part in this day-long educational program,” Oakley says. “This stimulating day of educational sessions and workshops was followed by a reception where attendees could network with fellow ‘newbies,’ industry experts and event sponsors.” Keynote speakers for the three-day show included Nick Sarillo, owner of Nick’s Pizza & Pub in Illinois, and Marla Topliff, president of Rosati’s Pizza. Bruce Allar, vice president of meetings and conferences for Macfadden Protech, says the 2012 line-up of Pizza Expo speakers placed more emphasis on successful pizzeria owners, making International Pizza Expo a true peer-to-peer experience. “The buzz of activity never abated among buyers and sellers on the show floor, or among pizza professionals networking and learning at other Expo gatherings,” says Allar. “Pizza Expo maintained a powerful momentum from the opening bell on Tuesday morning all the way to its conclusion on Thursday afternoon.”
Contestants vied for supremacy in the International Pizza Challenge, a series of culinary competitions designed to highlight the best of the best.
In the traditional division, regional prelimary winners included:
Reál Varela, Brooklyn Pizza & Pasta, Los Angeles, CA – Southwest Region
Tim Silva, Pizza My Heart, Los Gatos, CA – Northwest Region
Mark Briand, Bondi’s Pizza, London, Ont. – Mid-America Region
Giovanni Gagliardi, Pizzeria La Leggenda, San Felice, Italy – International Region
Marlene Smith, Pizza Palace Plus, Emporium, PA – Northeast Region
Keith Coffman, Lost River Pizza Co., Bowling Green, KY – Southeast Region
Frank Baird, Franco’s Pizza, Chardon, OH – Wild Card
Silva took home the title of World’s Best Traditional Pizza Winner.
In the Non-Traditional Division, preliminary winners were:
Joleen Pisner, AJ Barile’s Chicago Pizza, Yucaipa, CA – Southwest Region
John Cammack, Lefty’s Grill, Nevada City, CA – Northwest Region
Rick Mines, Nima’s Pizza & More, Gassville, AR – Southeast Region
John Gutekanst, Avalanche Pizza, Athens, OH – Mid-America Region
Andrew Scudera, Goodfella’s Brick Oven Pizza, Staten Island, NY – Northeast Region
Tsutomu Inayoshi, Home Delivered Pizza, Aichi, Japan – International Region
Scudera took home the title of World’s Best Non-Traditional Pizza.
In the new American-Pan division, finalists included:
Shawn Randazzo, Cloverleaf Pizza of St. Clair, St. Clair Shores, MI – 1st Place
Matthew Heard, Humble Pie, Edmond, OK – 2nd Place
Alex Abellan, Pizza Zone, Victoria, BC – 3rd Place
The Italian-Style Division Finals Winners were:
Umberto Fornito, Italy – 1st Place
Saverio Ciampi, Italy – 2nd Place
Alessandra DeBellis, Italy – 3rd Place
Finalists from each division competed in a blind-box challenge in the Pizza Maker of the Year Bake-Off. The competition’s mystery ingredient, Cattlemen’s Carolina Tangy Gold Barbeque Sauce, proved to be a challenge for the four finalists, who presented the judges with unique pizzas created from a table of provided ingredients. Shawn Randazzo of Cloverleaf Pizza of St. Clair in St. Clair Shores, Michigan, walked away with the title of World Champion Pizza Maker and a cash prize. The International Pizza Challenge also pitted four former winners –– all industry experts in their own right. Tony Gemignani of San Francisco-based Tony’s Pizza Napoletana was named the “Best of the Best” Master Pizza Maker of the Year.
The popular World Pizza Games trials culminated at an event on Wednesday, March 13. Winners were:
1st Division Freestyle Acrobatics: Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan
Masters Division Freestyle Acrobatics: Jay Schuurman, Pizza Rock, Sacramento, CA
Fastest Dough Stretch: Ingrosso Simone, Pizzeria Del Mille, Italy
Fastest Box Folding: Jimmy Xang, Pizza Guys, Rancho Cordova, CA
Largest Dough Stretch: Mario Sigmorile, Pizzeria Del Centro, Italy
Longest Spin: Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan
Throughout the three-day event, show attendees visited sponsoring booths and turned in gamepieces for the $20,000 MEGA BUCKS Giveaway. Frank Sastano of Tulsa, Oklahoma-based Savastano’s Pizzeria took home the cash prize.
“This year’s Pizza Expo was the biggest and best show ever, breaking records for attendance with 6,901 pizza professionals, 940 booths and tons of excitement,” says Oakley. “Words just don’t do it justice; you really have to experience Pizza Expo to understand the interaction that takes place between our attendees and exhibitors. Everyone is truly anxious and motivated to get into discussions about new products, new technology, the latest industry trends and hot-button issues facing the industry today.”
More Articles
Exciting new seminars, workshops and competitions are in store for you at International Pizza Expo 2013, at the Las Vegas Convention Center, March 19-21 in Las Vegas, Nevada.
BREAKING NEWS: Pizza Expo will kick off with a special appearance by Chef Robert Irvine, host of Food Network’s prime-time series Restaurant Impossible.
A Craft Beer powerhouse panel discussion will make its debut at the 2013 Pizza Expo. Want to build a profitable craft beer program? Don’t miss this seminar.
The World Pizza Game return with the addition of a new “triathlon” category, comprised of box folding, dough tossing for a 16-inch screen and dough tossing for a 24-inch screen.
Find out more about the new additions to the 2013 Pizza Expo by clicking here.
To view a full schedule at a glance, click here.
International Pizza Expo® 2013, scheduled for March 19-21 at the Las Vegas Convention Center, is the oldest and largest annual gathering of pizza professionals—and will draw approximately 7,000 attendees and 450 exhibitors to a show floor covering an area equal to 5½ football fields. In its 29th year, Pizza Expo attracts top independent and chain operators to do business in the exhibit hall, attend education sessions and take part in pizza-making competitions.
Related

Pizza Expo® has something for everyone –– whether you’re looking for new ways to create revenue or just want to find out about the latest industry trends and products. The one thing that really separates Pizza Expo from all of the other general foodservice shows is the fact that there’s only one tradeshow where you’ll find over 80 industry specific seminars, workshops and demonstrations, 450 exhibiting companies and 1,000 booths all devoted to pizza … and that’s Pizza Expo. Throw in the best networking event in the industry –– the Beer and Bull Idea Exchange –– along with all of our other great contests and competitions, such as the World Pizza Games, International Pizza Challenge, and the Great $20,000 Mega Bucks Giveaway, and you can see why industry veterans call Pizza Expo the “Show of Shows.”
This year’s Expo shattered all of our previous attendance records with nearly 7,000 attendees and 4,000 exhibitor personnel. And the international presence was astounding, with attendees from Australia, Brazil, Canada, China, Finland, Germany, Italy, Japan, Mexico, Mongolia, Norway and Spain –– just to name a few –– making it a truly worldly experience for everyone! Pizza is indeed a universal food, and there was plenty of it to be found on our show floor that measured over 5½ football fields.
If you didn’t get the chance to attend this year’s show, you still have the opportunity to listen and learn by ordering recordings of some or all of the 50-plus educational sessions that were offered. You can order a Multimedia DVD-ROM or download directly to your iPod by going to the InteliQuest Media website at www. intelliquestmedia.com. It’s also a good way to revisit a seminar to hear what you missed or listen to one you couldn’t attend –– and we know there were several you probably wish you could have made it to during the show.
In addition, I want to thank everyone who attended this year’s Expo. Without the continued support of pizzeria operators, suppliers, manufacturers and industry experts, we could not have achieved the measure of success that makes International Pizza Expo the must- attend event of the year.
It’s never too early to start making plans for next year’s show, slated for March 19 – 21, 2013, at the Las Vegas Convention Center, so save the date! We’re already making plans for next year’s Expo, and we think you’ll be pleased with the changes we’re making. If you have any ideas or suggestions on how we can improve the show, please give me a call at (800) 489-8324 or drop me a note at BOakley@PizzaToday.com.
Last but not least, please remember International Pizza Expo is a tax- deductible working vacation.
It’s all Pizza and it’s all for YOU!
Sincerely,
Bill Oakley
Executive Vice President
More Articles
{module_webapps,24627,i,5374934}More Articles

If you’re a student of the pizza industry, chances are you’ve probably heard of a little show called International Pizza Expo. If you were one of the nearly 7,000 people who attended, you experienced first-hand the knowledge, expertise and excitement the annual show brought to the Las Vegas Convention Center last March.
“This year we had attendees from all 50 states, Puerto Rico, Canada and 23 other countries,” says Bill Oakley, executive vice president of Macfadden Protech, parent company of International Pizza Expo. “We even had a group from the largest pizza company in Mongolia, Mr. Pizza, make the long trip to Las Vegas to experience everything Pizza Expo has to offer. As a result of their experience, they’ve already implemented some of the ideas they picked up at Expo.” Show organizers say that 25 percent of show-goers were first-time attendees, and the show designated a day devoted entirely to those looking to start pizzerias. “Based on the comments to date, it was a huge success with 684 attendees taking part in this day-long educational program,” Oakley says. “This stimulating day of educational sessions and workshops was followed by a reception where attendees could network with fellow ‘newbies,’ industry experts and event sponsors.” Keynote speakers for the three-day show included Nick Sarillo, owner of Nick’s Pizza & Pub in Illinois, and Marla Topliff, president of Rosati’s Pizza. Bruce Allar, vice president of meetings and conferences for Macfadden Protech, says the 2012 line-up of Pizza Expo speakers placed more emphasis on successful pizzeria owners, making International Pizza Expo a true peer-to-peer experience. “The buzz of activity never abated among buyers and sellers on the show floor, or among pizza professionals networking and learning at other Expo gatherings,” says Allar. “Pizza Expo maintained a powerful momentum from the opening bell on Tuesday morning all the way to its conclusion on Thursday afternoon.”
Contestants vied for supremacy in the International Pizza Challenge, a series of culinary competitions designed to highlight the best of the best.
In the traditional division, regional prelimary winners included:
Reál Varela, Brooklyn Pizza & Pasta, Los Angeles, CA – Southwest Region
Tim Silva, Pizza My Heart, Los Gatos, CA – Northwest Region
Mark Briand, Bondi’s Pizza, London, Ont. – Mid-America Region
Giovanni Gagliardi, Pizzeria La Leggenda, San Felice, Italy – International Region
Marlene Smith, Pizza Palace Plus, Emporium, PA – Northeast Region
Keith Coffman, Lost River Pizza Co., Bowling Green, KY – Southeast Region
Frank Baird, Franco’s Pizza, Chardon, OH – Wild Card
Silva took home the title of World’s Best Traditional Pizza Winner.
In the Non-Traditional Division, preliminary winners were:
Joleen Pisner, AJ Barile’s Chicago Pizza, Yucaipa, CA – Southwest Region
John Cammack, Lefty’s Grill, Nevada City, CA – Northwest Region
Rick Mines, Nima’s Pizza & More, Gassville, AR – Southeast Region
John Gutekanst, Avalanche Pizza, Athens, OH – Mid-America Region
Andrew Scudera, Goodfella’s Brick Oven Pizza, Staten Island, NY – Northeast Region
Tsutomu Inayoshi, Home Delivered Pizza, Aichi, Japan – International Region
Scudera took home the title of World’s Best Non-Traditional Pizza.
In the new American-Pan division, finalists included:
Shawn Randazzo, Cloverleaf Pizza of St. Clair, St. Clair Shores, MI – 1st Place
Matthew Heard, Humble Pie, Edmond, OK – 2nd Place
Alex Abellan, Pizza Zone, Victoria, BC – 3rd Place
The Italian-Style Division Finals Winners were:
Umberto Fornito, Italy – 1st Place
Saverio Ciampi, Italy – 2nd Place
Alessandra DeBellis, Italy – 3rd Place
Finalists from each division competed in a blind-box challenge in the Pizza Maker of the Year Bake-Off. The competition’s mystery ingredient, Cattlemen’s Carolina Tangy Gold Barbeque Sauce, proved to be a challenge for the four finalists, who presented the judges with unique pizzas created from a table of provided ingredients. Shawn Randazzo of Cloverleaf Pizza of St. Clair in St. Clair Shores, Michigan, walked away with the title of World Champion Pizza Maker and a cash prize. The International Pizza Challenge also pitted four former winners –– all industry experts in their own right. Tony Gemignani of San Francisco-based Tony’s Pizza Napoletana was named the “Best of the Best” Master Pizza Maker of the Year.
The popular World Pizza Games trials culminated at an event on Wednesday, March 13. Winners were:
1st Division Freestyle Acrobatics: Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan
Masters Division Freestyle Acrobatics: Jay Schuurman, Pizza Rock, Sacramento, CA
Fastest Dough Stretch: Ingrosso Simone, Pizzeria Del Mille, Italy
Fastest Box Folding: Jimmy Xang, Pizza Guys, Rancho Cordova, CA
Largest Dough Stretch: Mario Sigmorile, Pizzeria Del Centro, Italy
Longest Spin: Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan
Throughout the three-day event, show attendees visited sponsoring booths and turned in gamepieces for the $20,000 MEGA BUCKS Giveaway. Frank Sastano of Tulsa, Oklahoma-based Savastano’s Pizzeria took home the cash prize.
“This year’s Pizza Expo was the biggest and best show ever, breaking records for attendance with 6,901 pizza professionals, 940 booths and tons of excitement,” says Oakley. “Words just don’t do it justice; you really have to experience Pizza Expo to understand the interaction that takes place between our attendees and exhibitors. Everyone is truly anxious and motivated to get into discussions about new products, new technology, the latest industry trends and hot-button issues facing the industry today.”
More Articles
Exciting new seminars, workshops and competitions are in store for you at International Pizza Expo 2013, at the Las Vegas Convention Center, March 19-21 in Las Vegas, Nevada.
BREAKING NEWS: Pizza Expo will kick off with a special appearance by Chef Robert Irvine, host of Food Network’s prime-time series Restaurant Impossible.
A Craft Beer powerhouse panel discussion will make its debut at the 2013 Pizza Expo. Want to build a profitable craft beer program? Don’t miss this seminar.
The World Pizza Game return with the addition of a new “triathlon” category, comprised of box folding, dough tossing for a 16-inch screen and dough tossing for a 24-inch screen.
Find out more about the new additions to the 2013 Pizza Expo by clicking here.
To view a full schedule at a glance, click here.
International Pizza Expo® 2013, scheduled for March 19-21 at the Las Vegas Convention Center, is the oldest and largest annual gathering of pizza professionals—and will draw approximately 7,000 attendees and 450 exhibitors to a show floor covering an area equal to 5½ football fields. In its 29th year, Pizza Expo attracts top independent and chain operators to do business in the exhibit hall, attend education sessions and take part in pizza-making competitions.
Related

Pizza Expo® has something for everyone –– whether you’re looking for new ways to create revenue or just want to find out about the latest industry trends and products. The one thing that really separates Pizza Expo from all of the other general foodservice shows is the fact that there’s only one tradeshow where you’ll find over 80 industry specific seminars, workshops and demonstrations, 450 exhibiting companies and 1,000 booths all devoted to pizza … and that’s Pizza Expo. Throw in the best networking event in the industry –– the Beer and Bull Idea Exchange –– along with all of our other great contests and competitions, such as the World Pizza Games, International Pizza Challenge, and the Great $20,000 Mega Bucks Giveaway, and you can see why industry veterans call Pizza Expo the “Show of Shows.”
This year’s Expo shattered all of our previous attendance records with nearly 7,000 attendees and 4,000 exhibitor personnel. And the international presence was astounding, with attendees from Australia, Brazil, Canada, China, Finland, Germany, Italy, Japan, Mexico, Mongolia, Norway and Spain –– just to name a few –– making it a truly worldly experience for everyone! Pizza is indeed a universal food, and there was plenty of it to be found on our show floor that measured over 5½ football fields.
If you didn’t get the chance to attend this year’s show, you still have the opportunity to listen and learn by ordering recordings of some or all of the 50-plus educational sessions that were offered. You can order a Multimedia DVD-ROM or download directly to your iPod by going to the InteliQuest Media website at www. intelliquestmedia.com. It’s also a good way to revisit a seminar to hear what you missed or listen to one you couldn’t attend –– and we know there were several you probably wish you could have made it to during the show.
In addition, I want to thank everyone who attended this year’s Expo. Without the continued support of pizzeria operators, suppliers, manufacturers and industry experts, we could not have achieved the measure of success that makes International Pizza Expo the must- attend event of the year.
It’s never too early to start making plans for next year’s show, slated for March 19 – 21, 2013, at the Las Vegas Convention Center, so save the date! We’re already making plans for next year’s Expo, and we think you’ll be pleased with the changes we’re making. If you have any ideas or suggestions on how we can improve the show, please give me a call at (800) 489-8324 or drop me a note at BOakley@PizzaToday.com.
Last but not least, please remember International Pizza Expo is a tax- deductible working vacation.
It’s all Pizza and it’s all for YOU!
Sincerely,
Bill Oakley
Executive Vice President
More Articles
If you were in Las Vegas, then you know that International Pizza Expo® was the THE place to be. You could feel the energy and pizza enthusiasm from the moment you walked into the Las Vegas Convention Center.
There was something for everyone at International Pizza Expo® 2012, whether you’re a veteran or just opening your first store. When the show closed on Thursday afternoon, nearly 7,000 buyers had visited more than 930 exhibits and attended more than 80 educational sessions. Rounding out the experience were numerous culinary competitions, contests, demonstrations and other special events.
The Traditional Division of the International Pizza Challenge™ had the following regional winners and wild cards that advanced to the finals:
Real Varela, Brooklyn Pizza & Pasta, Los Angeles, CA - Southwest Region
Tim Silva, Nima’s Pizza My Heart, Los Gatos, CA - Northwest Region
Mark Briand, Bondi’s Pizza, London, Ontario - Mid-America Region
Frank Baird, Franco’s Pizza Plus, Chardon, OH - Wild Card
Giovanni Gagliardi, Pizzeria La Leggenda, San Felice, Italy - International Region
Marlene Smith, Pizza Palace Plus, Emporium, PA - Northeast Region
Keith Coffman, Lost River Pizza Co., Bowling Green, KY, - Southeast Region
The Non-Traditional Division of the International Pizza Challenge™ had the following regional winners and wild cards that advanced to the finals:
Joleen Pisner, AJ Barile’s Chicago Pizza, Yucaipa, CA - Southwest Region
John Cammack, Lefty’s Grill, Nevada City, CA - Northwest Region
Rick Mines, Nima’s Pizza & More, Gassville, AR - Southeast Region
John Gutekanst, Avalanche Pizza, Athens, OH - Mid-America Region
Andrew Scudera, Goodfella’s Brick Oven Pizza, Staten Island, NY -
Northeast Region
Tsutomu Inayoshi, Japanese Home Delivered Pizza, Aichi, Japan -
International Region
Alexandre Brunet, Pizza Stromboli, Montreal, Quebec - Wild Card
Tim Silva, won the Traditional Division and $7,500, Andrew Scudera, won Non-Traditional Division and $7,500, Shawn Randazzo, Cloverleaf Pizza, St. Clair, MI, won the American-Pan Division, and Umberto Fornito won the Italian-Style Division and $4,000.
Following the International Pizza Challenge finals, the winners in each division squared off in the Pizza Maker of the Year competition. Contestants were presented with a table of ingredients from which to choose. There were no restrictions for toppings, but all contestants had to use the secret ingredient – Cattlemen’s® Carolina Tangy Gold™ Barbeque Sauce. Shawn Randazzo walked away with the title of World Champion Pizza Maker of the Year and an additional $5,000. We also introduced a new competition this year called the Best of the Best, where four past World Champions squared off to see who would be named the Master Pizza Maker of the Year. The inaugural winner was Tony Gemignani, of Tony’s Pizza Napoletana in San Francisco, California, who walked away with $2,500.
The Winners in the World Pizza Games® were as follows:
Freestyle Acrobatics –– Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan,
Masters Division Freestyle Acrobatics –– Jay Schuurman, Pizza Rock, Sacramento, CA
Fastest Dough Stretch –– Ingrosso Simone, Pizzeria Del Mille, Italy
Fastest Box Folding –– Jimmy Xang, Pizza Guys, Rancho Cordova, CA
Largest Dough Stretch –– Mario Sigmorile, Pizzeria Del Centro, Italy
Longest Spin –– Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan
Start making plans now to attend International Pizza Expo® 2013, which will again be held at the Las Vegas Convention Center March 19 – 21.
Sincerely,
Bill Oakley
More Articles

If you’re a student of the pizza industry, chances are you’ve probably heard of a little show called International Pizza Expo. If you were one of the nearly 7,000 people who attended, you experienced first-hand the knowledge, expertise and excitement the annual show brought to the Las Vegas Convention Center last March.
“This year we had attendees from all 50 states, Puerto Rico, Canada and 23 other countries,” says Bill Oakley, executive vice president of Macfadden Protech, parent company of International Pizza Expo. “We even had a group from the largest pizza company in Mongolia, Mr. Pizza, make the long trip to Las Vegas to experience everything Pizza Expo has to offer. As a result of their experience, they’ve already implemented some of the ideas they picked up at Expo.” Show organizers say that 25 percent of show-goers were first-time attendees, and the show designated a day devoted entirely to those looking to start pizzerias. “Based on the comments to date, it was a huge success with 684 attendees taking part in this day-long educational program,” Oakley says. “This stimulating day of educational sessions and workshops was followed by a reception where attendees could network with fellow ‘newbies,’ industry experts and event sponsors.” Keynote speakers for the three-day show included Nick Sarillo, owner of Nick’s Pizza & Pub in Illinois, and Marla Topliff, president of Rosati’s Pizza. Bruce Allar, vice president of meetings and conferences for Macfadden Protech, says the 2012 line-up of Pizza Expo speakers placed more emphasis on successful pizzeria owners, making International Pizza Expo a true peer-to-peer experience. “The buzz of activity never abated among buyers and sellers on the show floor, or among pizza professionals networking and learning at other Expo gatherings,” says Allar. “Pizza Expo maintained a powerful momentum from the opening bell on Tuesday morning all the way to its conclusion on Thursday afternoon.”
Contestants vied for supremacy in the International Pizza Challenge, a series of culinary competitions designed to highlight the best of the best.
In the traditional division, regional prelimary winners included:
Reál Varela, Brooklyn Pizza & Pasta, Los Angeles, CA – Southwest Region
Tim Silva, Pizza My Heart, Los Gatos, CA – Northwest Region
Mark Briand, Bondi’s Pizza, London, Ont. – Mid-America Region
Giovanni Gagliardi, Pizzeria La Leggenda, San Felice, Italy – International Region
Marlene Smith, Pizza Palace Plus, Emporium, PA – Northeast Region
Keith Coffman, Lost River Pizza Co., Bowling Green, KY – Southeast Region
Frank Baird, Franco’s Pizza, Chardon, OH – Wild Card
Silva took home the title of World’s Best Traditional Pizza Winner.
In the Non-Traditional Division, preliminary winners were:
Joleen Pisner, AJ Barile’s Chicago Pizza, Yucaipa, CA – Southwest Region
John Cammack, Lefty’s Grill, Nevada City, CA – Northwest Region
Rick Mines, Nima’s Pizza & More, Gassville, AR – Southeast Region
John Gutekanst, Avalanche Pizza, Athens, OH – Mid-America Region
Andrew Scudera, Goodfella’s Brick Oven Pizza, Staten Island, NY – Northeast Region
Tsutomu Inayoshi, Home Delivered Pizza, Aichi, Japan – International Region
Scudera took home the title of World’s Best Non-Traditional Pizza.
In the new American-Pan division, finalists included:
Shawn Randazzo, Cloverleaf Pizza of St. Clair, St. Clair Shores, MI – 1st Place
Matthew Heard, Humble Pie, Edmond, OK – 2nd Place
Alex Abellan, Pizza Zone, Victoria, BC – 3rd Place
The Italian-Style Division Finals Winners were:
Umberto Fornito, Italy – 1st Place
Saverio Ciampi, Italy – 2nd Place
Alessandra DeBellis, Italy – 3rd Place
Finalists from each division competed in a blind-box challenge in the Pizza Maker of the Year Bake-Off. The competition’s mystery ingredient, Cattlemen’s Carolina Tangy Gold Barbeque Sauce, proved to be a challenge for the four finalists, who presented the judges with unique pizzas created from a table of provided ingredients. Shawn Randazzo of Cloverleaf Pizza of St. Clair in St. Clair Shores, Michigan, walked away with the title of World Champion Pizza Maker and a cash prize. The International Pizza Challenge also pitted four former winners –– all industry experts in their own right. Tony Gemignani of San Francisco-based Tony’s Pizza Napoletana was named the “Best of the Best” Master Pizza Maker of the Year.
The popular World Pizza Games trials culminated at an event on Wednesday, March 13. Winners were:
1st Division Freestyle Acrobatics: Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan
Masters Division Freestyle Acrobatics: Jay Schuurman, Pizza Rock, Sacramento, CA
Fastest Dough Stretch: Ingrosso Simone, Pizzeria Del Mille, Italy
Fastest Box Folding: Jimmy Xang, Pizza Guys, Rancho Cordova, CA
Largest Dough Stretch: Mario Sigmorile, Pizzeria Del Centro, Italy
Longest Spin: Kazuya Akaogi, Red Japan Co., Japan
Throughout the three-day event, show attendees visited sponsoring booths and turned in gamepieces for the $20,000 MEGA BUCKS Giveaway. Frank Sastano of Tulsa, Oklahoma-based Savastano’s Pizzeria took home the cash prize.
“This year’s Pizza Expo was the biggest and best show ever, breaking records for attendance with 6,901 pizza professionals, 940 booths and tons of excitement,” says Oakley. “Words just don’t do it justice; you really have to experience Pizza Expo to understand the interaction that takes place between our attendees and exhibitors. Everyone is truly anxious and motivated to get into discussions about new products, new technology, the latest industry trends and hot-button issues facing the industry today.”
PHOTO BY RICK DAUGHERTY
Show of hands: who enjoys doing payroll?
Indeed, many pizzeria operators far prefer mingling with guests or making pies to the tedious back-office task. Yet, employees must be paid and payroll remains a necessary duty to please employees, the government, and the bottom line –– whether it’s tackled in house or outsourced to a payroll company.
At Yolanda’s Italian Restaurant and Pizzeria, a 50-year-old eatery in the Bronx, New York, owner Neil Calisi handles payroll himself. With eight employeescoveringhis80-seatpizzeria, he says payroll has never become so troubling and time consuming that he’s contemplated outsourcing the task.
“We’re an old-school business, so we’re going to keep payroll in house rather than going outside for something so small,” says Calisi, a second- generation operator prepping the family business for a third generation.
According to Calisi, keeping payroll in house demands two essential ingredients: a credible accountant and bookkeeping software. Calisi, for instance, uses Intuit QuickBooks, which allows staff to clock in and out and records their working hours.
“QuickBooks does the math for me,” Calisi says, adding that he also uses the software for billing and inventory control.
‘ From changing state unemployment rates to federal and local taxes, there’s so much that small businesses need to know and account for that it becomes difficult to keep an eye on every detail’.
– Kathey Palmer, CompuPay
But first, Calisi’s accountant came to Yolanda’s and –– in a critical opening step — set up the software to provide accurate pay and current tax information. While Calisi acknowledges an early learning curve in moving from Yolanda’s pen-and-paper ways to the computer, he says the system is now self-sufficient. “Without a big staff, it’s not cumber- some for me to do the payroll,” he says.
“With the software and accountant, there isn’t much more you need to do.”
As a restaurant’s employee pool deepens or additional locations are added, however, many operations elect to outsource payroll. After years of doing his own payroll, Alex Akhmedov grew tired of the unwieldy process, specifically as workers came and went and Akhmedov opened new units of Sal’s Pizza & Restaurant, his full-service eatery that now claims three locations in central Tennessee.
Employing CompuPay, one of the payroll industry’s major players alongside the likes of ADP and Intuit, Akhmedov holds confidence that his staff members are receiving accurate pay on time and that taxes and payroll regulations are being followed accordingly.
“They know what they’re doing and are skilled and professional,” Akhmedov says of the outsourcing companies. “I want consistency and accuracy and they provide that.”
CompuPay senior vice president of business development Kathey Palmer says many restaurant operators like Akhmedov outsource payroll because “it is a relatively inexpensive business solution that can give business owners peace of mind.” She adds that many others turn to a payroll service only after a painstaking pay issue, such as a tax penalty, arises.
“Outsourcing payroll is much like an insurance policy,” Palmer says. “Operators learn that it’s far less expensive to get it right the first time.”
As the payroll process becomes increasingly complex given various tax and regulatory issues, operators appear more eager than ever to hand the critical business function over to a specialist who knows the ins and outs of the employee pay environment.
“From changing state unemployment rates to federal and local taxes, there’s so much that small businesses need to know and account for that it becomes difficult to keep an eye on every detail,” Palmer says, noting the unforgiving nature of wage and hour laws.
Payroll service provider ADP has long embraced the saying “You Make Pizza, We Do Payroll,” a nod to the idea that pizzeria operators should do what they know best and outsource the tasks that fall outside of their skill set.
From calculating payroll checks and tax payments to printing W2 forms and incorporating new payroll and tax regulations, a payroll service can address many of payroll’s financial and legal matters.
“Operators are not experts in payroll,” Palmer says. “We are.”
Though prices vary widely by market and provider, payroll providers generally charge a per check fee –– often in the $1 to $2 window –– based on the number of employees and check frequency. Thereafter, some providers bundle additional services –– direct deposit, tax filing, check signing and sealing, quarterly and annual tax reports –– while others adopt the a la carte model in which operators select the services most applicable to their establishment.
While some operators seek traditional full-service payroll, which can be as simple as making a call and communicating staff hours to an assigned payroll specialist, many more have embraced online functionalities, which allow an operator to process payroll in a few mouse clicks.
Much like those operators who keep payroll in house, starting from a credible, solid foundation is imperative. At least one company we interviewed, for instance, works with operators to define wages and tax info before setting up a system that matches their needs.
“Within 15 to 20 minutes, we can typically help operators understand how the system works and walk them through their initial payroll run,” Palmer says.
Akhmedov says outsourcing the payroll function keeps his staff happy with accurate, timely paychecks, but also affords him increased freedom to manage staff, touch customers, and market his restaurants. He says: “Keeping the employees happy and compensated certainly makes my job easier and allows me to focus on other responsibilities.” u
Chicago-based writer Daniel P. Smith has covered business issues and best practices for a variety of trade publications, newspapers, and magazines.
PICKING THE RIGHT PAYROLL PARTNER
Following some unfortunate bumps with his first payroll outsourcing service, Alex Akhmedov of Sal’s Pizza
& Restaurant has moved onto a new provider. He urges his fellow pizzeria operators to fully vet any payroll service, looking for clues into their accuracy and customer service.
Operators, Akhmedov says, should inquire about the provider’s support model — “Who will handle my account?” — as well as how the provider will handle tax notices and rate changes.
Operators should also interview various payroll companies, inquiring about the base services and add-on options, and review the company’s history, including its business history and rating with the Better Business Bureau.
In addition, operators would be wise to consult with other businesses of a similar size. From those conversations, operators can better discern a company’s responsiveness and quality. Some payroll services, for instance,
may have a penchant for hidden fees or prove elusive at the first sign
of trouble.

Photo by Josh Keown
The recession had just hit and Lisa Towne was searching for ways to improve her restaurant’s cash flow. Towne, owner of Mama Lisa’s Little Italy in Castle Rock, Colorado, registered with her state’s Web site that listed government jobs and saw an opportunity to bid on providing school lunches. “I decided to go for it,” says Towne. “The process was incredibly time consuming; the bid document was 62 pages long.”
Most of the paperwork was focused on nutrition. Towne had to provide a complete nutritional analysis of every product she proposed supplying to the schools. She also had to create a HACCP booklet (Hazard Analysis and Critical Control Points) and undergo several inspections. Her first bid attempt failed. She tried again in 2008 and won the contract.
Towne initially serviced eight schools –– four every day and four on Thursdays only. But as the economy constricted, more students began brown-bagging it and the schools started baking pizzas on-site to reduce costs. She’s currently providing 130 pizzas every Thursday to four charter schools. Towne recently cut ties with a fifth school to which she had provided lunches daily, developing a total turnkey operation. When the PTA began dramatically reducing the scope of work (for example purchasing many of the supplies at Costco) it became unprofitable to continue.
Towne describes her lunch-program involvement as a mixed bag. On the one hand it has improved cash flow and has given her restaurant greater exposure to a broader customer base. On the other, the “incredibly tight” profit margins leave scant room for miscalculations.
“You must have very strong control over labor and food costs,” says Towne, adding that she’s constantly checking commodity prices and negotiating with suppliers (but the fact that her order volume tripled does give her more bargaining power).
Unsurprisingly, Towne’s operations became more complicated, requiring additional cooks and delivery staff, earlier and longer hours and greater organization.
Pamela Culores, founder of orderlunches.com, says there are key elements to consider when deploying a school lunch program. Located in Foster City, California, orderlunches. com consults with restaurants and provides web-based solutions that help manage the organizational aspects of school lunch programs. These elements include:
The ordering process and payment. Will this happen manually or online? Manually typically involves several people from both the school and restaurant side and chews up a fair amount of time.
Menu options. You want to provide choices but too many options can prove problematic, says Culores, adding that they help restaurants develop their menus.
Food preparation. Pre-ordering is the ideal, says Culores. Providing a “walk-up” solution where no preordering is involved risks wasting both product and dollars.
Angela Dominick, owner of Dom’s Trattoria in Beverly Farms, Massachusetts, relies on the Internet to help manage her school lunch program. For the last three years she has provided school lunches to four private schools, delivering to each Monday through Thursday (she opted out of Fridays because of high customer traffic during that time in her restaurant). There are 368 students registered in the program; on an average day she serves from 120 to 150 students. The schools provide this program to parents as a service. Without it, the students would have to take lunches from home.
Ordering and payment are handled through her Web site (using a webbased ordering system). Orders must be in by midnight Friday for the next week. She offers a variety of options including pizza, macaroni and cheese, spaghetti, sandwiches, salads and wraps. She created the menu herself and while dishes offered vary somewhat from those in the restaurant, they use the same ingredients, simplifying ordering and preparation; however, staff does start the school lunch prep about 90 minutes earlier than that of the restaurant’s lunch prep.
Dominick didn’t have to jump through the same hoops as Towne when it came to providing nutritional information — unlike public schools, the private sector doesn’t require nutritional sheets or additional inspections, at least in her area. But like Towne, Dominick has realized several benefits from the school lunch program. The biggest one? Catering. “I cater almost every event that goes on in the schools. I’ve gained so much catering business,” says Dominick. She’s also noticed that when schools hold half-day sessions, kids will often drag their parents into the restaurant for lunch.
However, Towne’s experience has been different. An unexpected downside she encountered as a result of her participation in the school lunch programs was a drop in business at her restaurant, particularly for their promotional days.
“If kids were eating pizza for lunch, they were unlikely to want to come in at night with their families to eat pizza,” she explains. “We didn’t anticipate how much this would affect retail on promotional days; we saw an eightpercent drop in business.”
Now, although Towne is still enthusiastic about school lunches, she’s concentrating more on her retail business. “When all is said and done, weighing the money brought in from the school lunch program against the costs, it makes more sense to focus on retail,” she says. “It could bring better profits with less effort.”
Before reaching out to the school lunch market, Pamela Culores, founder of orderlunches.com, suggests restaurants consider:
- Number of days you can offer the service and consistently deliver the product on time.
- Can you offer a good mix of healthy, nutritious meals kids will like and want to order?
- The order cut-off time; how much lead time do you need?
- Can you distribute meals if parents aren’t available?
- Number of students and projected meals. The goal is 50 percent minimum adoption or better to maximize ROI.
How communication between restaurant and the parents and school will be handled. Culores says restaurants should know the distribution process and number of lunch sessions. For example, if there are three sessions and the school instructs the restaurant to make just a single delivery dropping everything off at once, quality can be compromised; negatively impacting the students’ perception of the restaurant.
Pamela Mills-Senn is a freelancer specializing in writing on topics of interest to all manner of businesses. She is based in Long Beach, California.
Photos by Rick Daugherty
When considering moving your restaurant from one location to another, there’s a lot at stake. As the owner of an established Italian restaurant here in Georgia, we wanted to make the right decision for both our business and our customers. Questions to ask yourself before moving:
Is your rent headed so high that your business can’t even afford it?
Do you have a better opportunity in a nicer space?
Is your landlord easy to work with?
Has business declined and it’s time to downsize?
These are just a handful of reasons why operators consider relocating their business.
Of course, with any deal, there’s a catch: the above questions are all the very reasons why some operators have moved and gone out of business, while others have had great success. I moved my 100- seat Italian eatery just a half-mile away into a slightly bigger space which added 35 seats, a bar area and dining room space that can be sectioned off for private parties.
Originally, when I started looking at available spaces we found one we liked, but it was four miles away. I knew we’d lose some of the customers that we worked so hard to win over. The space was also too raw and needed many costly renovations. We shopped around. The process I went through was extensive and honestly exhausting, but ultimately brought me to the best decision I could have made for my business.
The most important thing you’ve got to do when considering moving your operation is to be very organized and thorough in your research. Create a list of all things to be considered.
The space in which I had built my business worked well for us for five years and I knew it would actually be easier to stay where we were, especially since we had built a great clientele. Remember that easier is not always better! But, we were at the end of our lease and it was time to renew. For some reason the landlord wanted to hike the rent so high that my company would not have been able to afford it. That’s when I knew I needed to start looking at other spaces while at the same time attempting to negotiate a lower rent structure to try and stay put.
This process can take eight to 10 months or longer. Don’t think you can make a last-minute decision down to wire at the end of your lease. If you wait too long, you could be locked into signing a long-term lease somewhere you don’t really want to be or worse –– have no lease at all to operate your restaurant.
I think it’s to your advantage to let all parties know that you are looking at several locations, so you’ll get the best possible rent structure available. I was planning on moving all my furnishings and equipment as well as my hood and exhaust system and walk-in cooler, and it was necessary to get quotes from several companies to do the big work. It’s critical to create a timeline for a big move. If you don’t, the project can take so much longer than you anticipated — which will in turn cost you lost revenue. You can’t move everything overnight, and you’ve got to understand –– and plan for –– the costs associated with moving. The next step is to weigh out how long it will take you to recuperate the investment. Also understand that even if you estimate your moving expense, more than likely, unexpected expenses will arise.

I was very thorough and estimated on the high side that it would cost $15,000 to move into a very nice existing restaurant space. Due to unforeseen issues, the move with improvements to the new space had a $10,000 overrun. This could potentially break somebody in the process of moving and prevent them from even being able to open due to lack of funds. Be careful.
When looking at other locations, here are some incredibly important things to consider, especially if you’ll be moving all your equipment to the new location like I did:
You also want your plumber and an HVAC team to check out the new space to see what might be needed to retrofit your equipment and to ensure all things are in good working order.
It is critical to have the board of health, building inspectors and the fire marshal come before you sign a lease to let you know of any potential expenses that need to be taken into consideration. I’ve seen folks sign a lease and then find out they need to upgrade the grease trap. In my county, they are enforcing $15,000 to $20,000 grease traps that need to be installed. That’s definitely not something you want to find out after your money has all been spent on other upgrades.
You need to measure the space accurately and lay out on paper the existing equipment you have and where everything will go. Creating timelines, getting quotes and understanding all that you need to do, including new licenses to operate if applicable, will give you the smooth transition you need. You’ve got to consider your lost revenue while closed and extra advertising dollars you’ll need to spend to inform the community of your new location.
We opened our new location exactly one week after we closed the old. Within 10 weeks of re-opening, we had a 44.3-percent increase in sales, and being just a half-mile from our old location has aided in our success.
Jeff Freehof owns The Garlic Clove in Evans, Georgia. He is a frequent contributor to Pizza Today and a speaker at the Pizza Expo family of trade shows.

Photo by Rick Daugherty
The financial boost that comes from catering really and truly can take your business to the next level. There’s so much more to catering than one time monetary gratification. I find that each catered event I complete grows word-of-mouth. I generally get a couple of inquiries from each event. Now some of these events are small and simple, but think about this: a daily catered event for a staff of 18, at an average cost of $10 per person plus tax and delivery charge, adds more than $46,000 to my annual revenue — and that doesn’t include any large events. The good news is you already have everything you need (with the exception of perhaps catering pans) to make this all happen.
Half- and full-size aluminum pans are essentials for your entrées. Use the aluminum lids instead of foil. It’s sturdier and much more professional. Some disposable catering trays are great for sandwiches, cold cut platters and desserts. Make sure you keep them in stock for that last-minute order.
Here are some of the most popular things you can offer:
Baked ziti with meat sauce
Lasagna
Chicken broccoli Alfredo
Chicken Primavera
Chicken Parmesan, Piccata or Marsala over pasta u
Stromboli (sliced on a platter)
Sandwich platters with assorted wraps
Pasta or garden salad
I like to provide bread and salad with two pasta entrées. If you don’t have any kind of dinner rolls, then simply cut your sub rolls into 2-inch-thick slices with butter on the side. I price everything to serve eight to 10 people and I use the half pans for each item.
I charge:
$12.95 for a garden salad
$5.99 for bread with butter cups
$32 for baked ziti
$38 for chicken & broccoli Alfredo with penne pasta u
$38 for a pan of four-cheese lasagna
$45 for a pan of meat lasagna
$45 for a pan of Chicken Parmesa
Marsala or Piccata over pasta: $65 for a sandwich platter for 10.
Now, if you are feeding a group of more than 10, simply put your food into the full pans instead of halves (which will actually hold enough food for up to 30 people since they are deeper). I use one pound of raw pasta to cook for every 10 people I’m feeding, which initially may seem insufficient but will be enough after adding meat sauce or chicken and broccoli to it. Let me give you some creative alternatives to take your catering menu to a more diversified place than most of your competitors.
Here are some of my favorites:
Chicken Pesto Primavera is a simple variation of our Chicken & Broccoli Alfredo, which is comprised of sliced or diced chicken breast, steamed broccoli, cooked penne pasta and Alfredo sauce. For the Primavera version, simply add some of the other veggies you’ve got in the restaurant. Since we have a dinner vegetable medley that we offer with our entrées that is made up of roasted zucchini, yellow squash, tomatoes and caramelized onions, we toss that in with the pasta and a little bit of our pesto. By adding these two ingredients, we’ve created an entirely new entrée.
Chicken Roma is another simple dish with slight alterations that creates a slightly lighter dish version. It’s essentially the exact same dish as the Chicken Pesto Primavera, except this dish has no pesto. Plus, instead of being all Alfredo, we use mostly piccata sauce, which is made with chicken stock, lemon, wine, salt, pepper, garlic and little bit of roux to hold it together. Add a small amount of cream or even Alfredo to bring a creamy texture to this dish.
Chicken Giordano is yet again a creative entrée that can be enhanced from your traditional chicken marsala, which is made with some sautéed chicken breast sliced mushrooms and a marsala wine sauce and chicken stock, salt, pepper and garlic with a little roux to pull it together. Now simply add a very small amount of marinara sauce, sundried tomatoes and artichoke hearts to create this new dish. This would be great served over pasta as well.
There are a couple of important things to remember with these pasta catering dishes. The first is that although it’s best to typically cook our pasta “al dente”, I like to go just one stage more than that and fully cook the pasta (but not overcook it) for catering. The reason for this is because your pasta is still thirsty, in a sense, and wants to drink up any liquid. So in essence if your pasta is al dente, and the amount of sauce on your pasta seems totally sufficient, 30 to 40 minutes later when this office is about to dig into your delicious creation it will be very dry because the pasta will have absorbed the sauce. Don’t be afraid to over compensate just a little bit with your sauce for catering without having the pasta swimming in extra sauce. I also like to use penne pasta compared to spaghetti because it is much easier to serve by the spoonful.
Take your new catering earnings and do something great! Perhaps some beautiful chafing dishes for those big events!
Jeff Freehof owns The Garlic Clove in Evans, Georgia. He is a frequent contributor to Pizza Today and a speaker at the Pizza Expo family of trade shows.
Photos by Josh Keown
You’d probably never think of courting disaster by driving around uninsured. Yet, if you’re like many independent pizzeria restaurant owners, chances are you’re unwittingly placing your business in the same kind of jeopardy. How? By not carrying a non-owned auto liability policy — coverage insuring you should one of your delivery drivers have an accident, injure someone, or damage property while using their personal vehicle for work-related duties.
“Non-owned auto liability coverage protects the pizzeria owner in the event the personal auto policy of his delivery driver either denies coverage or doesn’t afford sufficient limits to adequately cover the amount of claim for damages,” explains Keith George, managing director for Camp Hill, Pennsylvania-based AmWINS Program Underwriters, Inc. “The coverage applies excess of any other collectible insurance. Other collectible insurance includes the personal auto liability coverage of the delivery driver’s personal auto policy.”
It’s used to cover the restaurant owner for third-party damages caused by employees driving their own vehicles, says Karen Kiernan, PizzaGuard program manager for Willis Programs, based in Portsmouth, New Hampshire.
“This coverage doesn’t cover the employee’s vehicle for any damages due to accidents,” Kiernan elaborates. “This should be covered under the employee’s personal insurance. Nor does it cover any injury to the employee; this is covered under worker’s compensation.”
The insurance provides for inadequate limits of the employee’s policy and defends the operator/ employer if he or she is brought into a claim, says Michelle Groves, account executive for RH Clarkson Insurance Group, headquartered in Louisville, Kentucky. According to Groves, most non-owned policies start at a $1 million-limit, with higher limits possible.
George says pizzeria operators are “playing a very dangerous game” when they fore go non-owned auto insurance, instead believing the delivery driver’s policy provides sufficient coverage. There are plenty of reasons why this mindset places owners at risk. For one, he says, the driver’s auto policy may not respond.
“Even if it does, it will only respond on behalf of the named insured on the policy,” he says. “This doesn’t preclude plaintiff’s attorney from bringing suit against the pizzeria operator/employer as well, as the pizzeria owner is vicariously liable for their employee’s negligence.”
Some personal insurance policies have a “delivery exclusion,” says Cheryl Downey, senior vice president for San Francisco-based EPIC Insurance Brokers. Also, most drivers lack adequate liability limits, threatening the operator’s assets, she adds.
“And you won’t know if your driver’s insurance is cancelled, putting you at further risk,” she adds. “Without insurance, you’ll have to hire your own lawyer to defend you if your driver has an accident.” (In the event the driver’s policy has lapsed for non-payment, there’s no coverage and it “falls back on the owner for full coverage for damages,” explains Kiernan.)
Depending upon the claim’s magnitude, the financial impact for the operator could be huge, says Groves. “In most cases, the attorneys go after the deep pockets,” she says. “They won’t go after the lowly employee; they’ll go after the business owner, and the restaurant could go under.”
Yet, Groves says it’s common for single-site owners and small chains to fore go this insurance (it’s required for big franchised or company-owned chains).
“One deterrent is these policies can be expensive, but it’s more expensive to operate without one; it’s not something you ever want to do,” she says.
But are these policies always necessary? George says yes, if you’re delivering product via employees, you should carry this kind of coverage. But what if you use company-owned vehicles for delivery?
“If the store owners only have and use (company-owned) autos for delivery, then liability arising out of an accident caused by an employee using one of these owned vehicles would be covered (by the owner’s insurance) for any loss, unless excluded, up to the policy limits,” says Kiernan.
However, Downey believes that even when using company-owned vehicles for delivery, non-owned auto liability insurance is a must since it also provides coverage when employees run errands for you using their personal vehicles. George says this is also why pizzerias not offering delivery service should nevertheless have this coverage. The only exception, he adds, is if the pizzeria operator uses a company- owned vehicle for all deliveries and all errands, and that the cars are insured on a business auto policy, rather than on a personal auto policy.
This illustrates one of the advantages of utilizing company-owned vehicles; the knowledge that their policy will respond in the event of an incident, says George, adding that this is only true as long as the vehicle is titled to the named insured and listed on the business auto policy. Company-owned vehicles also eliminate the need for the business owner to monitor the employee’s insurance coverage. (On the other hand, there’s the expense of purchasing and maintaining the vehicles to consider, and because it’s full coverage rather than “excess” the insurance may be costlier, says Kiernan.)
Regardless of whether you’re utilizing company-owned or employee-owned vehicles, investigating non-owned liability policies makes sense, says Downey.
“Why would a restaurant operator risk losing his assets when delivery insurance is available, and relatively inexpensive, to protect those assets?” she asks.
Improving Your Odds

Being proactive will help you reduce the number of delivery- related incidents, or avoid them altogether, says Cheryl Downey of EPIC Insurance Brokers. Along with hiring experienced drivers with good records, she advises conducting a thorough safety/operation inspection of the employee’s vehicle (lights, brakes, tires, seat belts, etc.).
Also:
u Be sure the employee has a current auto ID card showing the vehicle they’re using is the same one shown on the ID card, suggests Karen Kiernan of Willis Programs.
u Make sure the employee’s insurance policy is active and that their license is too, says RH Clarkson Insurance Group’s Michelle Groves. Also request a driving history (a DMV report can be run with permission).
Remember that as an employer, it’s your responsibility to ensure your employees have acceptable driving records, says Keith George of AmWINS Program Underwriters,
Inc. “Allowing an employee with a poor driving record to deliver makes it difficult to defend the employer in the event” of a lawsuit, he says.
Pamela Mills-Senn is a freelancer specializing in writing on topics of interest to all manner of businesses. She is based in Long Beach, California.
Photos by Rick Daugherty & Josh Keown
With 130 Domino’s Pizza outlets under his charge, Glenn Mueller signs plenty of checks for delivery drivers. The head of Gulfport, Mississippi- based RPM Pizza, Mueller, a30-year veteran of the pizza world, has watched competitors throughout the restaurant landscape rush into the delivery business with little understanding of its nuance and complexities.
And the delivery business, Mueller contends, is nothing but nuance and complexity.
While running delivery service looks easy to many, it remains a convoluted array of local, state and federal directives, including how drivers — who can be employees paid an hourly rate or tip-credited wages — are compensated, as well as how they are reimbursed for use of their own vehicle.
Adrian Sawyer, a San Francisco- based attorney with Kerr & Wagstaffe LLP who defends nationwide employment class actions, says there are various pitfalls to employing delivery drivers, including the requirement that employers report tips — a process simplified given the rise of credit card purchases and online ordering — as well as regulations in some states that prohibit an employer from applying tips toward a driver’s wage.
Further problems can arise if operations pay their drivers under the table or compensate drivers as independent contractors.
“You have to be careful drivers are being paid the appropriate amount or you can end up violating federal labor laws,” Sawyer says. “The balance here is complying with the law, which imposes significant burdens and requires attention to detail that isn’t readily apparent to everyone, while simultaneously controlling expenses and running a profitable business.”
Under federal law, restaurants are required to pay delivery drivers $2.13 per hour if they utilize the tip credit, though gratuities must push each driver over the $7.25 federal minimum wage. In the event that the $7.25 hourly rate is not met on a workweek basis, an employer must make up the difference.
For instance, an employer using the federal tip-credit rate of $2.13 per hour would pay his driver $31.95 for a 15-hour workweek; yet, that driver’s tips for the week would need to total $76.80 or more to ensure that the operator was meeting the minimum wage requirements ($7.25/hour) of the Fair Labor Standards Act (FLSA).
“If that driver only received $70 in tips, then the operator would need to add $6.80 to the pay period to meet federal requirements,”American Payroll Association (APA) Director of education and Training Jim Medlock explains, adding that many computerized payroll systems compute weekly minimums at the federal and state level to secure compliance.
In addition, Medlock reminds that drivers working more than 40 hours in a given workweek would also need to be compensated at the standard overtime rate of time-and-a-half.
Beyond driver wages and tips, there also remains the issue of reimbursing drivers for use of their own personal vehicles, a particularly thorny subject as fuel costs rise.
Operators can reimburse delivery drivers in one of three ways: mileage logs; a flat-rate policy; or to set the base pay high enough that the minimum wage will be covered even as expenses are accounted for on the paycheck.
According to the internal Revenue Service, the standard rate of driver reimbursement is 55 cents per mile, a tally that addresses fuel, repairs, insurance and automobile depreciation.
Mueller’s RPM Pizza reimburses its drivers by the mile and shifts the number on a weekly basis according to local gas prices from AAA and a third-party agency familiar with local mileage reimbursement rates for food delivery. he says clarity and transparency is key.
“You can’t just be tossing out arbitrary numbers,” Mueller says, adding that state restaurant associations can often direct operators to sound advice on local reimbursement rates. “Our drivers want to know how mileage rates are set and how they will be reimbursed… and appreciate that we’re doing our best to be fair.”
Rather than logging miles and compensating at a per mile rate, operators might set a flat rate for mileage reimbursement that considers the typical distance a driver travels for a delivery and the average tip he receives. A flat rate, Sawyer says, offers operators predictability and maintains fairness to employees.
“Involve drivers in this process, as they know how far they’re going and what they typically get for tips,” Sawyers says.
Furthermore, Sawyer suggests operators also have a policy in place for additional “unexpected” expenses, such as a flat tires or lockouts. While smaller operations might deal with unforeseen situations on an as- needed basis, larger chains might have a defined policy in an employee handbook.
“The idea here is clarity and predictability,” Sawyer says, noting that unpaid driver expenses could spark problems with FLSA compliance.
Finally, there is the lingering issue of delivery fees, which customers can easily — and mistakenly — confuse with a driver tip and, in doing so, bring unnecessary pressure upon operators. Sawyer suggests all pizzerias have a clear message on their menus, Web site, and receipt that details the difference between the delivery fee and the driver’s gratuity.
As one example, delivery kingpin Domino’s shares this message on its homepage: “Any Delivery Charge is not a tip paid to your driver. Please reward your driver for awesomeness.”
Compensating the cross-trained delivery driver

At nine-unit Colorado-based pizza chain Borriello Brothers, management considers drivers back-of-the- house staff who also deliver.
“Our drivers aren’t just drivers and we train them accordingly,” say Borriello Brothers Operations Specialist Adam Rickett. “They’re able to prep food, jump on the register, take phone orders, and so on.”
Rickett says cross-trained drivers builds operational cohesiveness and enhances customer service. For those benefits, however, such job swapping throughout a shift can also leave an operation susceptible to FLSA violations as the tip credit can only be applied to certain staff positions.
To avoid any errors, Borriello Brothers requires its staff to clock in and out for individual jobs. Though sometimes tedious, the APA’s Jim Medlock calls that practice the “safest way” to ensure appropriate employee compensation.
“In clocking in and out, operators know how many hours a staff member worked in different positions of the restaurant that have different pay rates,” Medlock says.
Chicago-based writer Daniel P. Smith has covered business issues and best practices for a variety of trade publications, newspapers, and magazines.
Do you know exactly what it costs you to make each of your pizzas? If not, your price structure may not be as ideal as it should be. You can’t begin to calculate your food costs without understanding your ingredient costs.
So the first step is to write down all the ingredients used in a given pizza (or other food product). Next, look at your invoice to see what you are paying for each of the ingredients. Determine the number of ounces in each order so that you can ascertain the price per ounce that you pay for each ingredient.
Once you have that, you’re ready to go.
Begin by weighing your ingredients as you make your pizza and recording the number of ounces you use for each ingredient (dough, sauce, cheese, meat and veggie toppings).
Now, take the number of ounces for each ingredient and multiply that by the ingredient’s respective cost per ounce. For example, if your sauce costs 10 cents per ounce (a purely hypothetical example using round numbers to make the math simple) and you use 7 ounces of sauce on the pizza you are pricing, that means you put 70 cents worth of sauce onto that pizza.
Repeat this method for all ingredients, then add the numbers together for your grand total. Don’t forget to add the price of your boxes if you offer carryout or delivery!
Once you know precisely what each menu item costs you to make, you’re now armed to adjust your prices to maximize profits and keep food costs percentages in check.
Even for pizza restaurants with a solid track record of success, it can be extremely difficult to obtain funding for growth. Why are lenders so skittish? Considering the industry’s over-saturation and its notoriously high failure rate, their reticence is understandable. There are other deterrents as well.
“Unless they own the building, restaurants typically lack collateral assets,” says Charles Botchway, director of IPA Advisory & Intermediary Services LLC, based in Buffalo Grove, Illinois. The company provides business fund-raising to small-to-medium-sized businesses (those with annual revenues under $50 million). “They also typically have poor cash management — they tend to think day-to-day rather than long term, and there aren’t always good controls in place to monitor the inflow and outflow of money, so theft is a big problem.”
Compounding the challenge, is that many owners automatically approach the nearest bank rather than investigating other (perhaps more receptive) alternatives, says Chris Lehnes, vice president of business development for CIT Small Business Lending, an SBA lender headquartered in Livingston, New Jersey.
Following, we offer advice from these and other lending experts (all of who make loans to the restaurant industry) on how to better your funding prospects.
Before You Approach
Plan ahead. Nothing turns lenders off faster than lack of preparation. “Do your homework,” Lehnes says. “Don’t show up and have the lender ask you questions that you can’t answer.”
“Get organized, show you’ve thought things through,” says James Hojnacki, senior vice president and chief credit officer of Liberty Bank, a full-service community bank based in Twinsberg, Ohio, that focuses on small-to-medium-sized businesses (sales from $1 to $20 million).
Be clear about your request –– what you need, how the money will be used and how it will be repaid, Hojnacki says, adding that having a thorough business plan at the ready is essential.
Lenders will also look at your:
Management team and its strengths, experience and skill.
Industry background and track record.
Working capital. You should bring a sufficient level to the table. For start ups, this would be about 50 percent of what it takes to get the operation going and to keep it running for a period of time, says Robert Filipiak, executive director for the Cascade Capital Corporation, an Akron-based certified development company that participates in SBA programs.
Projections. Owners should be able to chart out monthly what they’ll need to keep the business running for two years, says Filipiak.
Demographics/competition. What businesses would supply the lunch traffic? How many people would come in for dinner? What’s the competition in the surrounding 10-mile radius?
Be ready for some grilling. For example, Hojnacki always asks applicants:
What skills, talents, and experience do you have that will make you successful? What’s your unique selling position? “I’m looking to see if applicants have a realistic sense of the competitive environment,” he explains.
How much money are you personally investing? “If you have a substantial investment in the business, then you have a vested interest in succeeding,” he says.
What are your contingency plans in case you don’t achieve your goals as quickly as expected? Is there additional capital? “People are overly optimistic about the time it takes to open a business,” Hojnacki says. “I’ve seen people run out of money before they open the doors.”
And there’s an important preliminary question you should pose, he says. “Ask if the lender has lent to restaurants. If not, you may want to go elsewhere.”
Research Your Options
Check out programs that would enable you to acquire backing in addition to the bank loan you’re seeking, says Hojnacki. The SBA offers several, say Filipiak and Lehnes.
“People think SBA loans are only for start ups or troubled businesses, but they can be good for successful, established businesses,” says Lehnes. “And often, their terms, rates, and conditions are more favorable than a bank’s.”
Consider the following two:
7-A: The lender extends a loan and the government guarantees up to 85 percent of it, explains Lehnes. There’s a maximum loan amount of $2 million. To qualify, the business must be owner-operated and small (earning less than $6 million in annual revenue for all sites). The money can be used for starting, expanding, or buying an intact operation, Lehnes says.
504: This assists small businesses in conjunction with other lenders. “We take a secondary role/lien position in terms of funding, providing up to 40% of the funds necessary to purchase fixed assets,” Filipiak explains. “So, if a bank doesn’t want to provide 75-to-80 percent of the funding, with our program, they can do up to 50 percent, perhaps making them more willing to loan.”
This program allows you to finance major capital expansion projects such as buildings, equipment purchases (see sidebar) or the acquisition of other businesses. To qualify you must have a net worth of less than $ 7 million, or most recent two years average net profits of less than $2.5 million, says Filipiak.
Lehnes suggests that operators seek out SBA lenders identified by the SBA as “certified” or “preferred,” which indicate lenders experienced in the intricacies of processing SBA loans.
“These are government programs, so there are a lot of rules, regulations, and paperwork,” he says. “Working with an inexperienced lender could slow the process down. Also, look for those that lend to restaurants. Owners shouldn’t have to spend time educating lenders about their industry,” says Lehnes. “They should focus on what’s most important—location and management skills.”

Did you ever get the feeling you were being overcharged for cheese? How does your supplier set the weekly price of cheese? How do the big chains buy their cheese? What does Block Plus stand for? Why does my cheese seem to be soft and wet sometimes and dry and hard at other times? What is the difference between Whole Milk and Part Skim Mozzarella?
I get calls every month from clients who ask questions like these — particularly the questions center on whether they are being overcharged for cheese. After I get a little info on the brand, specs, weekly volume, supplier and whether it’s purchased in the loaf style or shredded or diced, I do a little detective work.
Most food service distributors set the price of cheese, specifically mozzarella, on a weekly basis. They determine the weekly selling price by adding up the costs of several items:
• Cost of cheese from the factory
• Transportation cost to get the cheese from the factory to their warehouse
• Administration and selling costs
• Delivery and handling costs to get the cheese to your back door
• Profit and commission on the account.
Believe it or not the majority of suppliers, if given the chance, would rather not sell cheese. They make only pennies per pound in profit. In their view of things, they are selling a ticking time bomb because all unfrozen mozzarella has a relatively small window where the product performs at its best before it over ripens. If the dairy buyer overstocks a specific brand in anticipation of volume and the cheese doesn’t move through their system, then they can’t (or shouldn’t) sell it. This is called distressed cheese and may end up in airline Lasagna or at the soup kitchen. It won’t perform well on pizza.
Look at one of your cases of cheese in the refrigerator. The date of manufacture should be printed on the box as well as dairy identification information.
Mozzarella is in a constant stage of ageing (or curing and ripening). Mozzarella ripens from the inside out. Mozzarella receives almost little or no ageing at the dairy. It is usually shipped within one week of manufacture and ageing occurs in the distribution channel and pizzeria. Loaf Mozzarella should be aged 14-32 days and used within that time. Gas flushed, shredded or diced cheese will last a little longer. This is assuming that the cheese has been refrigerated between 36-40 F. The higher the fat and moisture content, the faster the cheese ages. Higher salt levels slows down ageing.
Be an informed buyer. The U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) has created federal Standards of Identity for mozzarella based on moisture (water) and milkfat content. Whole milk and part skim mozzarella is allowed to contain moisture contents between 52-60 percent. Cheeses with moisture contents this high are hard to process, age quickly and don’t bake up well. Low moisture, whole milk and part skim mozzarella (LMWM, LMSP) contain moisture contents of 45-52 percent moisture. Pizza cheese can’t be called mozzarella if the moisture content is higher than allowed by the USDA. Cheese with 45 percent moisture is not the same as cheese with 52 percent moisture, even though they carry the same name. The higher moisture cheeses have a lower production cost because water is cheap. Bargain and economy cheese will most likely have these higher moisture contents and sell for a lower price.
Suppliers and manufactures should strive to make you an informed buyer. One of the most educational weeks of my career was spent touring dairy farms, cheese manufacturing facilities and following the milk from the milking barns to the dairies. The educational tour ended at the Center for Dairy Research at the University of Wisconsin-Madison. Yes, there really are cheese scientists. They demonstrated and explained how different mozzarella cheeses, seemingly labeled the same, performed quite differently in side-by-side bake offs. The hands-on lab tests showed how small tweaks in ingredients made all the difference in melting, browning, stretch, texture, color, flavor, coverage and oiling out.
Choosing the right cheese for your operation starts with comparing the baking and eating characteristics of equal portions of competing brands. Sometimes a higher cost per pound premium cheese will yield a pizza that is better tasting and better looking using 10-15 percent less cheese per pie. Instead of comparing price per pound or ounce from competing brands, you may want to compare cost per pizza using fewer ounces.
Quality cheese is not accidental. Quality manufacturers have set rigid specifications and make consistent cheese, batch after batch. The specifications are lab analyzed. The ideal target percentages of moisture, milkfat, salt, pH and shipping age are replicated with little deviation. This attention to detail will eliminate many of your headaches on inconsistent product. Premium cheese costs more to make than bargain cheese, so expect to pay more per pound. Often the most expensive cheese coming in your backdoor may be the least expensive cheese as it leaves with your customers out your front door. You should demand and expect consistency from your cheese company from week to week.
Once you have chosen which cheese makes the best pizza, in your oven, for your operation, you’ll want to negotiate price with your distributor.
The price of cheese is determined by many outside influences completely out of the control of the manufacturers and distributors. Since it takes 10 pounds of milk to make one pound of cheese, the cooking, evaporation and refrigeration energy costs to cheese manufactures is a big deal. The worldwide demand for non fat dry milk (NFDM) and the declining value of the U.S. Dollar on the international market influences selling costs. When the cost of feed exceeds the cost of maintaining a milking cow, farmers are often given no choice but to slaughter milkers and send them to hamburger heaven. The on again, off again Mad Cow disease scares and the opening and closing of the U.S. – Canadian border to cow movement affects pricing as well. In the end, cheese pricing ultimately boils down to this: it’s all about the milk.
The Chicago Mercantile Exchange (CME) monitors and publishes a weekly price for many commodities, including cheese. Every Friday the weekly average of cheese is recoded at www.cheesereporter.com The Block and Barrel price of cheddar mirrors mozzarella. Many distributors purchase cheese based on the weekly average of cheddar’s block price.
So, what does “Block Plus” mean? It’s the number of cents over the published weekly price that the cheese is sold for. Most large-volume operators and mid-size chains enter into agreements with their suppliers to purchase all of their cheese from one distributor on a Block plus arrangement. A two week calendar lag is used to reflect the cost the supplied paid on date of purchase. When I implemented this system I stopped asking my sales rep the cost of cheese. I knew it would be so many cents over block. This eliminates the adversarial weekly gamesmanship of playing price tag. In order to get this preferential pricing one must be a loyal customer. If you cave in to lowball pricing from another supplier, your actions make the cheese buyer’s life stressful. Realizing that the profit margin on cheese is slim, you must also give your preferred supplier a chance to make a reasonable profit per drop by purchasing much, if not all, of your food from them.
Final thoughts: It really doesn’t matter how much you pay your distributor for a pound of cheese if you don’t portion control the cheese on every pizza, every time. If you’re not weighing it, you’re winging it. Great pizza isn’t cheap and cheap pizza isn’t great.

Independent operators get a failing grade on a huge issue: they do not have readable financial statements. For the moment, I won't even consider the problem of getting information too late to be of any real help. Some operators just rely on their accountants to work up the figures and accept what they are given. Now CPAs are good people, but they are into numbers, not operations.
As long as the numbers balance and are kept in accordance with standard accounting principles, their work is done. They are not entrepreneurs and (bless their hearts) seldom consider whether the numbers they provide are helpful.
Case in point: A P&L statement should list percentages as well as dollar amounts, but too many of these documents use gross receipts (sales plus sales tax) as the divisor when computing their expense percentages. This skews the percentages and gives a 6 to 8 percent false sense of security.
The next most common error is that food cost percentages should be food used divided by food sales, not divided by total sales. Similarly, if you operate a bar, bar cost ratio should be to bar sales, not to total sales. Some accountants just do what is easiest for them. It goes on and on.
If you have never taken a basic accounting course, it is time you did that. Then be sure to use an accountant who understands the restaurant industry, not just accounting practices. Finally, insist that you get numbers in a format that will allow you to quickly understand what is happening in your business.
Sure, it may take a little extra effort to educate yourself enough to grasp how the numbers go together and what they mean. Remember: EO’s make pizza – CEO’s make money.
History tends to repeat itself. Ten years ago, I wrote an article regarding my personal experiences dealing with soaring delivery costs and associated expenses. Big Dave’s Pizza had a sales mix that approximately half dine-in and half delivery. This ratio, now more than ever, is critical.
In the past decade, associated delivery expenses and wages have almost doubled. Those of you who are delivery intensive have seen frightening decreases in bottom line profits. I’ve even spoken to operators who haven’t seen any significant profit since last fall.
Ten years ago I was challenged by my accountant to figure out how much money it cost to provide home and business delivery. At that time everyone was doing it for free. With my accountant’s help, we did the work and found that, on average, my out-of-pocket costs were $2.52 per delivery.
We came to that amount by capturing the last 10,000 deliveries from my POS system. Then we calculated how much direct payroll we paid our drivers and added in the soft costs (employer matching social security, worker’s comp, unemployment, meals, etc.).
I did the same math this weekend with current assumptions: hourly wage at $7. I added another dollar for Social Security, Medicare and Unemployment. Non-Owned auto insurance and meals are subject to regions and generosity, so I factored them in at another .50 cents an hour. On top of this we need to also look at how much we pay our drivers per delivery or mile and then subtract any delivery fees we charge the customer. My rough math has calculated that, on average, it costs between $8.50 and $10 an hour for delivery staffing. During peak times I aimed for my drivers to deliver orders at the rate of 3 times an hour. During slow times it was much less. If we assume that two deliveries an hour is average, then my generic math indicates that it costs between $4-5 to deliver an order.
Who is footing the tab for delivery? You are, unless you’re charging a $4-5 delivery fee. You are also spreading the costs to your dine-in and carryout customers — and your drivers are more than ever extremely dependent on tips to keep gas in their tanks. Since this high of a fee is going to be perceived as gouging and unreasonable by our customers, who are currently cash strapped, we have a problem.
I believe that pizza delivery, as we know it now, is fading fast. The costs have become so high that we need to rethink and offer other options to our customers so our sales don’t bottom out and we recapture profitability. Here are some options:
- Reward customers who order carryout and dine-in.
- Consider a drive-through window, if possible.
- Create a Grab and Go concept to be available during peak drive times.
- Revisit promoting the proven take-and-bake concept.
- Outsource delivery to a legitimate third party meal delivery company.
- Raise your delivery fee to cover all of your costs.
- Eliminate delivery altogether like some chains.
It’s time to redo the math and see if you are making money.
A growing number of my customers use credit cards, but the fees are killing me. Anything I can do?
A: I feel your pain! If the fees are killing you, then the sales are saving you! We can no longer live without accepting credit cards, because almost everyone does and we would lose the sales. It’s the cost of doing business. We do have a little control, however. We can shop around and look for lower fees from other companies. Just make sure your research is thorough. Some companies will claim a lower fee and then throw in hidden costs. Other operators have stopped taking credit cards but now have ATM machines, which eliminate the fees altogether and actually give you money from the fees you charge your customers for using the ATM. Remember though, an ATM machine creates new liabilities for you.
Credit card processing companies call almost every day trying to “save me money”. How do I know who’s legitimate and who’s trying to rip me off?
I know it’s enough to make your head spin. About every six months, I give a real close look at a couple of companies that are known to have a good reputation. Credit card sales are not something to be taken lightly since they make up a big part of our sales. Give them your volume and make them quote rates without seeing any statements. If they’re not willing, they’re not worth the consideration. They will all claim to undercut who you have now — but they won’t necessarily keep their word.
It was a hot summer night. I was cruising with my friends. We were a carload of young guys, fresh out of high school, approaching a college campus, looking for a good time. The driver pulled into a drive thru burger place. He said “these burgers are great. I bet you can’t eat two and drink a coke.” I’ll take that bet. I could always eat 2 burgers and drink a Coke. The place was called Burger King. It was on Washtenaw Ave., halfway between University of Michigan and Eastern Mich. Univ.
A few weeks ago, I noticed a road sign proclaiming “The Whopper’s 50th Anniversary.” My mind did a flashback to the ’60s and my first encounter with the Whopper. This burger was like no other. For all of you youngsters, it filled up a 5-inch bun, and it literally took two hands to handle a Whopper that was charbroiled, slathered with condiments and just 45 cents. You got two Whoppers and a large Coke for a buck. I could not finish my second Whopper. My gut was too full for one more bite. I was in burger overload. These days, the Whopper is a one-handed sandwich.
Almost every ‘food for immediate consumption’ I buy has been shrunk down in size in my lifetime, from burgers to candy bars and so on. There are only a couple ways to pass along costs. The first is increase price or reduce size. The last way is reduce quality of toppings. Many years ago, all large pizzas were 16 inches in diameter. Many years ago, most of the chains adopted 14 inches as the new large size. The majority of independent pizzerias call 16 inches their large pie and a few go much bigger than that. With the uncertainty of our ingredients increasing in price and the free-falling dollar on the international money market, it’s a given that you need to change something in your operations to make a profit, and it’s a given that our customers are tired of price increases. They will forgo ordering a pizza when gasoline and all other weekly expenses are at an all time high. Many operators I’ve spoken to have already raised prices when cheese and wages went way up. They feel that their customers wouldn’t tolerate another price raise. They would rather go out of business than raise prices. Pride is an emotion that can take you down.
In 1988, Pizza Today published its first Top 25 List. My manager filled out the required info and mailed the card back to the publisher. A couple of months later, my pizzeria was ranked the 25th busiest place in the country. A couple of months later two of the Big 3 scoped out my town, and I had some serious competition. –– the world’s fastest delivery company and the world’s cheapest pizza. They opened with much fanfare and deep advertising pockets. It seemed like they direct mailed every home, every week, and were focused on burying me.
Prior to them coming to town, I was in my financial comfort zone. After losing some market share, I went on a budget. Time were slower around Big Dave’s. I was going to let them have their openings and then hammer them with some great marketing. They had a huge advantage over me. They both served 14-inch pies and called them larges. If you bought a large at Big Dave’s it was a 16-inch diameter. I assumed my astute customers would take notice and pay the extra money for a much bigger pizza. I wrong. Most customers were confused. When they ordered from the chains they got a 14-inch large and when they ordered from me they got a 16-inch large.
Pizza is made, assembled, portioned and should be priced by the square inch. Unfortunately it’s sold and priced by the diameter. A refresher math class: to determine the square inch of a circle, multiply pi (3.14) time radius (half the diameter) times itself. Step by step, let’s determine the square inches of a 16-inch pie. Pi R2 is 3.14 (pi) x 8 x 8 = 200.96, or 201 square inches rounded off. A 14-inch inch pizza has 154 square inches, 3.14 x 7 x 7 = 154. The difference is a whopping 23 percent. It costs 23 percent less to make a 14-inch rather than a 16-inch pizza. The menu price should reflect a 23 percent difference. A 10-inch pizza only has 78.5 sq. inches. This is pretty close to being exactly half of a 14” pizza. Most pricing models are throwbacks to the ’60s and ’70s when a dollar probably covered the difference between the sizes.
Those days are over. A dollar barely covers the cheese needed to cover both larges. If you are offering a 16-inch large and are making a reasonable profit, stay with it for the time being. If you are offering a 16-inch large and are experiencing profit shrink you need to change something. If your market is price sensitive and you have customer migration to the coupons and specials strategies used by the competition, you might want to consider what Kamron Karington and I did. In order to compete on a level playing field and compare apples to apples the larges should be the same diameter. We both downsized from 16 to 14 (the national average size). Kamron did it over a year, dropping to 15 and then 14 inches. I did it overnight. We had very few complaining customers once we explained that we chose to adopt the national average of 14 inches so the like coupons would be less confusing. This strategy allowed me to accept their coupons and not be humiliated by their pricing.
You have to choose to leave menu pricing the same or not. Either way, your food cost percentage will decrease. By offering bundled meals and multiples your contribution margin will be better than it is per transaction now. Maybe we should take a lesson from the Big Guys and downsize. It’s one way to really boost the bottom line without another menu increase. This was one of the biggest decisions of my career. I tossed and turned on it for weeks. I was old school, and proud of it. After the tenth complaint call, I was ready to go back to the old ways. After the second week was over the, 16-inch large was a memory. Kind of like the two-handed Whopper.
There is nothing that can be done that I am aware of. Yes, there are a host of different flour types that you can replace a portion of the wheat flour with, such as spelt flour, rice flour, amaranth flour and buckwheat flour, but all of these options are actually more expensive than wheat flour, so there wouldn’t be any cost advantage to using them. Occasionally, you can come across a very good deal on flour at one of the large club stores. The problem is that it is targeted primarily for the home consumer and it may not posses the quality characteristics that we expect from our flour. To this you can also add inconsistency –– if it works well for you once, don’t bet on it working for you the next time. That’s the gamble you take in this instance, but you can hedge your bets and still use the flour advantageously if you simply blend it with your existing flour of known good quality.
We have found that you can typically blend a flour of questionable quality with a flour of known quality at a 25-percent substitution and still make great quality pizzas. For practical purposes, this means that you could blend 10 to 15 pounds of an unknown or even a known, lower quality flour into 35 or 40-pounds of your regular pizza flour and still make an overall, great quality pizza, but at a lower cost. How much lower would depend upon the price that you paid for the lower cost flour.
You also may trim off a little cost with your dough formula. If you are using 100-percent pure olive oil, think about changing to a blended oil consisting of 10- to 30-percent olive oil with the rest being a lower cost vegetable oil (such as canola oil). This will still give all of the great flavor characteristics of the olive oil, but at a significantly lower cost. Look for any ingredients of questionable functionality, such as whole eggs, or egg whites, or milk in any of its various forms. For the most part, these ingredients only serve as a browning agent, much in the same way that sugar does, but they are a lot more costly, so replacing them with a little added sugar might also bring a little added cost relief.
We can possibly realize some cost savings in weighing ingredients. Portioning is an estimation of ingredient amount, while weighing is a more precise way to portion the ingredients. This allows us to accurately determine the exact cost of our dough. Think of it this way: if you’re off as little as $0.02 per pound of dough every time you mix a dough containing 50-pounds of flour, you will be off on your food cost by a total of $1.62. How many of those doughs do you mix over the course of the year? I’m betting that the cost saved will be more than enough to offset the roughly $380 cost of an electronic scale.
The same can be said for our topping ingredients, especially cheese. If you’re not weighing your cheese portions, it is easy to add an additional ounce of cheese to a pizza. Multiply this times the number of pizzas made during a month, divide by 16 and you have the total pounds of cheese literally being given away. Some stores have reported savings in cheese cost alone as much as $400 in a single month just as a result of weighing their cheese. This can be further expanded to include the other toppings for additional savings.
Let’s say you’re on the short list for a promotion with your company. A big promotion. If you get it you’ll take on far more responsibility and you definitely feel up to the challenge. But the salary attached to the job is a little well, lackluster—especially in light of your experience. You’d love to ask for more money but frankly, you’re afraid to. The economy still isn’t great so I’d better lie low, you reason. No, it’s not what I was hoping for, but if I get too pushy I’m sure they’ll pass me over for one of the other candidates. I should just be grateful to have made the cut.
If you’re like many women, this just seems like common sense. But according to Vickie Milazzo, settling for less than you’re worth is a big mistake—even in the wake of the Great Recession. In fact, it might even cost you the job.
“When I’m hiring, I actually weed out candidates who underprice themselves because I assume they won’t perform at the level I expect,” shares Milazzo, author of the new book Wicked Success Is Inside Every Woman. “In my eyes and in the eyes of many other CEOs, job candidates actually lose credibility when they underprice themselves.
“Many women mistakenly think they’re doing their employers a favor by not pushing for more or that they’ll be more appealing if they don’t ask for what they’re worth,” she adds. “The bad economy might be the current excuse, but I believe most underpricing occurs because many women just aren’t comfortable with negotiating.”
In fact, a recent article in The New Yorker, might prove Milazzo’s theory right. It found that only 7 percent of women negotiate their salaries up-front when entering a new position…compared to 57 percent of men.
“Those statistics are pretty telling,” Milazzo comments. “And I want them to change. Women can and do negotiate all the time outside the workplace—with spouses, with kids, with teachers, with friends—and we can do it in a professional setting, too. It’s just a matter of changing the way you think about asking for money.”
If you’re ready to stop sitting back and start negotiating like you mean it, read on for nine of Milazzo’s tried-and-true tips.
• Never let them see you as a commodity. After all, commodities are easy to obtain and easy to replace. And that’s certainly not how you want to be perceived at your job—whether you’re an employee, a leader, or an entrepreneur. After all, if the people you’re working with know that others share your skill set, they won’t have any reason to pay the price you’re asking for. They’ll be in control, not you. From Day One, do everything you can to ensure that you aren’t seen as interchangeable or dispensable.
“Don’t shrink into your chair and become the invisible employee,” Milazzo urges. “Do what you need to do to stand out. Get in the middle of everything and bring new ideas to the table. Build relationships throughout the company. If you’re able to make yourself invaluable and leverage the things that make you unique, you’ll also make yourself impossible to replace. And when that happens, you’ll be in control of your own price.”
• Distinguish ambition from greed. Prior to launching yourself into a negotiation, it’s a good idea to take a step back and ask yourself why you’re working toward this particular goal. For example, say you’ve been in your current position for two and a half years without a significant raise, and you think your skills are worth much more. Before you march into your boss’s office, ask yourself: Why do I want a raise? Do I just want more money, or am I honestly interested in advancing in this company?
“It’s very important to distinguish ambition from greed,” Milazzo insists. “Wanting more money isn’t a bad thing in and of itself, but it can get you into trouble if your quest for cash mires you deeper in a commitment you’re not passionate about or causes you to ignore opportunities that might be ideally suited to your strengths and interests. Always make sure you’re negotiating for the right reasons. I’m ambitious and competitive, but I’ve left very large sums on the table because the opportunity wasn’t something I was passionate about. And I haven’t regretted those decisions once.”
• Be your own number one fan. It can be hard for women to toot their own horns. To a certain extent, we’re actually wired to nurture and care for others and to put the good of the whole over our own personal interests. While these impulses aren’t inherently bad, it’s time for a newsflash: if you don’t announce your own achievements, you can bet that no one else is going to do it for you. With humility, make sure that you’re keeping your name, your accomplishments, and your skill set in front of everyone.
“Have you ever noticed that women tend to downplay their accomplishments, while men routinely highlight their achievements and use them to advance?” Milazzo asks. “Recall the stat on men and women making salary negotiations when they’re hired. Clearly, we females need to take a page from the male playbook and make sure that we’re getting the recognition and credit we’ve earned. If you still have doubts, consider that announcing your accomplishments validates the investments others have made in you. Your boss, for example, wants to know that she bet on a winner when she hired you!”
• Ask for everything at the beginning of the negotiation. This can also be a difficult strategy for women to adopt. We don’t want to come on too strong or appear to be overly aggressive, so we don’t put all of our cards on the table at the beginning of negotiations. We tell ourselves that we’ll get the other person used to the idea gradually. But especially in business, adding on as you go along generally isn’t a good idea because it makes you appear unfair.
“Consider this situation,” Milazzo asks. “If, for example, you tell a prospect your consulting fee is $150 per hour and his reply is, ‘That’s very reasonable,’ you can’t jump in and say, ‘Well, but what I really want is $175 per hour.’ Think through what you want before you sit down to negotiate. Prepare the list of points you must have and the points you’re willing to give up. Remember that some people do keep score, so being able to track what you really need helps you let the other party win points as you score big.”
• Ask for more than you think you can get. Remember the old adage: nothing risked, nothing gained. Don’t jump too fast to say yes to the first offer, even if you think it’s fair. It's always smart to assess the situation, the person making the offer, and how far you might be able to go before signing your name on the dotted line. Chances are, if your request for more is denied, you’ll still be left with the initial offer.
“If this sounds like greed, it’s not,” Milazzo clarifies. “Asking for more than you think you can get is part of being a strong negotiator. You have to be your own advocate! I remember mentoring an entrepreneur whose client wanted to pay her a flat rate for a project. However, the project involved a lot of moving parts, and a flat fee could end up costing her instead of making her a profit. Despite this woman’s fears that she’d lose the project altogether unless she agreed to her client’s unfavorable terms, I encouraged her to stand firm and insist on an hourly fee. She did—and got what she asked for!”
• Appear detached (even when you’re not). Unfortunately, many people won’t hesitate to exploit a weakness if you let them see it. When you negotiate from a place of fear or desperation, your ability to be rational will be impaired…and you’ll also be susceptible to agreeing to unfavorable terms; in other words, anything to save the deal! If, despite your best efforts, you’re unable to banish your emotions, make an effort to appear detached.
“I remember an especially pivotal day for my own business,” Milazzo recalls. “I was sitting with an attorney-prospect, and I was scared that he wouldn’t hire me. Then I realized that if this man said no, there were a million more potential clients out there. This insight gave me the ability to detach when negotiating. One attorney wouldn’t make or break my business, but entering into bad deals because I was too caught up in making a deal certainly would.”
• Negotiate with the person, not the power. Unless your name happens to be listed on a FORTUNE list entitled “50 Most Powerful Women,” at some point or another you’ll probably find yourself negotiating with a more powerful party—whether it’s your boss, your boss’s boss, or another organization. When that happens, don’t make the mistake of assuming that your bargaining power is weak just because you’re at a lower level in the company hierarchy or because your business is smaller than theirs. Yes, this power imbalance might make negotiating more challenging, but you have a lot to offer, too.
“Remember that ultimately, you’re talking to another human being,” Milazzo reminds. “Try not to become so overawed by rank or position that you forget that! I have rewritten entire contracts with companies much bigger than mine—companies who claimed I had to sign their offer ‘as is’—by remembering that I was ultimately dealing with other people, not with a faceless corporation. I have learned that everything is negotiable, so if you have something to offer, go ahead and negotiate!”
• Never talk off the record. When you’re negotiating for something you want, make sure you only go public with information you’re comfortable with the other party knowing.
“Never tip your hand,” Milazzo insists. “You may think that saying to a colleague, ‘Just between you and me, I’m asking to spearhead the new project, but I’d settle for just being on the team,’ will stay between the two of you. Maybe it will—but maybe it won’t. If you let others know that you’ll settle for something, you risk ending up with that instead of with what you really want—or worse, even less.”
• Never let yourself be bullied.Women who aren’t used to negotiating are especially susceptible to being intimidated by a show of force—but even veteran businesswomen can be taken aback by unexpected aggression or resistance! If you find yourself in this situation, remind yourself (once again) that you are dealing with another human being and that you have something valuable to offer. Don’t be afraid to demand respect. And if you consistently don’t get it, well, it might be time to rethink whether you want to work with the other party in the first place.
“I’ve worked with plenty of attorneys, met some tough negotiators, and seen many different negotiation styles,” Milazzo says. “When I'm up against a pit bull, I'll take a walk and role-play with my husband Tom, who can be a pit-bull himself. I anticipate every possible objection and get myself into a Zen-like state. When it comes time to negotiate for real, I am centered and ready. I know that if I allow myself to be intimidated or provoked instead of remaining calm and professional, the negotiations are destined to fail.”
Now you might be thinking, That’s all well and good…but times really are tough and money really is in short supply. So no matter how great a negotiator I might be, does it really matter if the money just isn’t there?
“Yes, times are difficult for many right now and your odds of getting what you want at work might not be as high as they were five years ago,” Milazzo concedes. “But why give up before you even start? What’s to be gained from that? I believe it’s better to ask and not receive than to not ask and to meekly settle for less than you deserve.”
“Besides, it’s when times are hard that raw talent and know-how really count,” she adds. “Right now, more than ever, you deserve to get paid what you’re worth. Don’t let anyone—including yourself—forget just how much you’re bringing to the table.”

Right behind food cost is your second most expensive controllable expense: labor. Labor cost, or L/C, is usually referred to as a percentage of gross sales. I stayed on top of hourly labor like a hawk. My point of sale system served as my time clock and provided real time labor amounts in dollars as well as percentage of gross. My manager’s pay was a combination of salary and bonus based on performance. The biggest area he was in charge of was achieving an ideal prime cost. Prime cost, or P/C, is defined as the combination of total food cost (F/C) and labor cost. Every operation varies somewhat because of service style and prevailing wages. At Big Dave’s Pizza, the prime cost was 55 percent. We ran about a 30-percent F/C and a 25 percent L/C. These percentages could move just as long as the P/C stayed at 55 percent. Most operations I work with hover around 60-percent prime.
To accurately state the correct labor percentage one must take into account several areas. The first is salaries and wages, both management and hourly. In addition, one must add in payroll taxes (FICA-Medicare) worker’s comp insurance, any medical insurance and other benefits. These expense categories should be grouped together under payroll on your profit and loss statement.
The snapshot that you get from your POS labor screen usually doesn’t reflect anything but labor that is on the clock. The above soft costs usually will add 5 to 6 percent of additional costs to the real number that will be reflected on your financials.
The steps we implemented to achieve a terrific labor cost were written in stone. Every week my manager and scheduler projected the next week’s sales based on prior weeks’ same-sales. Once that dollar amount was determined we knew how much money we had in the budget to spend on labor. Hypothetically, if a store had weekly gross (less sales tax) sales of $10,000 and their ideal labor cost percentage is 30 percent, you’ll have $2,500 to spend on wages and salary. The soft costs will add another 5 percent, so you’ll hit 30 percent when the week is said and done. The first days we scheduled were Friday and Saturday. I wanted to have those two very busy days covered with my most productive, trained staff. I call it “put your aces in their places.” I slotted my fastest pizza-makers, drivers and counter crew in their most productive slots for the shift. These days were normally two or three times as busy as weekdays. During peak sales shifts my productivity increased. Everyone on staff was working full speed. I often recorded 12 and 13 percent labor hours. These highly productive sales bursts helped shore up high labor days when sales were low. It still takes a minimum amount of staff to deliver great service and food. During slow weekdays, I couldn’t help but run higher than average ideal labor. The trick is to have the week or payroll cycle balance out.
Consistent numbers are almost impossible to achieve unless your staff is highly trained. One highly trained cook or driver can out-produce two or three under-trained employees. One of my fastest pizza-makers was Mark H. This guy could hand stretch, spin, sauce and cheese a 14-inch pizza and put it in the oven in 19 seconds. His only request: “Don’t let my table run out of ingredients and stay out of my space.” Mark was trained and mentored by Cookin’ Correlle. Sarah F. could take a phone order, repeat it back and suggestively upsell extra cheese or breadsticks in 48 seconds. The customer never felt rushed. Sarah was trained by my manager, G.I. Joe. I was the slowest order taker at 63 seconds. My head prep cook, David J., could mix, weigh out, roll and refrigerate a 75-pound batch of dough singlehandedly in 21 minutes. I trained David J. He was a nut case and required gentle handling. These folks had one thing in common: they shared a fundamental principal of Big Dave’s –– a high sense of urgency. They also had time expectations they shot for. We timed every operation in the store and knew how long it took to complete almost any task. Tasks that are measured improve. If you don’t have the bar set, times will vary.
Every one of my superstar eagles started out on the bottom of the schedule when they were a probationary newbie. Ninety-percent of all new hires were sponsored by an existing eagle. After you worked for me for six months, you could sponsor a new hire. After a deep and through background check and a group interview, the newbie was brought into the family. The newbie’s sponsor took on the responsibility of transforming their friend into an awesome, competent, quick and smiling customer-pleasing crew person. Every sponsor entered into a handshake contract with me at the time we hired in their friend. If their friend was doing well at the end of 10 weeks I gave the sponsor a $100 bill from my wallet. If for any reason the newbie wasn’t with us at 10 weeks, the sponsor gave me $50. I never got any half-hearted endorsements. These folks put their money where their mouth was. If no one would sponsor a potential new hire I assumed there was a good reason … and passed on the hire.
Cross-Training is Key
When the majority of your staff is cross trained so they can perform tasks and duties outside of their normal job, you’ll never fear being understaffed for any rush. Although you are paying more, the pure productivity of this kind of crew will cost much less than staffing with average people. This is how we held our labor percentage very close to 25 percent.
This intensive training costs money. You have to decide if you want to invest the time and money into new hires. You may think, “What if I get them all trained up and they quit?” I say, “What if you don’t and they stay?”

Chances are, your employees think you strike it rich with each sale. They don’t realize you have to keep your lights on, buy more cheese and market to keep customers. If you make a $10 sale, they think you’re putting $10 in your pocket. Boy, wouldn’t a 100 percent profit margin be nice?
If you haven’t taken the time to show your employees how things really work, now’s the time. The economy has tightened. Cheese prices are high. Gas prices are high. The minimum wage has increased. You don’t have much to show for every dollar you bring in. If your employees are careless about waste — or if their thieving — you are not making any money. Take a good look at the graphic that accompanies this article. Cut it out and hang it up for your employees to see just how little is left over for you at the end of the day.
Roughly, before taxes, the average pizzeria operator has a 7 percent net profit.
Here’s a breakdown of the average operator’s expenses:
• Food and Beverage, 30 percent
• Labor & Benefits, 35 percent
• Occupancy (rent, taxes, insurance, phone, supplies, common area maintenance, etc.), 20 percent
• Administrative, 8 percent
• Net profit before taxes, 7 percent
Gone are the days of the 10- or 15-percent profit margins. You aren’t getting rich off of each sale, so let your employees know that. It will make a difference.
Many pizzeria operators view accountants as scorekeepers who produce reports that document results. That’s too bad, because good accountants can become proactive partners. They can help you plan for more optimal year-end results and assist you in refining future strategies. They can also create tools that better enable you to steer your business.
There are several questions you should ask your accountant during this tax season. Here are some:
• What could I do to lower my tax bite? Your goal is to make profit, but you’d prefer to pay as little taxes on that profit as possible. Your proactive accountant can advise you on several possibilities to lower the tax liability. He might suggest taking a full Section 179 on all equipment purchases. Typically, most capital purchases are written off over five or seven years. But Section 179 allows one to take $108,000 of capital in the year of purchase. So, if you buy three new vehicles for $15,000 each, you could elect to take a $45,000 deduction instead of the ordinary $9,000($45,000 divided by 5).
Another lowering strategy is to maximize a Simple IRA or Sep plan. One can put as much as $44,000 into a SEP-IRA, and that lowers the tax bite significantly. A third strategy could be to hire that consultant you’ve always wanted and pay up-front. Alternatively, you could give year-end bonuses to key staffers.
• Is this a good time to buy equipment for tax-deductions? Could you purchase new machinery now in anticipation of the new store you are planning to open next year? You can take the full deduction now and let the new store’s high opening costs keep down profit next year. Or perhaps it would be better to wait until next year, where you will have a greater need to reduce profitability. Major purchases are always a timing issue.
• Are there any changes in the tax code that could be meaningful? Tax rules change every year. For instance, a decade ago, a home office was a red flag to the IRS. But today, with the 2003 tax revision, a person can have an office at his place of business and still have a home office. Now, home offices have become a common occurrence. The definition of contract workers has become more refined: now only some types of part-time jobs can be considered contract work. The recent credits for hybrid vehicles might have relevance to vehicle purchasing decisions. New HSAs (health savings accounts) might be an excellent vehicle for reducing company health insurance costs.
• What could you do to increase sales? Don’t forget your pro-active accountant is a good businessman also. He may have some suggestions for you in your relentless quest to improve sales. For instance, he could suggest catering possibilities, such as promoting pizza parties through community giveaway prizes. Or she could suggest a new product (toasted walnut pizza?) Or the accountant might come up with a scheme to reward the best employee of the week with a crisp $50 bill as a way to improve staff morale. New ideas can revitalize a business, and pizza store operators should be continually looking to make constructive changes.
• Do I need to increase or decrease end-of-year profit? The bottom line can be tweaked, and now is the time to do it. Say you would like to appear marginally profitable this year, so you will want to reduce income. Or perhaps your banker wants to see banner results, so you will want to produce as rosy a profit picture as possible. Your accountant can offer many suggestions. They include pumping up or down inventory, making last-minute capital purchases, selling off unused equipment, pre-booking future business, eliminating owner salary in the last few months, and paying next month’s bills in advance, or the opposite, delaying paying bills. These last-minute strategies can jimmy up or jimmy down profit.
• Could a finer breakdown give me more information to make decisions? Possibly, your accountant could create reports which help you manage better. Could a daily breakdown of food-to-sales be used to identify employee pilferage, including giving product to friends? Perhaps a staffing-to-sales ratio could point up labor under-utilization. Could a driver delivery breakdown point out the most efficient drivers? Perhaps a store-by-store product category breakdown could point up marketing opportunities. For example, one store does a much better job selling salads, and the explanation turns out to be that the store has a better counter presentation and more aggressive upselling. Such information would help you implement a chain-wide revision. This is a perfect time to challenge the accountant to focus on specific areas that need improvement.
• Re-examine the own vs. rent scenario. Maybe now is a better time to purchase a building because of lowering real estate values. Or could it be time to unload your storefront property and use the cash to expand your operation? Changing times call for changing opinions, and one never knows unless one asks.
• Can I take a raise? This question should be asked every year. You want the business to be successful, but you also want to reward yourself for good results. Perhaps now is the time to initiate a $150 a week raise to compensate for those early years where you took a negligible wage. You accountant can figure out the cash flow consequences as well as the full tax implications. One determination he will make is whether your marginal income is taxed less as wages or as profits.
Ask your accountant what else she can do for you. Who knows what has passed over her desk. Maybe she has met a new bookkeeper who would be the perfect office manager. Perhaps the accountant has learned about an inexpensive payroll program, which would work for you. Possibly, the accountant has learned about a new low-cost health insurance program, which, if adopted, could save you thousands. The point is, you never know unless you ask.
Whether you are a solo shop or a regional chain, make your end-of-the-year visit profitable by making your accountant a proactive partner.
‘Tis the season to be frugal? Consumers are finding their disposable cash at an all-time low. The reality of a recession has hit home. Consumers now have to be more discreet than ever or change their ways — and change does not come easy. Dining out is still a large part of the American lifestyle, but its trends often mirror the economy.
Many operators in the pizza industry are experiencing drops in sales and profits. How can an operator adapt to the changing times and keep his customer base alive and well? Here are a few suggestions adopted from trends I’ve seen throughout the restaurant industry.
Rebates – People love them, like an operator, a consumer looks at the bottom line. How can you offer rebates? Maybe you already do and all you need to do is adopt some consumer friendly language, such as ‘Buy 5 XL pizzas and receive a $5 rebate check good on your next pizza purchase’.
A rebate can be as simple as a gift certificate. Obtaining a rebate is a consumer motivation. This tactic can increase the frequency of a consumer’s purchases. We tend to call such buying incentives “reward programs”, but in trying times consumers’ loyalty can wane. Renaming your program will attract a consumer with language they are becoming increasingly familiar with. Using gift certificates as your rebate will also heighten awareness of this ‘product’ on your menu. Statistics show that an average of 16 percent of gift certificates are never redeemed — pure profit for you. Those that redeem their gift certificates for full value can usually be upsold another 15 percent.
Value Menus – Fast food giants present their value menus to masses and find success. It is widely acknowledged that upon taking your family to a fast food joint, your wallet becomes $25 lighter. You did not experience quality or value, yet you still go. Why, because they have successfully positioned themselves as a value meal replacement.
Can we do a similar thing? Sure. Take your quality product and create a $9.99 Menu. I am not advocating deep discounts. I am promoting that you take the time to ask yourself “What can I offer for 9.99?” This will give the perception that we are not only a quality product, but a value, too — and value is a top concern for consumers in a recession. Try to come up with five items: a small pizza plus sodas, a medium pizza, an XL pizza with a thin crust and lite cheese (lower food cost, health benefits) and so forth. Once we attract the price-conscious consumer, the sale comes naturally. Ask yourself, “Did I order from the value menu the last time I went to a fast food joint?”
Another trend we see in fast casual is that $5.99 seems to be the magic number of what the market will bear for a meal. Once again, can we apply that to our operation? Can you offer a sandwich, chips and drink for $5.99? It doesn’t have to be a steak or bacon. Why not ham, or a veggie, or a smaller version of one of your signature items? People are looking for an affordable way to get through these times without making major lifestyle changes. Position yourself to be a reasonable option, then work to increase their frequency as you gain top-of-mind awareness.
Consumer Appeal — Combo ads with perceived value still remain the most popular in our industry. It now takes a little more to get them in the door, though. Add a tag or ‘bottom headline’ to your ad. You may also have to communicate your message in more appealing ways. Take this short letter, for example.
“Make your pizzeria a trick-or-treat stop. Bring your kids to my pizzeria on Halloween and receive a 'treat' — plus, get your picture taken with our mascot (costumed employee....). We will e-mail you a copy of the picture.”
Now, you have their e-mail address in your database. The marketing cost? Minimal. The same tactic can be applied to any holiday, and it’s an excellent way to show some goodwill, create traffic, build a database and communicate your message in a very cost-effective way.
YOU - Zig Ziglar once alleged, “You cannot tailor-make the situations in life, but you can tailor-make the attitudes to fit those situations”. The media is full of gloom and doom. Your positive attitude in the face of adversity will project to consumers that you are a thriving survivor. If you are not personally adding value, you are decreasing the profits of the company.
Your pizzeria may not be all things to all people, but you can be all things to your customers if you put yourself in their shoes and adapt your persona to appeal to their interests.
I'm not sure what I should expect to pay for rent. What percentage of my sales should rent account for?
You really can’t know what your sales will be projected at until you find an appropriate space that is suitable for your concept. When you find the best spot for yourself, then you need to determine what your sales should be, and if it is feasible to achieve that goal in that space. Ultimately you’d like to see your rent at between 5 to 8 percent, with variations depending on your area.
The kind of bankruptcy that a business files is not always the same and will require consultation with legal counsel to determine which filing makes the most sense. The five types of bankruptcy are:
• Chapter 7. This applies to an individual, a couple or business partners. A trustee is put in charge of identifying which assets will be exempted from bankruptcy. The rest of the assets are then sold and distributed among creditors.
• Chapter 9. This type of bankruptcy proceeding particularly deals with municipalities.
• Chapter 11. Usually only applies to business corporations. It usually involves restructuring, debt consolidation and other means of reorganization.
• Chapter 12. This type of bankruptcy is exclusively for family farmers and fishermen. All debts are paid out of future earnings.
• Chapter 13. A bit like Chapter 11, but for an individual. The filer is allowed to retain his property and pay off his credits out of his future salary.
The pizza business is currently drifting in unchartered waters. The old model of making, baking and serving a praiseworthy pizza with a smile just isn’t enough to pay the bills anymore. What are we to do to prosper in the future? I’ve heard this question a thousand times at International Pizza Expo and other events this year. Here is my take on how to deal with the “new” normal way of thriving in the pizza business.
I’m going to make a big assumption here. Your pizza, salads, sandwiches and other menu offerings are absolutely the best. If you have any doubts on your products, you’d better be working on raising the bar. I’ll make another big assumption –– your entire staff is on their game. They have emotionally bought in to your way of doing business, have the service mentality DNA gene and have been trained to over deliver service.
Praiseworthy pizza as well as memorable service is the new watermark for being recession proof.
The overwhelming majority of operators I visit and work closely with are at the top of their game in product and service. The big roadblock that keeps them in the “just getting by” lifestyle is, in my humble opinion, accountability.
Who do you answer to when your profitability tanks? Do you know where to look for and how to follow the money trail? Or do you play the blame game? I can’t tell you how many times I’ve asked the question, “What are you doing different to change your status quo?” Well….what are you doing different? Have you developed an iron grip on portion control? Are you getting timely accurate financials from a real accountant that really understands your business? Do you understand accounting? Does this person ever challenge your financial decisions and percentages? I predict that in the future only the business savvy entrepreneurs will thrive.
Nobody ever told me that I would need a depth of knowledge that would rival a lawyer and accountant when I opened the first Big Dave’s Pizza in 1972. Back then in the dark ages, all you needed was praiseworthy pies and service with a smile. You also had to enroll in the School of Hard Knocks. My personal tuition bill ran into the six figures with all the bad decisions I made. I know I have an MBA and probably a PhD if I ever quantified the money I lost, left on the table and just plain stolen from me in my career. Then again, there was no one to ask and nowhere to go for answers. Now, there is.
Suppliers: Have you submitted your Buyers Guide and Pizza Expo info yet? Click HERE to submit your information.
About Us | History | Meet the Staff | Freelance Writer's Guide | Contact Us | Privacy Policy | Media Kits
Information | News and Views | Recipes | Vendor Directory | Classifieds | About Us | Subscribe | Archives
Pizza Today Network | Pizza Today on Facebook | Pizza Today on Twitter | Pizza Today on YouTube | International Pizza Expo | NAPO (National Association of Pizzeria Operators)



.jpg)

Contact Us | Media Kits | Tablet Versions


























